2007 C230 Mercedes Benz Manual

Document Sample
2007 C230 Mercedes Benz Manual Powered By Docstoc
					                                                                                    Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG




                                                                                                                   Operator’s Manual
                                                                                                                     C-Class Sedan




                                                                    C-Class Sedan
                      2   0   3   5   8   4   3   4   7   1

Order No. 6515 0183 13 Part No. 203 584 34 71 USA Edition A, 2007
C 230
C 230 Sport
C 280
C 280 4MATIC
C 350
C 350 4MATIC
C 350 Sport
Our company and staff congratulate you           Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new                      return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz.                                   handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon-        Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company            contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your           signed to acquaint you with the opera-
desire to own an automobile that will be as      tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
                                                 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
                                                 and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef-            They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts-      safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure,       cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
                                              We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
                                              of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
                                              Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
                                              A DaimlerChrysler Company
                                                                                                                                                                     Contents




Introduction .......................................... 9   At a glance .......................................... 21     Getting started...................................          31
Product information................................ 9       Cockpit................................................. 22   Unlocking .............................................     32
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10        Instrument cluster ................................ 24            Unlocking with the SmartKey .........                   32
    Service and warranty information .. 10                  Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26                  Starter switch positions..................              32
    Important notice for California                         Center console ..................................... 27       Adjusting ..............................................    34
    retail buyers and lessees                                   Upper part ...................................... 27          Seats ..............................................    34
    of Mercedes-Benz automobiles ...... 11                      Lower part ...................................... 28          Steering wheel................................          38
    Maintenance .................................. 12       Overhead control panel ........................ 29                Mirrors............................................     41
    Roadside Assistance ...................... 12           Door control panel................................ 30         Driving..................................................   43
    Change of address or ownership.... 12                                                                                     Fastening the seat belt ...................             43
    Operating your vehicle                                                                                                    Starting the engine .........................           46
    outside the USA or Canada ............ 13                                                                                 Parking brake .................................         48
Where to find it.................................... 14                                                                       Driving ............................................    48
Symbols............................................... 15                                                                     Switching on headlamps.................                 50
Operating safety .................................. 16                                                                        Turn signals ....................................       50
    Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16                                                                              Windshield wipers...........................            51
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17                                                                               Problems while driving....................              53
Reporting safety defects...................... 18                                                                         Parking and locking..............................           54
    Reporting Safety Defects ............... 18                                                                               Parking brake .................................         54
Vehicle data recording......................... 19                                                                            Switching off headlamps.................                55
    Information regarding                                                                                                     Turning off engine...........................           55
    electronic recording devices .......... 19                                                                                Releasing seat belts........................            56
                                                                                                                              Locking ...........................................     56
Contents



                                                                                                                              Lighting .............................................   109
Safety and Security ...........................            57   Controls in detail ............................... 91             Exterior lamp switch ....................            109
Occupant safety...................................         58   Locking and unlocking ......................... 92                Combination switch .....................             113
    Air bags ..........................................    59      SmartKey ....................................... 92            Corner-illuminating front
    Occupant Classification System.....                    64      Checking the batteries................... 95                   fog lamps* (C 230 (Canada only),
    Seat belts .......................................     69      Loss of SmartKey                                               C 280, C 350 and models
    Active head restraint ......................           73      or mechanical key .......................... 95                with 4MATIC: with
    Children in the vehicle....................            74      Opening the doors from the inside. 96                          Bi-Xenon* headlamps) .................               113
    Blocking of                                                    Opening the trunk .......................... 96                Hazard warning flasher ................              115
    rear door window operation ...........                 80      Closing the trunk............................ 97               Interior lighting ............................       116
Panic alarm* ........................................      81      Trunk emergency release ............... 98                     Door entry lamps .........................           117
    Activating .......................................     81      Valet locking .................................. 99            Trunk lamp...................................        117
    Deactivating ...................................       81      Automatic central locking .............. 99                Instrument cluster .............................         118
Driving safety systems.........................            82      Locking and unlocking                                          Adjusting
    ABS ................................................   82      from the inside............................. 100               instrument cluster illumination ....                 118
    BAS ................................................   84   Seats ................................................. 101       Coolant temperature gauge .........                  119
    ESP® ...............................................   85      Front seat active head restraints . 101                        Resetting trip odometer ...............              119
    Four wheel electronic traction                                 Rear seat head restraints ............. 101                    Tachometer..................................         120
    system (4MATIC) with the ESP® .....                    88      Lumbar support............................ 105                 Outside temperature indicator.....                   120
Anti-theft systems................................         89      Multicontour seats*                                        Control system ..................................        121
    Immobilizer.....................................       89      (Canada only) ............................... 105              Multifunction display....................            121
    Anti-theft alarm system* ................              89      Seat heating*............................... 106               Multifunction steering wheel........                 122
                                                                Memory function* ............................. 107                Menus..........................................      124
                                                                   Storing positions into memory ..... 108                        Standard display menu ................               126
                                                                   Recalling positions from memory. 108                           AUDIO menu ................................          127
                                                                                                                                  NAV* menu..................................          129
                                                                                                                                                           Contents



   Vehicle status                                            Climate control................................... 164      Charcoal filter ............................... 183
   message memory menu ...............                 130      Deactivating the                                         Air conditioning ............................ 184
   Settings menu..............................         131      climate control system ................. 167             Residual heat and ventilation
   Trip computer menu.....................             144      Operating the climate control                            (Canada only)................................ 185
   TEL menu* ...................................       146      system in automatic mode............ 167                 Rear passenger compartment
Manual transmission .........................          149      Setting the temperature................ 168              adjustable air vents ...................... 186
   Shifting into reverse.....................          150      Adjusting air                                         Audio system...................................... 187
Automatic transmission*...................             151      distribution and volume ................ 168             Audio and telephone, operation.... 187
   Gear selector lever.......................          151      Adjusting air volume ..................... 169           Operating safety ........................... 187
   Shifting procedure .......................          152      Front defroster.............................. 169        Operating and display elements ... 188
   Gear selector lever positions .......               153      Air recirculation mode .................. 170            Button and soft key operation ...... 190
   Driving tips...................................     155      Air conditioning............................. 172        Operation...................................... 190
   Gear ranges .................................       156      Rear passenger compartment                               Radio operation ............................ 194
   Automatic shift program ..............              157      adjustable air vents....................... 173          Introduction to satellite radio*
   One-touch gearshifting.................             158   Automatic climate control .................. 174            (USA only)..................................... 197
   Emergency operation                                          Deactivating the automatic                               CD mode....................................... 201
   (Limp-Home Mode) ......................             159      climate control system ................. 177             GSM network phones ................... 208
Good visibility ....................................   160      Operating the automatic                                  TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 214
   Headlamp cleaning system* ........                  160      climate control system                                   Emergency calls “911” ................. 219
   Rear view mirrors .........................         160      in automatic mode ........................ 177        Power windows .................................. 221
   Sun visors ....................................     161      Setting the temperature................ 178              Opening and closing
   Rear window sunshade* ..............                162      Adjusting air distribution............... 178            the windows ................................. 221
   Rear window defroster .................             163      Adjusting air volume ..................... 179           Synchronizing power windows...... 222
                                                                Front defroster.............................. 179        Summer opening feature .............. 223
                                                                Maximum cooling MAXCOOL ........ 180                     Convenience closing feature......... 223
                                                                Air recirculation mode .................. 181
Contents



Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................             224                                                                   At the gas station ..............................         271
    Opening and closing                                        Operation .........................................       259       Refueling......................................       271
    the power tilt/sliding sunroof ......                224   The first 1000 miles (1500 km).........                   260       Check regularly
    Synchronizing                                              Driving instructions............................          261       and before a long trip...................             273
    the power tilt/sliding sunroof ......                226       Drive sensibly – save fuel.............               261   Engine compartment .........................              274
Driving systems .................................        227       Drinking and driving .....................            261       Hood ............................................     274
    Cruise control...............................        227       Pedals ..........................................     261       Engine oil .....................................      276
Loading ..............................................   230       Power assistance .........................            262       Transmission fluid level................              277
    Roof rack*....................................       230       Brakes..........................................      262       Coolant level ................................        278
    Ski sack* (Canada only) ...............              230       Driving off ....................................      263       Battery .........................................     279
    Split rear bench seat* ..................            233       Parking.........................................      264       Windshield washer system
    Loading instructions.....................            235       Tires .............................................   264       and headlamp cleaning system*..                       280
    Cargo tie-down rings* ..................             236       Hydroplaning................................          265   Tires and wheels................................          281
Useful features ..................................       237       Tire traction..................................       265       Important guidelines ....................             281
    Storage compartments.................                237       Tire speed rating ..........................          266       Tire care and maintenance...........                  282
    Cup holders..................................        239       Winter driving instructions ...........               267       Direction of rotation.....................            284
    Ashtrays .......................................     241       Standing water.............................           268       Loading the vehicle ......................            284
    Cigarette lighter ...........................        242       Passenger compartment ..............                  268       Recommended
    Power outlet.................................        243       Driving abroad..............................          268       tire inflation pressure...................            289
    Telephone*...................................        244       Control and operation                                           Checking tire inflation pressure ...                  290
    Tele Aid* ......................................     247       of radio transmitters ....................            268       MOExtended system* ..................                 294
    Garage door opener* ...................              253       Catalytic converter.......................            269       Tire labeling .................................       295
                                                                   Emission control ..........................           270       Load identification .......................           299
                                                                   Coolant temperature....................               270       DOT, Tire Identification Number
                                                                                                                                   (TIN) .............................................   299
                                                                                                                                   Maximum tire load .......................             301
                                                                                                                                                                Contents



   Maximum tire inflation pressure ..                 301                                                              Replacing bulbs.................................. 367
   Uniform Tire Quality Grading                             Practical hints .................................. 321         Bulbs............................................. 368
   Standards (U.S. vehicles) .............            302   What to do if … ................................... 322        Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 370
   Tire ply material ...........................      304      Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 322                   Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 373
   Tire and loading terminology........               304      Lamp in center console................. 331             Replacing wiper blades ...................... 375
   Rotating tires ...............................     307      Vehicle status messages                                     Removing and installing
Winter driving ....................................   308      in the multifunction display........... 333                 wiper blades ................................. 375
   Winter tires ..................................    308   Where will I find ...? ............................ 356    Flat tire............................................... 377
   Block heater (Canada only) ..........              309      First aid kit.................................... 356       Preparing the vehicle .................... 377
   Snow chains.................................       309      Vehicle tool kit.............................. 356          Mounting the Minispare wheel...... 377
Maintenance......................................     310      Minispare wheel............................ 359             MOExtended system* ................... 382
   Maintenance service indicator                               Spare wheel bolts ......................... 360         Battery ............................................... 383
   message.......................................     310   Unlocking/locking in an emergency... 361                       Disconnecting the battery ............ 384
   Calling up the maintenance                                  Unlocking the vehicle.................... 361               Removing the battery ................... 384
   service indicator display...............           312      Locking the vehicle ....................... 362             Charging and
   Resetting the                                               Manually unlocking the                                      reinstalling the battery.................. 385
   maintenance service indicator .....                312      transmission gear selector lever ... 363                    Reconnecting the battery ............. 385
Vehicle care.......................................   313   Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 364                  Jump starting...................................... 386
   Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..                313      Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ........... 364             Towing the vehicle.............................. 388
                                                            Resetting activated head restraints.... 365                    Installing towing eye bolt .............. 390
                                                               Resetting                                               Fuses.................................................. 391
                                                               activated head restraints .............. 365                Main fuse box
                                                            Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 366                  in passenger compartment........... 392
                                                               SmartKey ...................................... 366         Fuse box
                                                                                                                           in engine compartment................. 392
                                                                                                                           Fuse box in trunk .......................... 394
Contents



                                                               Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. .........          409
Technical data..................................         395      Capacities ....................................   409   Index................................................. 419
Parts service ......................................     396      Engine oils....................................   412
Warranty coverage.............................           397      Engine oil additives ......................       412
   Loss of Service and Warranty                                   Air conditioning refrigerant ..........           412
   Information Booklet......................             397      Brake fluid....................................   412
Identification labels............................        398      Premium unleaded gasoline .........               413
Layout of poly-V-belt drive .................            400      Gasoline additives ........................       413
Engine................................................   401      Fuel requirements ........................        414
Rims and Tires ...................................       403      Flexible Fuel Vehicles
   Same size tires.............................          404      (C 230/C 230 Sport only)............              414
   Mixed size tires ............................         405      Coolants.......................................   416
   Minispare wheel ...........................           406      Windshield washer and
Electrical system................................        407      headlamp cleaning system*.........                418
Main dimensions and weights............                  408
   Main dimensions ..........................            408
   Weights ........................................      408
                                                                                                                     Introduction
                                                                                                            Product information
  Product information
Please observe the following in your own    We are unable to make an assessment for         Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest:                              other products and therefore cannot be          conversion parts and accessories
                                            held responsible for them, even if in indi-     approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
                                            vidual cases an official approval or authori-   authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
                                            zation by governmental or other agencies        you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
                                            should exist. Use of such parts and acces-      tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
                                            sories could adversely affect the safety,       cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine     performance or reliability of your vehicle.     be performed.
their reliability, safety and special       Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.




                                                                                                                                     9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual


This Operator’s Manual contains a great         We continuously strive to improve our          Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to      product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself      that we reserve the right to make changes      The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving.                in design and equipment. Therefore, infor-     Booklet contains detailed information
                                                mation, illustrations and descriptions in      about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
                                                this Operator’s Manual might differ from       Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
                                                your vehicle.                                     New Vehicle Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam-      Optional equipment is also described in           Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you    this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail-       tions wherever necessary. Since they are          Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by    special-order items, the descriptions and         California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.             illustrations herein may vary slightly from       Vermont Emission Control System
                                                the actual equipment of your vehicle.             Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.             If there are any equipment details that are       (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for        not shown or described in this Operator’s         Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your        Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz             State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about        Center will be glad to inform you of correct      (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, your            care and operating procedures.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be         The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
glad to demonstrate the proper proce-           Booklet are important documents and
dures.                                          should be kept with the vehicle.




10
                                                                                                                              Introduction
                                                                                                                        Operator’s Manual


Important notice for California retail              (1) the same substantial defect or mal-          (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz                     function results in a condition that is          of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles                                             likely to cause death or serious bodily          stantial defects or malfunctions for a
                                                        injury if the vehicle is driven, that de-        cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to             fect or malfunction has been subject to          30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund               repair two or more times, and you have       Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if                directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,         dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its au-                   LLC in writing of the need for its repair,   Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
thorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
                                                    (2) the same substantial defect or mal-          Customer Assistance Center
one or more substantial defects or mal-
                                                        function of a less serious nature than       One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
                                                        category (1) has been subject to repair      Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
                                                        four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
                                                        ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
                                                        its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:




                                                                                                                                             11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual


Maintenance                                  Roadside Assistance                           Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the    The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance         If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should      Program provides factory-trained technical    send in the “Change of Address Notice”
be performed at regular intervals.           help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to    found in the Service and Warranty
                                             the toll-free Roadside Assistance number      Information Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
                                                                                           Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to your au-    1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
                                                                                           Center (in the USA) at
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ser-       1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
                                                                                           1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
vice. The service advisor will record each
                                             will be answered by Mercedes-Benz             Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It
service in the booklet for you.              Customer Assistance Representatives           is in your own interest that we can contact
                                             24 hours a day, 365 days a year.              you should the need arise.
                                             For additional information refer to the       If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
                                             Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance             literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
                                             Program Brochure in your vehicle literature   able to the next operator.
                                             portfolio.
                                                                                           If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
                                                                                           send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
                                                                                           Car” found in the Service and Warranty
                                                                                           Information Booklet, or call the
                                                                                           Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
                                                                                           ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
                                                                                           or Customer Service (in Canada) at
                                                                                           1-800-387-0100.




12
                                                                                            Introduction
                                                                                        Operator’s Manual


Operating your vehicle outside the USA        Certain Mercedes-Benz models are avail-
or Canada                                     able for delivery in Europe under our
                                              European Delivery Program. For details,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-   consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
eign countries, please be aware that          Center or write to:
   service facilities or replacement parts    In the USA:
   may not be readily available,
                                              Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
   unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-   European Delivery Department
   alytic converters may not be available;    One Mercedes Drive
   the use of leaded fuels will damage the    Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
   catalysts,
                                              In Canada:
   gasoline may have a considerably low-
                                              Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
   er octane rating, and improper fuel can
                                              European Delivery Department
   cause engine damage.
                                              98 Vanderhoof Avenue
                                              Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9




                                                                                                      13
Introduction
Where to find it


This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information          Controls in detail                               Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section     Here you will find detailed information          All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color.                    about the equipment installed in your vehi-      cle can be found in this section.
                                                cle. This section expands on the “Getting
                                                started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance                                                                                      Indexes
                                                cal innovations. If you are already familiar
Here you will find an overview of all the       with the basic functions of your vehicle,        The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the          this section will be of particular interest to   signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat.                                  you.                                             and easily.
                                                                                                 The following publications are part of your
Getting started                                 Operation                                        vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you      Here you will find all the information you          this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read      need for the proper operation of your vehi-         the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first        cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent-                                                        Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle.                                                                   provided as required depending on the
                                                Practical hints                                  equipment options installed in your
                                                                                                 vehicle.
                                                This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security                             dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.




14
                                                                                                                       Introduction
                                                                                                                              Symbols
  Symbols
Trademarks:                               The following symbols are found in this                 This symbol points to instructions for
                                          Operator’s Manual:                                      you to follow.
   ESP® is a registered trademark of
   DaimlerChrysler.                       *         Optional equipment is identified              A number of these symbols appearing
              ®                                     with an asterisk. Since standard              in succession indicates a multiple-step
   HomeLink is a registered trademark
                                                    equipment varies between models,              procedure.
   of Prince, a Johnson Controls
                                                    the descriptions and illustrations in
   Company.                                                                                      Page    This symbol tells you where to
                                                    this manual may differ slightly from
                                                                                                         look for further information on a
   SIRIUS and related marks are trade-              the actual equipment of your
                                                                                                         topic.
   marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.             vehicle.
                                                                                                         This continuation symbol marks
                                                                                                         a procedure which is continued
                                              Warning!                             G                     on the next page.
                                              Warning notices draw your attention to haz-                This continuation symbol marks
                                              ards that may endanger your health or life,                a warning which is continued on
                                              or the health or life of others.                           the next page.
                                                                                            ->           This symbol is used to indicate
                                          ! Highlights hazards that may result in dam-                   cross-references to term defina-
                                          age to your vehicle.                                           tions.
                                          i Helpful hints or further information you may    Display      Words appearing in the multi-
                                          find useful.                                                   function display and audio dis-
                                                                                                         play are printed in the type
                                                                                                         shown here.




                                                                                                                                      15
Introduction
Operating safety


                                                                                                   Proper use of the vehicle
 Warning!                               G        Warning!                                 G
                                                                                                   Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
 Work improperly carried out on electronic       Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody         are familiar with the following information
 components and associated software could        or tires/wheels, for example when running         and rules:
 cause them to cease functioning. Because        over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
                                                                                                      the safety precautions in this manual
 the vehicle’s electronic components are         may cause serious damage and impair the
 interconnected, any modifications made          operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a      the “Technical data” section in this
 may produce an undesired effect on other        sudden significant vibration or ride distur-         manual
 systems. Electronic malfunctions could          bance, or you suspect that damage to your            traffic rules and regulations
 seriously impair the operating safety of your   vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
 vehicle.                                        your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow         motor vehicle laws and safety
                                                 down, and drive with caution to an area              standards
 See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
 for repairs or modifications to electronic      which is a safe distance from the road.
 components.                                     Inspect the vehicle underbody and                  Warning!                                G
 Other improper work or modifications on the     tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
                                                 vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the       Various warning labels are attached to your
 vehicle could also have a negative impact on
                                                 nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center            vehicle. These warning labels are intended
 the operating safety of the vehicle.
                                                 or other qualified maintenance or repair           to make you and others aware of various
 Some safety systems only function while the     facility for further inspection or repairs.        risks. You should not remove any of these
 engine is running. You should therefore                                                            warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
 never turn off the engine while driving.                                                           do so by information on the label itself.
                                                                                                    Removal of any of these labels may cause
                                                                                                    you and others to be unaware of certain
                                                                                                    risks which may result in an accident and/or
                                                                                                    personal injury.


16
                                                                                                                   Introduction
                                                                                                  Problems with your vehicle
  Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9




                                                                                                                                 17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects


For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting Safety Defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.




18
                                                                                                                    Introduction
                                                                                                          Vehicle data recording
  Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
   for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
   with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
   in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
   for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
   as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.




                                                                                                                                  19
20
                     At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel




                               21
At a glance
Cockpit




22
                                                                                                   At a glance
                                                                                                        Cockpit


   Item                    Page       Item                       Page         Item                        Page
1 Cruise control lever      227    a Hood lock release             274    h Combination switch
2 Multifunction steering     26,   b Steering wheel release         39           Turn signals               50
  wheel                     122      handle (manual)                             Windshield wipers          51
3 Horn                             c Steering wheel adjustment      40           High beam                  50
4 Instrument cluster         24,     stalk (electrical)*
                                                                          j Exterior lamp switch            50,
                            118    d Parking brake pedal         48, 54                                    109
5 Overhead control panel     29    e Remote trunk opening           97    k Exterior rear view mirror       42,
6 Glove box lid release     237      switch                                 adjustment                     160
7 Glove box lock            237    f Door control panel             30    l Headlamp washer button*        160
8 Center console             27    g Parking brake release          48

9 Starter switch             32




                                                                                                            23
At a glance
Instrument cluster




24
                                                                                                      At a glance
                                                                                              Instrument cluster


   Item                     Page       Item                           Page       Item                         Page
1 Speedometer with:                       Program mode*                157       < Seat belt telltale           69,
   v Electronic Stability     85,         Status indicator (outside    120,                                    328
     Program (ESP®)          327          temperature/digital          135       A High beam head-              50,
     warning lamp                         speedometer)                             lamp indicator lamp         113
   ; Brake warning lamp, 48, 54,          Digital clock                121    6 Fuel gauge with:
     USA only               324     4 K Right turn signal               50       Fuel reserve warning lamp     328
   3 Brake warning lamp, 48, 54,        indicator lamp                           4 The arrow indicates
     Canada only            324     5 Tachometer with:                 120         that the fuel filler cap
   B Low beam headlamp        50,      - Antilock Brake                 82,        is on the rear
     indicator lamp          109         System (ABS)                  322         right-hand side.
2 L Left turn signal          50         indicator lamp                       7 Coolant temperature gauge      119
    indicator lamp                     ú Engine malfunction            325,   8 Button for:
3 Multifunction display      121         indicator lamp,               326          Resetting trip odometer    119
  with:                                  USA only
                                                                                    Resetting all settings     131
      Trip odometer          119       ± Engine malfunction            325,
                                         indicator lamp,               326          Instrument cluster         118
      Main odometer          121                                                    illumination
                                         Canada only
      Gear selector lever     47,
      position*              121,      1 Supplemental                   58,
                             153         Restraint System              330
                                         (SRS) indicator lamp



                                                                                                                25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel


                                  Item                       Page         Item                              Page
                               1 Multifunction display        121    4 Menu systems:
                                  Operating control system    122      Press button

                               2 Selecting the submenu or                 è for next menu
                                 setting the volume:                      ÿ for previous menu
                                 Press button                        5 Moving within a menu:
                                  æ up/to increase                     Press button
                                  ç down/to decrease                      j for next display
                               3 Telephone*:                              k for previous display
                                 Press button
                                  s to take a call
                                    to dial a call
                                  t to end a call
                                    to reject an incoming
                                    call

                                                                    i C 230 Sport and C 350 Sport:
                                                                    Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from
                                                                    steering wheel shown. However, multifunction
                                                                    steering wheel symbols and feature description
                                                                    apply to Sport models as well.




26
                                                                                   At a glance
                                                                                 Center console
  Center console
Upper part             Item                         Page       Item                       Page
                   1 Seat heating*, driver’s side    106   8 Seat heating*, passenger      106
                   2 Rear window sunshade            162     side
                     switch*                               9 Front passenger front          68,
                          ®
                   3 ESP control switch               85     air bag off indicator lamp    332,
                                                                                           339
                   4 Hazard warning flasher          115
                     switch – switching on/off             a Audio system,                 187

                   5 Central locking switch          100       or

                       Central unlocking switch      100       COMAND* (see separate
                                                               operating instructions)
                   6 Switch for folding back rear    103
                     seat head restraints                  b Automatic climate control*    174

                   7 Anti-theft alarm system          90       Climate control             164
                     indicator lamp*                           Rear window defroster       163




                                                                                            27
At a glance
Center console


Lower part          Item                         Page
                 1 Ashtray                        241
                    Cigarette lighter             242
                 2 Gear selector lever for         47,
                   automatic transmission*        153
                    Gearshift lever for manual     46,
                    transmission                  149
                 3 Cup holder                     239
                 4 Storage compartment/tele-      238
                   phone* compartment under
                   the center armrest
                 5 Program mode selector          157
                   switch for automatic
                   transmission*




28
                                                                             At a glance
                                                                   Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
                             Item                          Page
                         1 Rear interior lighting on/off    117
                         2 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*      224
                         3 Right reading lamp on/off        117
                         4 Interior lighting control        116
                         5 Interior rear view mirror         42,
                                                            160
                         6 Garage door opener*              253
                         7 Hands-free microphone for        146,
                           Tele Aid* (emergency call        208,
                           system) and telephone*           247
                         8 Left reading lamp on/off         117
                         9 Tele Aid* (emergency call        247
                           system) button




                                                                                      29
At a glance
Door control panel


                         Item                          Page
                     1 Inside door handle                96
                     2 Memory function* (for            107
                       storing seat, exterior mirror
                       and steering wheel settings)
                     3 Switches for seat                 34,
                       adjustment*                      101
                     4 Switches for                     221
                       opening/closing front door
                       windows
                     5 Rear door window override         80
                       switch
                     6 Switches for                     221
                       opening/closing rear door
                       windows
                     7 Remote trunk lid switch           97




30
                 Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking




                             31
Getting started
Unlocking


The “Getting started” section provides an     Unlocking with the SmartKey                          Press unlock button Œ on the
overview of the vehicle’s most basic func-                                                         SmartKey.
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
                                                                                                   All turn signal lamps flash once. The
should pay special attention to the infor-
                                                                                                   locking knobs in the doors move up.
mation given here.
                                                                                                   The anti-theft alarm system* is
If you are already familiar with the basic                                                         disarmed.
functions described here, the “Controls in
                                                                                                   Get in the vehicle and insert the
detail” section ( page 92) will provide you
                                                                                                   SmartKey in the starter switch.
with further information. The correspond-
ing page references are located at the end                                                      For more information, see “Locking and
of each segment.                                                                                unlocking” ( page 92).
                                              SmartKey with remote control
                                                                                                Starter switch positions
                                              1 ‹ Lock button
                                              2 Š Opening button for trunk
                                              3 ΠUnlock button                                  Warning!                              G
                                              4 Â Panic button* ( page 81)
                                                                                                 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                              i Canada only:
                                              Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm    SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                              system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic       with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
                                              button* 4.                                         children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                                                                 access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                                                                 unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                                                                 result in an accident and/or serious
                                                                                                 personal injury.



32
                                                                                                                       Getting started
                                                                                                                                 Unlocking


SmartKey                                   2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical         i Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
                                             consumers) and driving position.                  The SmartKey can only be removed from the
                                             All lamps (except low beam headlamp               starter switch with the gear selector lever in
                                             indicator lamp, high beam headlamp in-            position P.
                                             dicator lamp, and turn signal indicator           i If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
                                             lamps unless activated) in the instru-            position 0 for an extended period of time, it can
                                             ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the            no longer be turned in the switch. In this case,
                                             instrument cluster fails to come on               the steering is locked. To unlock, remove
                                             when the ignition is switched on, have            SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
                                             it checked and replaced if necessary. If
                                                                                               ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
                                             a lamp in the instrument cluster re-              starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
Starter switch                               mains on after starting the engine or             ly charged.
 0 For removing SmartKey                     comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps               Check the battery and charge it if necessary
   The steering is locked when the           in instrument cluster” ( page 322).                   ( page 383).
   SmartKey is removed from the starter    3 Starting position
                                                                                                   Get a jump start ( page 386).
   switch.                                i When you switch on ignition, the indicator         To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge
 1 Power supply for some electrical       and warning lamps (except low beam headlamp          or a completely discharged battery, always re-
   consumers, such as seat adjustment     indicator lamp, high beam headlamp indicator         move the SmartKey from the starter switch when
                                          lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps unless ac-     the engine is not in operation.
                                          tivated) in the instrument cluster come on. The
                                          indicator and warning lamps (except low beam
                                          headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
                                          indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps if
                                          activated) will go out when the engine is running.
                                          This indicates that the respective systems are
                                          operational.



                                                                                                                                             33
Getting started
Adjusting



 Warning!                               G        Warning!                                 G        Warning!                               G
 All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and   Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.    When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas-   Adjusting the seat while driving could cause      SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
 tening of seat belts, must be done before       the driver to lose control of the vehicle.        with you, and lock the vehicle.
 the vehicle is put into motion.                 Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat      Even with the SmartKey removed from the
                                                 back in an excessively reclined position as       starter switch, the power seats* can be
Seats                                            this can be dangerous. You could slide un-        operated when the respective door is open.
                                                 der the seat belt in a collision. If you slide    Therefore, do not leave children unattended
The seats can be adjusted either manually        under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-   in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s      domen or neck. That could cause serious or        vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
equipment.                                       fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts      ment may cause an accident and/or serious
For more information, see “Seats”                provide the best restraint when the wearer        personal injury.
( page 101).                                     is in a nearly upright position and belts are
                                                 properly positioned on the body. Your seat
                                                 must be adjusted so that you can correctly
                                                 fasten your seat belt ( page 43).
                                                 Never place hands under the seat or near
                                                 any moving parts while a seat is being
                                                 adjusted.




34
                                                                                                                     Getting started
                                                                                                                              Adjusting


                                                   Manual seat adjustment                          Allow handle 1 to reengage with an
 Warning!                                 G                                                        audible click.

 According to accident statistics, children                                                        Check for proper engagement before
 are safer when properly restrained in the                                                         driving.
 rear seating positions than in the front seat-
 ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend                                                      Seat cushion tilt
 that children be placed in the rear seats                                                         Turn handwheel 2 forward or back-
 whenever possible. Regardless of seating                                                          ward until your upper legs are lightly
 position, children 12 years old and under                                                         supported.
 must be seated and properly secured in an
 appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or      1 Seat fore and aft adjustment               Seat backrest tilt
 booster seat recommended for the size and         2 Seat cushion tilt                             Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
 weight of the child. For additional               3 Seat backrest tilt
 information, see “Children in the vehicle”                                                        Press switch 3 in direction of arrow
                                                   4 Seat height
 ( page 74).                                                                                       until your arms are slightly angled
                                                                                                   when holding the steering wheel.
 A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is    Seat fore and aft adjustment
 significantly increased if the child restraints
                                                      Lift handle 1.                            Seat height
 are not properly secured in the vehicle
 and/or the child is not properly secured in          Slide seat to the desired position.          Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
 the child restraint.                                 Adjust seat to a comfortable seating         Press switch 4 in direction of arrow
                                                      position that still allows you to reach      until your legs are lightly supported.
! When moving the seats, make sure that               the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
there are no items in the footwell or behind the      The position should be as far rearward
seat. Otherwise you could damage the seats.           as possible, consistent with ability to
                                                      properly operate controls.

                                                                                                                                        35
Getting started
Adjusting


Head restraint height                                                                               Head restraint adjusting
                                                 Warning!                                  G
                                                 For your protection, drive only with properly
                                                 positioned head restraints.
                                                 Adjust head restraint so that the head re-
                                                 straint supports the back of the head at eye
                                                 level. This will reduce the potential for injury
                                                 to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
                                                 cident or similar situation.
                                                 Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
1 Release button                                 head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
                                                                                                    Manually adjust the head restraint.
Raising:                                         ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-            Push or pull the head restraint cushion
                                                 dent.                                                 to the desired position.
    Manually adjust the height of the head
    restraint by pulling it upward.                                                                 i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
                                                                                                    it is as close to the head as possible.
Lowering:
                                                                                                    For more information, see “Seats”
    To lower the head restraint, push
                                                                                                    ( page 101).
    release button 1 and push down on
    the head restraint.
i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
it is as close to the head as possible.




36
                                                                                                                      Getting started
                                                                                                                                 Adjusting


Power seat* adjustment                     i The memory function* (        page 107) lets    Seat cushion tilt
                                           you store the settings for the power seat*, the
The seat adjustment switches are located                                                         Press switch up or down in direction of
                                           steering wheel adjustment (electrical*) and the
on the respective front door.              exterior rear view mirrors.                           arrow 3 until your upper legs are
                                                                                                 lightly supported.
                                           Seat fore and aft adjustment
                                                                                             Seat backrest tilt
                                               Press switch forward or backward in
                                               direction of arrow 4.                             Press switch forward or backward in
                                                                                                 direction of arrow 5 until your arms
                                               Adjust seat to a comfortable seating              are slightly angled when holding the
                                               position that still allows you to reach           steering wheel.
                                               the accelerator/brake pedal safely.
                                               The position should be as far rearward        Seat height
                                               as possible, consistent with ability to
1 Head restraint height                        properly operate controls.                        Press switch up or down in direction of
2 Seat height                                                                                    arrow 2.
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat fore and aft adjustment                                                               Head restraint height
5 Seat backrest tilt                                                                             Press switch up or down in direction of
     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                          arrow 1.

or                                                                                           i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
                                                                                             it is as close to the head as possible.
     Open the respective door.




                                                                                                                                       37
Getting started
Adjusting


                                                    Head restraint adjusting                         Steering wheel
 Warning!                                  G
 For your protection, drive only with properly                                                        Warning!                                G
 positioned head restraints.
 Adjust head restraint so that the head re-                                                           Do not adjust the steering wheel while
 straint supports the back of the head at eye                                                         driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while
 level. This will reduce the potential for injury                                                     driving, or driving without the steering wheel
 to the head and neck in the event of an ac-                                                          adjustment feature locked could cause the
 cident or similar situation.                                                                         driver to lose control of the vehicle.

 Do not drive the vehicle without the seat                                                            When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 head restraints. Head restraints are
                                                    Manually adjust the head restraint.               SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
 intended to help reduce injuries during an             Push or pull the head restraint cushion       with you, and lock the vehicle.
 accident.                                              to the desired position.                      Even with the SmartKey removed from the
                                                                                                      starter switch, the electrical steering wheel
                                                    i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that    adjustment feature* can be operated when
                                                    it is as close to the head as possible.
                                                                                                      the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not
                                                    For more information, see “Seats”                 leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
                                                    ( page 101).                                      with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsu-
                                                                                                      pervised use of vehicle equipment may
                                                                                                      cause an accident and/or serious personal
                                                                                                      injury.




38
                                                                                                                      Getting started
                                                                                                                                Adjusting


Steering wheel adjustment, manual               The handle for steering wheel adjustment          To lock the steering column, push
                                                is located below the steering column.             handle 1 all the way in until it
 Warning!                              G                                                          engages.
                                                                                                  The steering wheel is locked into posi-
 Only adjust the steering wheel with the                                                          tion again.
 vehicle at a standstill and make sure the
                                                                                                  Make sure the steering wheel is
 steering column is securely locked in place
                                                                                                  securely locked by trying to move it up
 before driving off.
                                                                                                  and down, and in and out before driving
 Driving without the steering column locked                                                       off.
 may cause an unexpected steering wheel
 movement which could cause the driver to                                                      ! Do not drive the vehicle until you have prop-
                                                                                               erly locked the steering column.
 lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the
                                                1 Steering wheel adjustment release
 steering column is securely locked by trying
                                                  handle
 to move it up and down, and in and out be-
 fore driving off.                                 To unlock the steering column, pull
                                                   handle 1 out to its stop limit.
                                                   Move steering wheel to the desired
                                                   position.
                                                   Make sure your legs can move freely
                                                   and that all the displays (including mal-
                                                   function and indicator lamps) on the in-
                                                   strument cluster are clearly visible.




                                                                                                                                         39
Getting started
Adjusting


Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*            Adjusting steering column in or out
The stalk for the electrical steering wheel          Move the stalk in direction of
                                                                                                  Warning!                               G
adjustment is located on the lower left of           arrows 1 until a comfortable steering        You must make sure no one can become
the steering column.                                 wheel position is reached with your          trapped or injured by the moving steering
                                                     arms slightly bent at the elbow.             wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
                                                                                                  activated.
                                                  Adjusting steering column up or down
                                                                                                  To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
                                                     Move the stalk in direction of               the following:
                                                     arrows 2.
                                                                                                      Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
                                                     Make sure your legs can move freely              ( page 40).
                                                     and that all the displays (including mal-        Press memory position switch*
                                                     function and indicator lamps) on the in-         ( page 108).
                                                     strument cluster are clearly visible.
                                                                                                  Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out                                                            hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down           Easy-entry/exit feature*
                                                                                                  Children could open the driver’s door and
   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).             This feature allows for easier entry into and   unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
                                                  exit from the vehicle. When entering and        feature, which could result in an accident
   or                                             exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in   and/or serious personal injury.
   Open the driver’s door.                        its uppermost position.

i The memory function* (        page 107) lets    The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
you store the settings for the power seat*, the   ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub-
steering wheel adjustment (electrical*) and the   menu of the control system ( page 144).
exterior rear view mirrors.



40
                                                                                                                              Getting started
                                                                                                                                         Adjusting


With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,        i If the current position for the steering wheel   Mirrors
the steering wheel will return to its last set     is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
position when you:                                 wheel will no longer be able to move upward        Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
                                                   when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.     mirrors before driving so that you have a
    close the driver’s door with the ignition
                                                   The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted    good view of the road and traffic condi-
    switched on,
                                                   when the engine is started.                        tions.
    or
    insert the SmartKey into the starter            Warning!                                 G         Warning!                                  G
    switch with the driver’s door closed.
                                                    Let the system complete the adjustment             In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may
i The last set steering wheel position is stored    procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-        escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
when
                                                    tion. All steering wheel adjustments must be       breaks.
    the ignition is switched off                    completed before setting the vehicle in mo-        Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not al-
    the position is stored in memory                tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still    low the liquid to come into contact with
    ( page 107)                                     adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-      eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,         trol of the vehicle.                               In case it does, immediately flush affected
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you:                                                             area with water, and seek medical help if
    remove the SmartKey from the starter                                                               necessary.
    switch,
    or                                                                                                ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
                                                                                                      the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
    open the driver’s door with the                                                                   removed while in their liquid state and by apply-
    SmartKey in starter switch position 0                                                             ing plenty of water.
    or 1.



                                                                                                                                                    41
Getting started
Adjusting


Interior rear view mirror                         The buttons are located above the exterior   ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
                                                  lamp switch.                                 pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
   Manually adjust the interior rear view
                                                                                               pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
   mirror.                                                                                     it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
For more information, see “Rear view mir-                                                      place. The mirror housing is now properly posi-
rors” ( page 160).                                                                             tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
                                                                                               manner.
Exterior rear view mirrors                                                                     i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
                                                                                               rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
 Warning!                                G                                                     i The memory function* (        page 107) lets
                                                                                               you store the settings for the exterior rear view
 Exercise care when using the passen-                                                          mirrors together with the settings for the steer-
 ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror   1 Adjustment button                          ing wheel and the driver’s seat position.
 surface is convex (outwardly curved surface      2 Passenger-side exterior rear view          For more information, see “Rear view mir-
 for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror      mirror button                              rors” ( page 160).
 are closer than they appear. Check your in-      3 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
 terior rear view mirror or glance over your        button
 shoulder before changing lanes.                     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
                                                     Press button 3 for the driver’s side
                                                     exterior rear view mirror or button 2
                                                     for passenger-side exterior rear view
                                                     mirror.
                                                     Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
                                                     left, or right according to the desired
                                                     setting.

42
                                                                                                                            Getting started
                                                                                                                                           Driving
  Driving

 Warning!                                G        Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-
                                                  sition your seat belt greatly increases your
                                                                                                     Warning!                                 G
 Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-     risk of injuries and their likely severity in an   According to accident statistics, children
 structing the pedals’ range of movement.         accident. You and your passengers should           are safer when properly restrained in the
 Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-   always wear seat belts.                            rear seating positions than in the front seat-
 cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in   If you are ever in an accident, your injuries      ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
 the footwell, make sure that the pedals still    can be considerably more severe without            that children be placed in the rear seats.
 have sufficient clearance.                       your seat belt properly buckled. Without           Regardless of seating position, children
 During sudden driving or braking maneu-          your seat belt buckled, you are much more          12 years old and under must be seated and
 vers, the objects could get caught between       likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be    properly secured in an appropriate infant or
 or beneath the pedals. You could then no         ejected from it. You can be seriously injured      toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
 longer brake or accelerate. This could lead      or killed.                                         mended for the size and weight of the child.
 to accidents and injury.                         In the same crash, the possibility of injury or    For additional information, see “Children in
                                                  death is lessened if you are wearing your          the vehicle” ( page 74).

Fastening the seat belt                           seat belt. The air bags can only provide the       A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
                                                  protection they were designed to afford if         significantly increased if the child restraints
                                                  the occupants are using their seat belts           are not properly secured in the vehicle
 Warning!                                G        ( page 69).                                        and/or the child is not properly secured in
                                                                                                     the child restraint.
 Always fasten your seat belt before driving
 off. Always make sure your passengers are
 properly restrained, even those sitting in the
 rear.




                                                                                                                                                 43
Getting started
Driving


                                                                                                    With a smooth motion, pull the belt
 Warning!                                 G          Warning!                               G       from the belt outlet.

 Never let more people ride in the vehicle           Read and observe the additional warning        Place the shoulder portion of the belt
 than there are seat belts available. Be sure        notices printed in the “Safety and Security”   across the top of your shoulder and the
 everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly         section ( page 62) and ( page 69).             lap portion across your hips.
 restrained with a separate seat belt. Never                                                        Push latch plate 1 into buckle 3 until
 use a seat belt for more than one person at                                                        it engages.
 a time.
                                                                                                    If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
                                                                                                    a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
                                                                                                    up.
 Warning!                                 G
 Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
 backrest in an excessively reclined position
 as this can be dangerous. You could slide
 under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
 under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
 domen or neck. That could cause serious or
 even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
 seat belt provide the best restraint when the
 wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
 belt is properly positioned on the body.           1 Latch plate
                                                    2 Release button
                                                    3 Buckle



44
                                                                                                               Getting started
                                                                                                                             Driving


Belt outlet height adjustment                 shoulder portion of the belt under your
                                              arm. For this purpose, you can adjust      Warning!                                G
                                              the height of the belt outlet.
                                                                                         Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
                                              Position the lap belt as low as possible   could tear.
                                              on your hips (over hip joint) and not
                                              across the abdomen.                        Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
                                                                                         door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
                                              Place the seat backrest in a nearly        This could damage the belt.
                                              upright position.
                                                                                         Never attempt to make modifications to
                                              Never use a seat belt for more than one    seat belts. This could impair the effective-
                                              person at a time.                          ness of the belts.
1 Release button
                                              Do not fasten a seat belt around a         Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
   Press release button 1 and move the        person and another object at the same      severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
   seat belt height adjuster upward or        time.                                      not be able to provide adequate protection.
   downward.
                                              When using a seat belt to secure infant    Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
                                              or toddler restraints or children in       stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Proper use of seat belts
                                              booster seats, always follow the child     Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
   Do not twist the seat belt when fasten-    seat manufacturer’s instructions.          Center.
   ing.
                                              Check your seat belt during travel to
   Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder      make sure that it is properly posi-
   portion is located as close as possible    tioned.
   to the middle of the shoulder (it should
                                              Make sure that the seat belt is always
   not touch the neck). Never pass the
                                              fitted snugly. Take special care of this
                                              when wearing loose clothing.


                                                                                                                                    45
Getting started
Driving


Starting the engine                              Manual transmission                         Starting
                                                                                                Depress brake pedal.
 Warning!                               G                                                       Make sure the gearshift lever is in
                                                                                                neutral position (no gear selected).
 Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
                                                                                                Fully depress clutch pedal.
 your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
 monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-                                                   Otherwise the engine cannot be
 consciousness and possible death.                                                              started due to the integrated safety
                                                                                                interlock.
 Do not run the engine in confined areas
 (such as garage) which are not properly ven-                                                   Do not depress the accelerator.
 tilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes    Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
                                                                                                Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
 are entering the vehicle while driving, have    For more information, see “Manual trans-       to position 3 ( page 32) and hold until
 the cause determined and corrected imme-        mission” ( page 149).                          the engine starts.
 diately. If you must drive under these condi-
 tions, drive only with at least one window                                                  For information on turning off the engine,
 fully open.                                                                                 see “Turning off engine” ( page 55).




46
                                                                                                                 Getting started
                                                                                                                           Driving


Automatic transmission*                     Starting                                     Starting difficulties
                                               Place the gear selector lever in          If the SmartKey is left in starter switch
                                               position P.                               position 0 for an extended period of time,
                                                                                         it can no longer be turned in the switch. In
                                               Do not depress the accelerator.
                                                                                         this case, the steering is locked.
                                               Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                               to position 3 ( page 32) and release it      To unlock, remove SmartKey from
                                                                                            starter switch and reinsert.
                                               again immediately. The engine then
                                               starts automatically.                     If the engine does not start as described,
                                                                                         carry out the following steps:
                                            For information on turning off the engine,
Gearshift pattern for automatic
                                            see “Turning off engine” ( page 55).            Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
transmission                                                                                position 0 and repeat the starting
                                                                                            procedure ( page 46).
 P Park position with gear selector lever
   lock                                                                                     Remember that extended starting
 R Reverse gear                                                                             attempts can drain the vehicle battery.
 N Neutral position                                                                         Get a jump start ( page 386).
 D Drive position
                                                                                         If the engine does not start after several
For more information, see “Automatic                                                     starting attempts, there could be a mal-
transmission*” ( page 151).                                                              function in the engine electronics or in the
                                                                                         fuel supply system.
                                                                                            Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                            Center.



                                                                                                                                 47
Getting started
Driving


Parking brake                                       Release parking brake by pulling on            i At vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
                                                    handle 1.                                      (15 km/h), the automatic central locking system
                                                                                                   engages and the locking knobs drop down.
                                                    The warning lamp ; (USA only)
 Warning!                              G            or 3 (Canada only) in the                      The automatic door lock feature can be deacti-
                                                                                                   vated ( page 143).
                                                    instrument cluster goes out.
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the                                                       You can open a locked door from the inside.
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it                                                         Open door only when conditions are safe to do
                                                Driving
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave                                                      so.
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                                                                   ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
 access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
 could release the parking brake, which
                                                 Warning!                                G         pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
                                                                                                   performance and causes premature brake and
 could result in an accident and/or serious                                                        drivetrain wear.
                                                 On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
 personal injury.
                                                 in order to obtain braking action. This could
                                                 result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
                                                                                                   ! Do not run cold engine at high engine
                                                                                                   speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
                                                 cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-     speeds may shorten the service life of the
                                                 vent this type of loss of control.                engine.


                                                ! If you hear a warning signal and the mes-
                                                sage Release parking brake appears in the
                                                multifunction display when driving off, you have
                                                forgotten to release the parking brake.
                                                Release the parking brake ( page 48).


1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal

48
                                                                                                                            Getting started
                                                                                                                                          Driving


Manual transmission                               Automatic transmission*
                                                                                                      Warning!                                G
    Depress the brake pedal.                      ! Wait for the gear selection process to com-
                                                  plete before setting the vehicle in motion.         It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le-
    Fully depress the clutch pedal.
                                                      Depress the brake pedal.                        ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
! In order to avoid damage to the transmis-                                                           er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
sion, place the gearshift lever to reverse gear       Move gear selector lever to position D
only when the vehicle is stopped.                                                                     on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
                                                      to drive forward, or to position R to
                                                                                                      erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
    Move gearshift lever to first gear to             drive rearward.
                                                                                                      could lose control of the vehicle and hit
    drive forward, or to reverse gear to          ! Place the gear selector lever in position P       someone or something. Only shift into gear
    drive rearward.                               or R only when the vehicle is stopped in order to   when the engine is idling normally and when
                                                  avoid damaging the transmission.                    your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
    Simultaneously release the brake pedal
    and slowly the clutch pedal.                      Release the brake pedal.
    Carefully depress the accelerator                 Carefully depress the accelerator
    pedal.                                            pedal.




                                                                                                                                                 49
Getting started
Driving


Switching on headlamps                         High beam                                  Turn signals
                                               The combination switch is located on the
                                                                                          The combination switch is located on the
Low beam headlamps                             left of the steering column.
                                                                                          left of the steering column.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.




                                               Combination switch
                                                                                          Combination switch
                                               1 High beam
                                                                                          1 Turn signals, right
Exterior lamp switch                           2 High beam flasher
                                                                                          2 Turn signals, left
1 Off                                             Push the combination switch in
                                                                                             Press the combination switch in
2 Low beam headlamps on                           direction of arrow 1.
                                                                                             direction of arrow 1 or 2.
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to               The high beam headlamps and the high
                                                                                             The corresponding turn signal indicator
   position B.                                    beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
                                                                                             lamp L or K in the instrument
                                                  the instrument cluster comes on
   The low beam headlamps and the low                                                        cluster flashes ( page 24).
                                                  ( page 24).
   beam headlamp indicator lamp B in
                                                                                             The combination switch resets
   the instrument cluster comes on             For more information on headlamps, see
                                                                                             automatically after major steering
   ( page 24).                                 “Lighting” ( page 109).
                                                                                             wheel movements.

50
                                                                                                                                   Getting started
                                                                                                                                                 Driving


i If the combination switch is pressed to the        ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when           Intermittent wiping
point of resistance and released, the                the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
corresponding turn signals will flash three times.   a windshield might scratch the glass and/or           ! Vehicles with rain sensor*:
                                                     damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on         Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent
                                                     a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the   setting when the vehicle is taken to an automatic
Windshield wipers                                                                                          car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wind-
                                                     windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, al-
                                                     ways operate the windshield wipers with wind-         shield wipers will operate in the presence of wa-
The combination switch is located on the                                                                   ter sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
                                                     shield washer fluid ( page 52).
left of the steering column.                                                                               wipers may be damaged as a result.
                                                     Switching on windshield wipers                        ! Vehicles with rain sensor*:
                                                                                                           If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on the
                                                         Turn the combination switch to the
                                                                                                           surface of the rain sensor or optical effects may
                                                         desired position depending on the                 cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an undes-
                                                         intensity of the rain.                            ired fashion. This could then damage the wind-
                                                         0 Windshield wipers off                           shield wiper blades or scratch the windows. You
                                                                                                           should therefore switch off the windshield wip-
                                                         I   Intermittent wiping                           ers when weather conditions are dry.
                                                         II Normal wiper speed                             Vehicles with rain sensor*:
                                                                                                           Intermittent wiping interval is dependent
                                                         III Fast wiper speed
Combination switch                                                                                         on wetness of windshield.
1 Single wipe                                                                                                  Turn the combination switch to
  Wiping with windshield washer fluid                                                                          position I.
2 Switching on windshield wipers
                                                                                                               Vehicles with rain sensor*:
    Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                                         After the initial wipe, pauses between
                                                                                                               wipes are automatically controlled by
                                                                                                               the rain sensor.


                                                                                                                                                       51
Getting started
Driving


i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the         Single wipe                                      ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is                                                         (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
                                                         Press the combination switch briefly in
opened. This protects persons getting into or out                                                      ly.
of the vehicle from being sprayed.                       direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
                                                         point.                                            For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
Intermittent wiping will be continued when                                                                 location and remove SmartKey from starter
      all doors are closed                               The windshield wipers wipe one time               switch before attempting to remove any
                                                         without washer fluid.                             blockage.
and
                                                                                                           Remove blockage.
      the clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with    Wiping with windshield washer fluid
      manual transmission)                                                                                 Turn the windshield wipers on again.
                                                         Press the combination switch in direc-        If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with
      or
                                                         tion of arrow 1 past the resistance           combination switch in position I,
      the gear selector lever is in position D or R      point.
      (vehicles with automatic transmission*)                                                              set the combination switch to the next high-
                                                         The windshield wipers operate with                er wiper speed
      or
                                                         washer fluid.                                     have the windshield wipers checked at the
      the wiper setting is changed using the com-                                                          nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
      bination switch                                 i To prevent smears on the windshield, or
                                                      noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind-
                                                      shield washer fluid every now and then even
                                                      when it is raining.
                                                      For information on filling up the washer
                                                      reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
                                                      and headlamp cleaning system*”
                                                      ( page 280).




52
                                                                                                               Getting started
                                                                                                                               Driving


Problems while driving                       The coolant temperature is                  In case of accident
                                             above 248°F (120°C)
                                                                                         If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
The engine runs erratically and misfires     The coolant is too hot and is no longer
                                                                                            Do not start the engine under any cir-
                                             cooling the engine.
   An ignition cable may be damaged.                                                        cumstances.
                                                Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
   The engine electronics may not be op-                                                    Notify local fire and/or police authori-
                                                soon as possible and turn off the en-
   erating properly.                                                                        ties.
                                                gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool
   Unburned gasoline may have entered           off.                                     If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
   the catalytic converter and damaged it.                                               termined:
                                                Check the coolant level and add
   Give very little gas.                        coolant if necessary ( page 278).           Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                            Center.
   Have the problem repaired by an au-
   thorized Mercedes-Benz Center as                                                      If no damage can be determined on the
   soon as possible.                                                                        Major assemblies
                                                                                            Fuel system
                                                                                            Engine mount
                                                                                            Start the engine in the usual manner.




                                                                                                                                   53
Getting started
Parking and locking


You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked             Warning!                                G             When parked on an incline, always turn
                                                                                                       the front wheels towards the road curb.
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
                                                 Do not park this vehicle in areas where               Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
                                                 combustible materials such as grass, hay or           to position 0 and remove.
 Warning!                               G        leaves can come into contact with the hot             Take the SmartKey with you and lock
                                                 exhaust system, as these materials could be           the vehicle when leaving, which could
 Vehicles with manual transmission:                                                                    endanger other road users when you en-
                                                 ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
 Wait until the vehicle is stationary before                                                           gage the parking brake.
 removing the SmartKey from the starter          To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
 switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when      damage to the vehicle or the vehicle
                                                                                                  Parking brake
 the SmartKey is removed.                        drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement,
                                                 always do the following before turning off
                                                 the engine and leaving the vehicle:
                                                                                                   Warning!                               G
 Warning!                               G            Keep right foot on brake pedal.
                                                     Manual transmission: Move the gear-           Do not engage the parking brake while the
 With the engine not running, there is no            shift lever into neutral position (no gear    vehicle is in motion. Doing so can cause the
 power assistance for the brake and steering         is selected).                                 rear wheels to lock up. You could lose con-
 system. In this case, it is important to keep       Firmly depress parking brake pedal.           trol of the vehicle and cause an accident. In
 in mind that a considerably higher degree of                                                      addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
                                                     Manual transmission: Move the gear-
 effort is necessary to brake and steer the                                                        light up when the parking brake is engaged,
                                                     shift lever into first or reverse gear.
 vehicle.                                                                                          which could endanger other road users.
                                                     Automatic transmission*: Move the
                                                     gear selector lever to position P.
                                                     Slowly release brake pedal.




54
                                                                                                                           Getting started
                                                                                                                     Parking and locking


                                                                                                  Turning off engine
                                                 access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
                                                 could release the parking brake and/or
                                                                                                      Manual transmission: Move the gear-
                                                 move the gear selector lever* from
                                                                                                      shift lever into first or reverse gear.
                                                 position P, either of which could result in an
                                                 accident and/or serious personal injury.             Automatic transmission*: Place the
                                                                                                      gear selector lever in position P.
                                                 Position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
                                                 cle from moving, possibly hitting people or          Apply the parking brake ( page 54).
                                                 objects. Always set the parking brake in ad-
                                                 dition to shifting to position P ( page 153)
                                                                                                  i Always set the parking brake in addition to
                                                                                                  shifting to position P (manual transmission: first
1 Release handle                                 (manual transmission: first or reverse gear      or reverse gear).
2 Parking brake pedal                            ( page 149)).
                                                                                                  On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the
   Step firmly on parking brake pedal 2.         When parked on an incline, turn front wheel      road curb.
                                                 towards the road curb.
   When the engine is running, the brake                                                              Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
   warning lamp ; (USA only)                     Getting out of your vehicle without taking           to position 0 ( page 32).
   or 3 (Canada only) in the                     the above measurements to secure it is
                                                                                                      Remove the SmartKey from the starter
   instrument cluster comes on.                  dangerous.
                                                                                                      switch.
                                                                                                      The immobilizer is activated.
                                                Switching off headlamps
 Warning!                              G                                                          i Vehicles with automatic transmission: The
                                                   Turn the exterior lamp switch to M             SmartKey can only be removed from the starter
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the       ( page 50).                                    switch with the gear selector lever in position P.
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave   For more information, see “Lighting”
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with    ( page 109).



                                                                                                                                                55
Getting started
Parking and locking


Releasing seat belts                                Locking                                         i If you hear a warning signal you have
                                                                                                    forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
    Press the seat belt release button                                                              opening the driver’s door.
    ( page 44).                                      Warning!                              G        In addition the message Switch off lights
    Allow the retractor to completely                                                               appears in the multifunction display.
                                                     To prevent possible personal injury, always    Switch off the headlamps.
    rewind the seat belt by guiding the
                                                     keep hands and fingers away from the door
    latch plate.                                                                                       Exit the vehicle and close all doors and
                                                     openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that     cially careful when small children are            the trunk.
the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get          around.                                           Press lock button ‹ on the
caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
                                                     Before closing doors, make sure there is no       SmartKey ( page 32).
mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or    possibility of someone getting caught in a            All turn signal lamps flash three
cause damage to the door and/or door trim pan-       door during closing.                                  times.
el. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.                                                                            An acoustic signal sounds three
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact         Warning!                              G               times.
                                                                                                           For more information, see “Factory
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                     When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                                           setting” ( page 93).
                                                     SmartKey from the starter switch, take it             The locking knobs in the doors
                                                     with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave          move down.
                                                     children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                                                                           The anti-theft alarm system* is
                                                     access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                                                                           armed.
                                                     unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                     result in an accident and/or serious           For more information, see “Locking and
                                                     personal injury.                               unlocking” ( page 92).


56
            Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm*
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems




                            57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


In this section you will learn the most im-   Air bag system components with                    The SRS components are in operational
portant facts about the restraint system                                                        readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
                                                  Front passenger front air bag off
components of the vehicle.                                                                      lit when the engine is running.
                                                  indicator lamp ( page 68)
   Seat belts ( page 69)                                                                        A malfunction in the system has been
                                                  Front passenger seat with Occupant
                                                                                                detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
   Child restraints ( page 77)                    Classification System (OCS)
                                                  ( page 64)                                       fails to go out after approximately
   Lower Anchors and Tethers for
                                                                                                   4 seconds after the engine was started
   CHildren (LATCH) ( page 79)                Although independent systems, their pro-
                                              tective effects work in conjunction with             does not come on at all
Additional protection potential provide
                                              each other.
                                                                                                   comes on after the engine was started
   Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
                                              i For information on infants and children            or while driving.
   with
                                              traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
       Air bags ( page 59)                    systems for infants and children, see “Children
                                              in the vehicle” ( page 74).                        Warning!                                G
       Air bag control unit (with crash
       sensors)                               The SRS system conducts a self-test when           Modifications to or work improperly con-
                                              the ignition is switched on and in regular         ducted on restraint systems (such as seat
       Emergency tensioning device (ETD)
                                              intervals while the engine is running. This        belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
       for seat belts ( page 72)
                                              facilitates detection of system malfunc-           devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
   Active head restraints ( page 73)          tions. The 1 indicator lamp in the in-             or their wiring, as well as tampering with in-
                                              strument cluster comes on when the                 terconnected electronic systems, can lead
                                              ignition is switched on and goes out no lat-       to the restraint systems no longer function-
                                              er than a few seconds after the engine has         ing as intended.
                                              been started.




58
                                                                                                                   Safety and Security
                                                                                                                            Occupant safety


                                                                                                  Air bags
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices,        In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
for example, could deploy inadvertently or       creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
fail to deploy in accidents although the de-
celeration threshold for air bag deployment
                                                 tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
                                                 ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
                                                                                                   Warning!                                   G
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re-     be performed by qualified technicians. Con-
                                                                                                   Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec-        tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                                   tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
tronic components or their software.             If it is necessary to modify an air bag system    pacts (front air bags) or side impacts (front
                                                 to accommodate a person with disabilities,        side impact air bags, rear side impact
                                                 contact your local authorized                     air bags* and window curtain air bags).
Warning!                                G        Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer         However, no system available today can to-
                                                 Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes           tally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
                                                 (1-800-367-6372) for details.
comes on during driving or does not come                                                           The deployment of the air bags temporarily
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a                                                       releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly                                                          bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
recommend that you visit an authorized                                                             to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have                                                           the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
the system checked; otherwise the SRS may                                                          porary breathing difficulty for people with
not deploy when needed in an accident,                                                             asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
which could result in serious or fatal injury,                                                     this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-                                                         as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
essarily which could also result in injury.                                                        breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
                                                                                                   vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
                                                                                                   fresh air by opening a window or door.




                                                                                                                                                  59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety



 Warning!                                G        Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-
                                                  ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
                                                                                                  Occupants, especially children, should
                                                                                                  always sit nearly upright, properly use
                                                  eration of vehicle controls. The distance       the seat belts and use an appropriately
 To reduce the risk of injury when the front
                                                  from the center of the driver’s breast-         sized infant or toddler restraint or boost-
 air bags inflate, it is very important for the   bone to the center of the air bag cover         er seat recommended for the size and
 driver and front passenger to always be in a     on the steering wheel must be at least          weight of the child.
 properly seated position and to wear their       10 in (25 cm) or more. You should be        Failure to follow these instructions can re-
 respective seat belts.                           able to accomplish this by a combina-
                                                                                              sult in severe injuries to you or other
 For maximum protection in the event of a         tion of adjustments to the seat and
                                                                                              occupants.
                                                  steering wheel. If you have any prob-
 collision always be in normal seated position
                                                  lems, please see an authorized              If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
 with your back against the backrest. Fasten
                                                  Mercedes-Benz Center.                       you make the buyer aware of this safety in-
 your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
                                                  Do not lean your head or chest close to     formation. Be sure to give the buyer this
 erly positioned on your body.
                                                  the steering wheel or dashboard.            Operator’s Manual.
 Since the air bag inflates with considerable
                                                  Keep hands on the outside of steering
 speed and force, a proper seating and hands
                                                  wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in-
 on steering wheel position will help to keep     side the rim can increase the risk and
 you at a safe distance from the air bag.         potential severity of hand/arm injury
 Occupants who are unbelted, out of position      when driver front air bag inflates.
 or too close to the air bag can be seriously
                                                  Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
 injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates   possible rearward from the dashboard
 with great force in the blink of an eye:         when the seat is occupied.
     Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
     position with your back against the seat
     backrest.




60
                                                                                                                   Safety and Security
                                                                                                                           Occupant safety


                                                                                                 i Air bags are designed to deploy only in cer-
Warning!                                 G        (2) Always sit as upright as possible,
                                                      properly use the seat belts, and for
                                                                                                 tain frontal impacts (front air bags) and in side
                                                                                                 impacts (front side impact air bags, rear side im-
Accident research shows that the safest               children 12 years old and under, use an    pact air bags* and window curtain air bags)
place for children in an automobile is in the         appropriately sized infant or toddler      which exceed preset thresholds. Only during
rear seat.                                            restraint or booster seat recommended      these events will they provide their supplemental
                                                      for the size and weight of the child.      protection.
There is a possibility for a side impact
                                                  (3) Always wear seat belts properly.           The driver and passengers should always wear
air bag related injury if occupants, especial-                                                   their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
ly children, are not properly seated or re-       If you believe that, even with the use of      the air bags to provide their supplemental pro-
strained when next to a front side impact         these guidelines, it would be safer for your   tection.
air bag and/or rear side impact air bag*          rear seat occupants to have the rear mount-    In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-
which needs to deploy rapidly in a side im-       ed side impact air bags* deactivated, then     low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
pact in order to do its job.                      deactivation can be accomplished upon          not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be
                                                  your written request to do so at an autho-     protected to the extent possible by a properly
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
                                                  rized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional    fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt
follow these guidelines:                                                                         is also needed to provide the best possible pro-
                                                  cost.
(1) Occupants, especially children, should                                                       tection in a rollover.
    never place their bodies or lean their        Please contact your local authorized
                                                                                                 We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
    heads in the area of the door where the       Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer      air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
    front side impact air bag and/or the rear     Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
                                                                                                 It is important to your safety and that of your pas-
    side impact air bag* inflates. This could     (1-800-367-6372) for details.
                                                                                                 sengers that you replace deployed air bags and
    result in serious injuries or death should                                                   repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
    the front side impact air bag and/or the                                                     that the vehicle will continue to provide supple-
    rear side impact air bag* be deployed.                                                       mental crash protection for occupants.




                                                                                                                                                61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
                                                No modifications of any kind may be          Never place your feet on the instrument
emergency tensioning device and                 made to any components or wiring of          panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
air bag                                         the SRS. This includes changing or           keep both feet on the floor in front of the
                                                removing any component or part of the        seat.
 Warning!                              G        SRS, the installation of additional trim
                                                material, badges, etc. over the steering
                                                                                             In addition, improper repair work on the
                                                                                             SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
                                                wheel hub, front passenger front air bag     inoperative or causing unintended air
     Damaged seat belts or belts that were
                                                cover, outboard sides of the front seat      bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
     highly stressed in an accident must be
                                                backrests, door trim panels, or door         therefore only be performed by qualified
     replaced and their anchoring points
                                                frame trims, and installation of addition-   technicians. Contact an authorized
     must also be checked. Only use belts in-
                                                al electrical/electronic equipment on or     Mercedes-Benz Center.
     stalled or supplied by an authorized
                                                near SRS components and wiring. Keep
     Mercedes-Benz Center.                                                                   For your protection and the protection
                                                area between air bags and occupants
     Air bags and emergency tensioning de-      free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-      of others, when scrapping the air bag
     vices (ETDs) are designed to function on   es, umbrellas, etc.).                        unit or emergency tensioning device,
     a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD                                                our safety instructions must be fol-
                                                Do not hang items such as coat hangers       lowed. These instructions are available
     that is deployed must be replaced.
                                                from the coat hooks or handles over the      from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
     Do not pass belts over sharp edges.        door. These items may turn into projec-      Center.
     They could tear.                           tiles and cause head and other injuries
                                                when the window curtain air bag is de-       Given the considerable deployment
     Do not make any modification that could
                                                ployed.                                      speed, required inflation volume, and
     change the effectiveness of the belts.
                                                                                             the textile structure of the air bags,
     Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this    Air bag system components will be hot        there is the possibility of abrasions or
     may severely weaken them. In a crash       after an air bag has inflated. Do not        other, potentially more serious injuries
     they may not be able to provide ade-       touch.                                       resulting from air bag deployment.
     quate protection.




62
                                                                                                                    Safety and Security
                                                                                                                          Occupant safety


When you sell your vehicle we strongly       Driver and front passenger front air bags               The air bags will not deploy in impacts
urge you to give notice to the subsequent    are deployed:                                           which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by                                                             ment thresholds. You will then be protect-
                                                 in the event of certain frontal impacts
alerting them to the applicable section in                                                           ed by the fastened seat belts.
the Operator’s Manual.                           if impact exceeds a preset deployment
                                                                                                     The front passenger front air bag will only
                                                 threshold
                                                                                                     be deployed if:
Front air bags                                   independently of the front side impact
                                                 air bags and/or the rear side impact                   the system, based on OCS weight sen-
                                                 air bags*                                              sor readings, senses that the front pas-
                                                                                                        senger seat is occupied
                                             i The front air bags in this vehicle have been             the 56 indicator lamp in the
                                             designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
                                             air bag to have different rates of inflation that are      center console is not lit ( page 68)
                                             based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-            the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
                                             tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.              ment threshold
                                             On the front passenger side, the front air bag de-
                                             ployment is additionally influenced by the pas-
                                             senger’s weight category as identified by the
1 Driver air bag                             Occupant Classification System (OCS)
2 Passenger air bag                          ( page 64).
                                             The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
                                             the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
                                             for the second stage inflation of the air bag.




                                                                                                                                             63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Front side impact air bags, rear side im-   The front side impact air bags, the rear     Occupant Classification System
pact air bags*, window curtain air bags     side impact air bags*, and the window cur-
                                            tain air bags are deployed:                  The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
                                                                                         automatically turns the front passenger
                                               on the impacted side of the vehicle
                                                                                         front air bag on or off based on the classi-
                                               in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-     fied occupant weight category determined
                                               ment threshold                            by weight sensor readings from the front
                                               independently of the front air bags       passenger seat.

                                            The front side impact air bags, the rear     i The system does not deactivate the front
                                            side impact air bags*, and the window cur-   passenger side impact air bag, the window cur-
                                                                                         tain air bag and the emergency tensioning
                                            tain air bags are not deployed in impacts
                                                                                         device.
                                            which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
1 Window curtain air bag                                                                 Occupants must sit properly belted in a po-
                                            ment threshold.
2 Front side impact air bag                                                              sition that is as upright as possible with
3 Rear side impact air bag*                                                              their back against the seat backrest and
                                                                                         feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
                                                                                         If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
                                                                                         another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
                                                                                         leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
                                                                                         able to properly approximate the
                                                                                         occupant’s weight category.




64
                                                                                                                  Safety and Security
                                                                                                                          Occupant safety


i If your seat, including your trim cover and   In the event of a collision, the air bag control   When the OCS senses that the front passen-
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take
                                                unit will not allow front passenger front air      ger seat occupant is classified as being
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.                                         bag deployment when the OCS classified             heavier than the weight of a typical
                                                the front passenger seat occupant as being         12-month-old child seated in a standard
Only seat accessories approved by
                                                up to or less than the weight of a typical         child restraint or as being a small individual
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
                                                12-month-old child in a standard child             (such as a young teenager or a small adult),
Both driver and the front passenger should      restraint or if the front passenger seat is        the 56 indicator lamp will illuminate
always use the 56 indicator lamp                sensed as being empty.                             for approximately 6 seconds when the en-
as an indication of whether or not the front                                                       gine is started and then, depending on occu-
                                                When the OCS senses that the front passen-
passenger is properly positioned.                                                                  pant weight sensor readings from the seat,
                                                ger seat occupant is classified as being up
                                                to or less than the weight of a typical            remain illuminated or go out. With the
 Warning!                               G       12-month-old child in a standard child             56 indicator lamp illuminated, the
                                                restraint, the 56 indicator lamp will              front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
 If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates           illuminate when the engine is started and re-      With the 56 indicator lamp out, the
 when an adult or someone larger than a         main illuminated, indicating that the front        front passenger front air bag is activated.
 small individual is in the front passenger     passenger front air bag is deactivated.            When the OCS senses that the front passen-
 seat, have the front passenger re-position                                                        ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
                                                When the OCS senses that the front passen-
 himself or herself in the seat until the                                                          someone larger than a small individual, the
                                                ger seat is classified as being empty, the
 56 indicator lamp goes out.                                                                       56 indicator lamp will illuminate for
                                                56 indicator lamp will illuminate
 More information about air bag display         when the engine is started and remain              approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
 messages ( page 332).                          illuminated, indicating that the front             started and then go out, indicating that the
                                                passenger front air bag is deactivated.            front passenger front air bag is activated.




                                                                                                                                              65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


 If the 56 indicator lamp is
 illuminated, the front passenger front air
                                                 Warning!                                G        Children can be killed or seriously injured by
                                                                                                  an inflating air bag. Note the following
 bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.    According to accident statistics, children       important information when circumstances
 If the 56 indicator lamp is not                 are safer when properly restrained in the        require you to place a child in the front
 illuminated, the front passenger front air      rear seating positions than in the front seat-   passenger seat:
 bag is activated and will be deployed:          ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend            Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
                                                 that children be placed in the rear seats            technology designed to turn off the front
     in the event of certain frontal impacts
                                                 whenever possible. Regardless of seating             passenger front air bag in your vehicle
     if impact exceeds a preset deployment                                                            when the system senses the weight of a
                                                 position, children 12 years old and under
     threshold                                                                                        typical 12-month-old child or less along
                                                 must be seated and properly secured in an
     independently of the front side impact                                                           with the weight of a standard appropri-
                                                 appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
     air bags and/or rear side impact air                                                             ate child restraint on the front passen-
                                                 mended for the size and weight of the child.
     bags*.                                                                                           ger seat.
                                                 The infant or child restraint must be properly       A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
 If the front passenger front air bag is
                                                 secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat       the front passenger seat will be serious-
 deployed, the rate of inflation will be
                                                 belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors          ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
 influenced by:
                                                 and top tether strap, fully in accordance            senger front air bag inflates in a collision
     the rate of vehicle deceleration as as-     with the child seat manufacturer’s                   which could occur under some circum-
     sessed by the air bag control unit          instructions.                                        stances, even with the air bag technolo-
     front passenger’s weight category as                                                             gy installed in your vehicle. The only
     identified by the Occupant Classification                                                        means to completely eliminate this risk
     System (OCS).                                                                                    is to never place a child in a rear-facing
                                                                                                      child restraint in the front seat. We
                                                                                                      therefore strongly recommend that you
                                                                                                      always place a child in a rear-facing
                                                                                                      child restraint in the back seat.


66
                                                                                                            Safety and Security
                                                                                                                   Occupant safety


If you must install a rear-facing child        If you have to place a child in a           i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
restraint on the front passenger seat          forward-facing child restraint on the       not mean that the front passenger front air bag
because circumstances require you to           front passenger seat, move the seat as      also should have deployed.
do so, make sure that the 56 in-               far back as possible, use the proper        The Occupant Classification System ( page 64)
dicator lamp is illuminated, indicating        child restraint recommended for the         may have determined:
that the front passenger front air bag is      age, size and weight of the child, and          that the seat was empty or occupied by the
deactivated. Should the 56 indi-               secure child restraint with the vehicle’s       weight up to or less than that of a typical
cator lamp not illuminate or go out while      seat belt according to the child seat           12-month-old child seated in a standard
the restraint is installed, please check       manufacturer’s instructions. For                child restraint - both instances where the
installation. Periodically check the           children larger than the typical                system suppresses deployment of the front
56 indicator lamp while driving                12-month-old child, the front passenger         passenger front air bag even though the im-
to make sure the 56 indicator                  front air bag may or may not be                 pact met the criteria and was of sufficient
lamp is illuminated. If the 56 in-             activated ( page 65).                           severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
dicator lamp goes out or remains out, do                                                       that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
not transport a child on the front pas-                                                        ual (such as a young teenager or a small
senger seat until the system has been                                                          adult) or a child weighing more than the
repaired. A child in a rear-facing child re-                                                   weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
straint on the front passenger seat will                                                       standard child restraint - instances where
be seriously injured or even killed if the                                                     the system may suppress deployment of the
front passenger front air bag inflates.                                                        front passenger front air bag even though
                                                                                               the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
                                                                                               cient severity to deploy the driver front air
                                                                                               bag.




                                                                                                                                        67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


The 56 indicator lamp is located in
the center console.                       Warning!                                 G             Only have the seat repaired or replaced
                                                                                                 by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
                                                                                                 ter.
                                          If the 1 indicator lamp and the
                                          56 indicator lamp are lit at the same                  Read and observe all warnings in this
                                          time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant           chapter.
                                          Classification System. The front passenger
                                          front air bag will be deactivated in this case.   Self-test Occupant Classification
                                                                                            System
                                          In order to ensure proper operation of the air
                                          bag system and OCS:                               After turning the SmartKey in the starter
                                                                                            switch to position 1 or 2, the
                                              Have the system checked as soon as
                                              possible by qualified technicians.            56 indicator lamp located in the
1 Front passenger front air bag off           Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz           center console illuminates. If an adult oc-
  indicator lamp                              Center.                                       cupant is properly sitting on the front pas-
                                                                                            senger seat and the system senses the
The 56 indicator lamp 1 will be               Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
                                              position with your back against the seat      occupant as being an adult, the
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
                                              backrest.                                     56 indicator lamp will illuminate
removed from the starter switch or with
                                                                                            and go out after approximately 6 seconds.
the starter switch in position 0.             Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
                                              self from the seat by using the handle        If the seat is not occupied and the system
                                              over the door as this may cause the OCS       senses the front passenger seat as being
                                              to be unable to correctly approximate         empty, the 56 indicator lamp will
                                              the occupant weight category.                 illuminate and not go out.




68
                                                                                                                     Safety and Security
                                                                                                                            Occupant safety


                                                  Seat belts
 Warning!                                G                                                           Warning!                                 G
                                                  The use of seat belts and infant and child
 If the 56 indicator lamp should not              restraint systems is required by law in all        Always fasten your seat belt before driving
 illuminate, the system is not functioning.       50 states, the District of Columbia, the           off. Always make sure all of your passengers
 You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz         U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.       are properly restrained, including those sit-
 Center before seating any child on the front                                                        ting in the rear.
                                                  Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
 passenger seat.                                                                                     Failure to wear and properly fasten and
                                                  occupants should have their seat belts
                                                  fastened whenever the vehicle is in                position your seat belt greatly increases
More information can be found in the              motion.                                            your risk of injuries and their likely severity
“Practical hints” section ( page 332).                                                               in an accident. You and your passengers
                                                  For more information, see “Fastening the           should always wear seat belts.
                                                  seat belt” ( page 43).
 Warning!                                G                                                           If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
                                                  i For information on infants and children trav-    can be considerably more severe without
 Never place anything between seat cushion        eling with you in the vehicle and restraint sys-   your seat belt properly buckled. Without
                                                  tems for infants and children, see “Children in
 and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces                                                      your seat belt buckled, you are much more
                                                  the vehicle” ( page 74).
 the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-                                                         likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
 cation System. The bottom of the child seat                                                         ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
 must make full contact with the passenger                                                           or killed.
 seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child                                                          In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
 seat could cause injuries to the child in case                                                      death is lessened if you are properly wearing
 of an accident, instead of increasing protec-                                                       your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
 tion for the child.                                                                                 they are designed if the occupants are
 Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for                                                          properly wearing their seat belts.
 installation of child seats.


                                                                                                                                                  69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety



 Warning!                                  G        Warning!                               G        Warning!                               G
 Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat       Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly    USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
 backrest in an excessively reclined position       stressed in an accident must be replaced           Seat belts can only work when used
 as this can be dangerous. You could slide          and their anchoring points must also be            properly. Never wear seat belts in any
 under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide   checked.                                           other way than as described in this
 under it, the belt would apply force at the        Only use seat belts which have been                section, as that could result in serious
 abdomen or neck. That could cause serious          approved by Mercedes-Benz.                         injuries in case of an accident.
 or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and                                                         Each occupant should wear their seat
 seat belt provide the best restraint when the      Do not make any modifications to the seat
                                                                                                       belt at all times, because seat belts help
 wearer is in a nearly upright position and the     belts. This can lead to unintended activation
                                                                                                       reduce the likelihood of and potential
 belt is properly positioned on the body.           of the ETDs or to their failure to activate        severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
                                                    when necessary.                                    ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
                                                    Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may        system includes SRS (driver air bag,
 Warning!                                  G        severely weaken them. In a crash they may          passenger front air bag, front side im-
                                                                                                       pact air bags, rear side impact air bags*,
                                                    not be able to provide adequate protection.
                                                                                                       window curtain air bags for side win-
 Never let more people ride in the vehicle          Have all work carried out only by qualified        dows), ETD (seat belt emergency ten-
 than there are seat belts available. Make          technicians. Contact an authorized                 sioning device), and front seat knee
 sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-        Mercedes-Benz Center.                              bolsters. The system is designed to en-
 rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.                                                          hance the protection offered to properly
 Never use a seat belt for more than one                                                               belted occupants in certain frontal (front
 person at a time.                                                                                     air bags and ETD)




70
                                                                                                          Safety and Security
                                                                                                                 Occupant safety


                                                                                           Enhanced seat belt reminder system
and side (front side impact air bags, rear   Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
side impact air bags*, window curtain        crash, you wouldn’t have the full width       When the engine is started, the seat belt
air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed       of the belt to distribute impact forces.      telltale < will always illuminate
preset deployment thresholds.                The twisted belt against your body could      for 6 seconds to remind you and your pas-
                                             cause injuries.                               sengers to fasten your seat belts.
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoul-    Pregnant women should also always use
                                                                                           If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
der. In a frontal crash, your body would     a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
                                             should be positioned as low as possible       when the engine is started, an additional
move too far forward. That would                                                           warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
increase the chance of head and neck         on the hips to avoid any possible
                                             pressure on the abdomen.                      mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’ s
injuries. The belt would also apply too
                                                                                           seat belt is fastened.
much force to the ribs or abdomen,           Never place your feet on the instrument
which could severely injure internal or-     panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always      If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
gans such as your liver or spleen.           keep both feet on the floor in front of the   front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable     seat.                                         passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
objects in or on your clothing, such as      When using a seat belt to secure infant       with front doors closed,
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these       or toddler restraints or children in
                                                                                              the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
might cause injuries.                        booster seats, always follow the child
                                             seat manufacturer’s instructions.                minated for as long as either the driv-
Position the lap belt as low as possible                                                      er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
on your hips and not across the abdo-
                                                                                              fastened.
men. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries                                                      and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
in a crash.                                                                                   15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
Never use a seat belt for more than one                                                       telltale < starts flashing and a
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat                                                        warning chime sounds with increasing
belt around a person and another
person or other objects.


                                                                                                                                    71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


   intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds        For more information, see “Practical hints”          When activated, emergency tensioning
   or until the driver’s and the front pas-     ( page 328).                                         devices remove slack from the belts. Belt
   senger’s seat belt are fastened.                                                                  force limiters reduce the force exerted by
   If you and/or your passenger release         Emergency tensioning device (ETD),                   the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
   the seat belt during driving, the seat       seat belt force limiter
   belt telltale < starts flashing and a
   warning chime sounds as described be-
                                                The seat belts for the front and rear outer           Warning!                            G
                                                seats are equipped with emergency
   fore.                                                                                              An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
                                                tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
   If the driver’s or the front passenger’s                                                           was activated must be replaced.
                                                The ETD is designed to activate in the
   seat belt remains unfastened after                                                                 When disposing the emergency tensioning
                                                following cases:
   60 seconds, the warning chime stops                                                                device, our safety instructions must be
   sounding, the seat belt telltale <               in frontal or rear-end impacts
                                                                                                      followed. These are available at your
   stops flashing but continues to be illu-         exceeding the system deployment
                                                                                                      authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
   minated.                                         threshold.
   After a vehicle standstill the warning           if the restraint systems are operational
   chime is reactivated and the seat belt           and functioning correctly, see
   telltale < is flashing again if the ve-          1 indicator lamp ( page 58).
   hicle speed once exceeds 15 mph
   (25 km/h).                                   i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
                                                vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened
The seat belt telltale < will only go out       (latch plate properly inserted into buckle).
if both the driver’s and the front passen-      The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger       with or without the respective seat belt fastened.
seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
is standing still and a front door is opened.



72
                                                                                                                 Safety and Security
                                                                                                                        Occupant safety


Active head restraint                                                                             You cannot remove the active head re-
                                                 potential for injury to the head and neck in
                                                                                                  straints on the driver’s and front passen-
                                                 the event of an accident or similar situation.
The active front seat head restraints are in-                                                     ger’s seat.
tended to offer the driver and front passen-     Do not drive the vehicle without the seat        For removal of the active head restraints
ger increased protection from whiplash           head restraints. Head restraints are intend-     we recommend that you contact an
type injuries in rear-end collisions. In the     ed to help reduce injuries during an             authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
event of a rear-end collision exceeding the      accident.
                                                                                                  For information on head restraint adjust-
systems’ deployment threshold, the active
                                                                                                  ment, see “Seats” ( page 34).
head restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seats are designed to move           Warning!                                G        For information on resetting the activated
forward in the direction of travel, providing                                                     active head restraints, see “Resetting acti-
the head with increased support earlier on       Only use seat or head restraint covers which     vated head restraints” ( page 365).
in the collision sequence. The active head       have been tested and approved by
restraints activate whether the seat is oc-      Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
cupied or not.                                   Using other seat or head restraint covers
                                                 may interfere with or prevent the activation
                                                 of the active head restraints. Contact an
 Warning!                               G        authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
                                                 availability.
 For your protection, drive only with properly
 positioned head restraints.                     Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
                                                 the head restraint posts. Otherwise, the ac-
 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
                                                 tive head restraints may not be able to func-
 close to the head as possible and the center
                                                 tion properly or offer the intended degree of
 of the head restraint supports the back of
                                                 protection in the event of an accident.
 the head at eye level. This will reduce the




                                                                                                                                          73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Children in the vehicle                                                                            Infant and child restraint systems
                                                 If children open a door, they could
                                                     injure other persons                          We recommend all infants and children be
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
                                                                                                   properly restrained at all times while the
the vehicle:                                         get out of the car and injure themselves
                                                                                                   vehicle is in motion.
   Secure the child using an infant or child         or be injured by oncoming traffic
                                                 Do not expose the child restraint system to       All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
   restraint appropriate to the age and
                                                 direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s     seat belt have special seat belt retractors
   size of the child.
                                                 metal parts, for example, could become very       for secure fastening of child restraints.
   Make sure that the infant or child is
                                                 hot, and the child could be burned on these       To fasten a child restraint, follow child
   properly secured at all times while the
                                                 parts.                                            restraint instructions for mounting. Then
   vehicle is in motion.
                                                 Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the         pull the shoulder belt out completely and
                                                 passenger compartment or trunk unless             let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
 Warning!                                G       they are firmly secured in place. For more in-    ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
                                                 formation, see “Loading” ( page 230), and         that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
 Do not leave children unattended in the                                                           vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
                                                 see “Useful features” ( page 237) in the
 vehicle, even if they are secured in a child                                                      on child restraint to take up any slack.
                                                 “Controls in detail ” chapter.
 restraint system. The children could
                                                 Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo          To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
     injure themselves on parts of the vehicle                                                     let seat belt retract completely. The seat
                                                 increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
     be seriously or fatally injured through     of                                                belt can again be used in the usual
     excessive exposure to extreme heat or                                                         manner.
     cold                                            strong braking maneuvers
                                                     sudden changes of direction
                                                     an accident




74
                                                                                                                          Safety and Security
                                                                                                                                  Occupant safety


                                                     ! A statement by the child restraint manufac-
 Warning!                                 G          turer of compliance with these standards can be       Warning!                                 G
                                                     found on the instruction label on the restraint
 Never release the seat belt buckle while the        and in the instruction manual provided with the       According to accident statistics, children
 vehicle is in motion, since the special seat        restraint.                                            are safer when properly restrained in the
 belt retractor will be deactivated.                 When using any infant, or toddler restraint, or       rear seating positions than in the front seat-
                                                     booster seat, be sure to carefully read and follow    ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
                                                     all manufacturer’s instructions for installation      that children be placed in the rear seats
i Information on child seats with anchor fit-        and use.                                              whenever possible. Regardless of seating
tings for tether anchorages ( page 77).
                                                     Please read and observe warning labels affixed        position, children 12 years old and under
For information on LATCH-type child seat an-         to the inside of the vehicle and to infant or child   must be seated and properly secured in an
chors ( page 79).                                    restraints.                                           appropriate infant or child restraint recom-
! The use of infant or child restraints is                                                                 mended for the size and weight of the child.
required by law in all 50 states, the District of
                                                                                                           The infant or child restraint must be properly
Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all Canadian
provinces.                                                                                                 secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
                                                                                                           belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
Infants and small children should be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system prop-                                                         and top tether strap, fully in accordance
erly secured in accordance with the manufactur-                                                            with the child seat manufacturer’s instruc-
er's instructions for the child restraint, that                                                            tions.
complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety                                                            Occupants, especially children, should nev-
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor
                                                                                                           er place their bodies or lean their heads in
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
                                                                                                           the area of the door where the front side im-
                                                                                                           pact air bag and/or the rear side impact
                                                                                                           air bag* inflates. This could result in serious
                                                                                                           injuries or


                                                                                                                                                       75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


 death should the air bag be triggered. Al-        air bag technology installed in your vehi-     do not transport a child on the front pas-
 ways sit nearly upright, properly use the         cle. The only means to completely elim-        senger seat until the system has been
 seat belts and use an appropriately sized in-     inate this risk is to never place a child in   repaired. A child in a rear-facing child re-
 fant or toddler restraint or booster seat rec-    a rear-facing child restraint in the front     straint on the front passenger seat will
 ommended for the size and weight of the           seat. We therefore strongly recommend          be seriously injured or even killed if the
 child.                                            that you always place a child in a             front passenger front air bag inflates.
 Children can be killed or seriously injured by    rear-facing child restraint in the back        If you have to place a child in a
 an inflating air bag. Note the following          seat.                                          forward-facing child restraint on the
 important information when circumstances          If you must install a rear-facing child        front passenger seat, move the seat as
 require you to place a child in the front pas-    restraint on the front passenger seat          far back as possible, use the proper
 senger seat:                                      because circumstances require you to           child restraint recommended for the
                                                   do so, make sure that the                      age, size and weight of the child, and
     Your vehicle is equipped with air bag         56 indicator lamp is illuminated,              secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
     technology designed to turn off the front     indicating that the front passenger front      seat belt according to the child seat
     passenger front air bag in your vehicle       air bag is deactivated. Should the             manufacturer’s instructions. For
     when the OCS senses the weight of a           56 indicator lamp not illuminate               children larger than the typical
     typical 12-month-old child or less along      or go out while the restraint is installed,    12-month-old child, the front passenger
     with the weight of a standard                 please check installation. Periodically        front air bag may or may not be activat-
     appropriate child restraint on the front      check the 56 indicator lamp                    ed ( page 65).
     passenger seat.                               while driving to make sure the
     A child in a rear-facing child restraint on   56 indicator lamp is illuminated.
     the front passenger seat will be              If the 56 indicator lamp goes out
     seriously injured or even killed if the       or remains out,
     front passenger front air bag inflates in
     a collision which could occur under
     some circumstances, even with the



76
                                                                                                                 Safety and Security
                                                                                                                        Occupant safety


                                                                                                   Installation of infant and child restraint
Warning!                                 G        When the child restraint is not in use,
                                                  remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
                                                                                                   systems

Infants and small children should never           the seat belt to prevent the child restraint     This vehicle is equipped with tether
share a seat belt with another occupant.          from becoming a projectile in the event of       anchorages for a top tether strap at each
During an accident, they could be crushed         an accident.                                     of the rear seating positions.
between the occupant and seat belt.               Do not leave children unattended in the
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is    vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
significantly increased if the child restraints   child restraint system. Unsupervised
are not properly secured in the vehicle           children in a child restraint system may use
and/or the child is not properly secured in       vehicle equipment and may cause an acci-
the child restraint.                              dent and/or serious personal injury.

Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul-
der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be                                                       1 Cover of top anchorage ring
necessary to achieve proper belt positioning
                                                                                                      Make sure the rear backrest is locked
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a
                                                                                                      in its upright position ( page 235).
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits
properly without a booster.




                                                                                                                                         77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


                                                                                           i For safety, make sure the hook 2 has
 Warning!                               G                                                  attached to the anchorage ring 3 beyond the
                                                                                           safety catch, as illustrated.
 Always lock backrest in its upright position
                                                                                           Once the top tether anchorage hook is
 when rear seat bench is occupied by pas-
                                                                                           attached, the child restraint itself can be
 sengers, or the extended cargo area is not in
                                                                                           secured. Secure the child restraint and
 use. Check for secure locking by pushing
                                                                                           tighten the top tether strap according to
 and pulling on the backrest.
                                                                                           the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-
                                                                                           tions.
   Remove cover 1 from anchorage
   ring 3.                                       2 Hook                                       Reinstall cover 1 after removing the
                                                 3 Anchorage ring                             tether strap.
   Guide tether strap between head
   restraint and top of seat back.                 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part
   Head restraint must be installed and            of the tether strap, to anchorage
   positioned such that the top tether             ring 3.
   strap can pass freely between the head
   restraint and top of seat back.
   Make sure the tether strap is not
   twisted.




78
                                                                                                                   Safety and Security
                                                                                                                          Occupant safety


Child seat anchors – LATCH-type                                                                      LATCH-type anchors
                                                  The child seat must be firmly attached to the
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH-          right and left side anchors 1.                     The LATCH-type anchors are located be-
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)          An incorrectly mounted child seat may come         tween the seat cushion and the backrest.
type anchors (at each of the outer rear           loose during an accident which could result
seats) for the installation of a LATCH-type       in serious injury or death to the child.
child seat with the matching mounting
fittings.                                         Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
                                                  child seat anchor fittings must be replaced.

 Warning!                               G         Do not leave children unattended in the
                                                  vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
 Children too big for a toddler restraint must    child restraint system.
 ride in seats using regular seat belts.
 Position shoulder belt across chest and         i With a child seat installed in the left rear
 shoulder, not face or neck.                     seat, the seat belt for the center seat occupied    1 Anchors
                                                 by a passenger must operate freely. Guide seat
 A booster seat may be necessary to achieve      belt between its seat cushion mount and back-
                                                                                                        Install child seat according to the
 proper belt positioning for children over       rest mount along outside of right side child seat      manufacturer’s instructions.
 41 lbs until they reach a height where a        anchor.
 lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
 booster.                                        i Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be
                                                 used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
 Install child seat according to manufactur-     seat belt system. Install child seat according to
 er’s instructions.                              the manufacturer’s instructions.




                                                                                                                                              79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety


Blocking of rear door window operation                                                      Activating override switch
                                             Warning!                              G            Slide override switch 3 to the right in
You can block the rear door window
                                             Activate the override switch when children         direction 2.
operation (for instance when you have
children riding in the rear passenger        are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.       The rear door windows can no longer
compartment).                                The children may otherwise injure them-            be operated using the respective
                                             selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-       switch located in the rear doors.
The override switch is located on the door
                                             dow opening.
control panel of the driver’s door.                                                         i Operation of the rear door windows with the
                                             When leaving the vehicle, always remove the    switches located on the door control panel of the
                                             SmartKey from the starter switch, take it      driver’s door is still possible.
                                             with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
                                             children unattended in the vehicle, or with    Deactivating override switch
                                             access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                                                                Slide override switch 3 to the left in
                                             unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                                                                direction 1.
                                             result in an accident and/or serious
                                             personal injury.                                   The rear door windows can be operated
                                                                                                again using the respective switch
                                                                                                located in the rear doors.
1 Deactivating override switch                                                              For more information, see “Power win-
2 Activating override switch                                                                dows” ( page 221).
3 Override switch




80
                                                                                                                     Safety and Security
                                                                                                                                Panic alarm*
   Panic alarm*
                                                  i USA only:                                        Activating
                                                  This device complies with Part 15 of the
                                                  FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following        Press and hold button  for at least
                                                  two conditions:                                         1 second.
                                                  (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-         An audible alarm and flashing exterior
                                                      ence, and
                                                                                                          lamps will operate briefly.
                                                  (2) this device must accept any interference re-
                                                      ceived, including interference that may        Deactivating
                                                      cause undesired operation.
                                                  Any unauthorized modification to this device            Press button  again.
1 Â button                                        could void the user’s authority to operate the
                                                  equipment.                                         or
i Canada only:                                                                                            Insert SmartKey in starter switch.
Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm   i Canada only:
system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic      This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
button 1.                                         Canada. Operation is subject to the following
                                                  two conditions:
                                                  (1) This device may not cause interference, and
                                                  (2) this device must accept any interference re-
                                                      ceived, including interference that may
                                                      cause undesired operation of the device.
                                                  Any unauthorized modification to this device
                                                  could void the user’s authority to operate the
                                                  equipment.




                                                                                                                                               81
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


In this section you will find information on                                                     ABS
the following driving safety systems:           Warning!                               G
   ABS (Antilock Brake System)                  The following factors increase the risk of        Warning!                            G
   BAS (Brake Assist System)                    accidents:
                                                    Excessive speed, especially in turns          Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
   ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
                                                                                                  steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
   4MATIC (Four Wheel Electronic                    Wet and slippery road surfaces
                                                                                                  ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
   Traction System)                                 Following another vehicle too closely         the ABS and significantly reduces braking
                                                The ABS, BAS, ESP®, and 4MATIC (if so             effectiveness.
                                                equipped) cannot reduce this risk.
                                                Always adjust your driving style to the          The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
                                                prevailing road and weather conditions.          the brake pressure so that the wheels do
                                                                                                 not lock during braking. This allows you to
                                                                                                 maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
                                               i In winter operation, the maximum
                                               effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®, and 4MATIC (if    The ABS is functional above a speed of
                                               so equipped) is only achieved with winter tires   approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen-
                                               ( page 308), or snow chains as required.          dent of road surface conditions.
                                                                                                 On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
                                                                                                 respond even to light brake pressure.
                                                                                                 The - indicator lamp in the instrument
                                                                                                 cluster ( page 24) comes on when you
                                                                                                 switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
                                                                                                 engine is running.


82
                                                                                                                Safety and Security
                                                                                                              Driving safety systems


Braking                                          Emergency brake maneuver
At the instant one of the wheels is about to        Keep continuous full pressure on the
                                                                                                 Warning!                                 G
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the      brake pedal.                                 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in                                                       physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
the regulating mode.
                                                  Warning!                              G        it increase braking or steering efficiency
   Keep firm and steady pressure on the                                                          beyond that afforded by the condition of the
   brake pedal while experiencing the             When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS        vehicle brakes and tires or the traction avail-
   pulsation.                                     and the ESP® are also switched off. The ba-    able on the road surface. The ABS cannot
                                                  sic driving and braking functions are still    prevent accidents, including those resulting
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
                                                  available                                      from excessive speed in turns, following an-
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
                                                  When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels     other vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
namely braking power and ability to steer
                                                  may lock during hard braking, reducing         Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
the vehicle.
                                                  steering capability and extending the brak-    prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
The pulsating brake pedal can be an                                                              ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploit-
                                                  ing distance.
indication of hazardous road conditions                                                          ed in a reckless or dangerous manner which
and functions as a reminder to take extra                                                        could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
care while driving.                                                                              safety of others.


                                                                                                For more information, see the “Practical
                                                                                                hints” section ( page 322).




                                                                                                                                             83
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


BAS
                                              Warning!                                G        Warning!                              G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the        If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-     The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically    tem is still functioning normally, but without   physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-     the additional brake boost available that        it increase braking efficiency beyond that
tially reducing the braking distance.         BAS would normally provide in an emergen-        afforded by the condition of the vehicle
                                              cy braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking      brakes and tires or the traction. The BAS
   Apply continuous full braking pressure
                                              distance may increase.                           cannot prevent accidents, including those
   until the emergency braking situation is
                                                                                               resulting from excessive speed in turns,
   over.
                                                                                               following another vehicle too closely, or
   The ABS will prevent the wheels from                                                        hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
   locking.                                                                                    skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
When you release the brake pedal, the                                                          capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
brakes function again as normal. The BAS                                                       never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
is then deactivated.                                                                           ous manner which could jeopardize the
                                                                                               user’s safety or the safety of others.




84
                                                                                                                 Safety and Security
                                                                                                               Driving safety systems


ESP®
                                                Warning!                                  G       Warning!                                 G
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is run-       Never switch off the ESP® when you see the        The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of
ning and monitors the vehicle’s traction        ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the               physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
(force of adhesive friction between the         instrument cluster. In this case, proceed as      it increase the traction afforded by the exist-
tires and the road surface) and handling.       follows:                                          ing road and tire conditions. The ESP®
                                                    While driving off, apply as little throttle   cannot prevent accidents, including those
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
                                                    as possible.                                  resulting from excessive speed in turns or
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
                                                                                                  hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
applying the brakes to the appropriate              While driving, ease up on the accelera-
                                                                                                  skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
wheel and by limiting the engine output,            tor.
                                                                                                  capabilities of an ESP® equipped vehicle
the ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle.            Adapt your speed and driving style to         must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
The ESP® is especially useful while driving         the prevailing road conditions.
                                                                                                  gerous manner which could jeopardize the
off and on wet or slippery road surfaces.       Failure to observe these guidelines could         user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP® also stabilizes the vehicle during     cause the vehicle to skid.
braking and steering maneuvers.
                                                The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
The ESP® warning lamp v in the                  ing from excessive speed.
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP®
is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you
switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
engine is running.




                                                                                                                                              85
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


! Vehicles without 4MATIC:                          Electronic traction system                      Switching off the ESP®
                ®
Because the ESP operates automatically, the
                                                    The electronic traction system is a
engine must be turned off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1) when                        component of ESP®.                               Warning!                               G
   the parking brake is being tested on a brake     The electronic traction system improves
                                                                                                     The ESP® should not be switched off during
   test dynamometer                                 the vehicle’s ability to utilize available
                                                                                                     normal driving other than in the circum-
   the vehicle is being towed with the front axle   traction, especially under slippery road
                                                                                                     stances described below. Disabling of the
   raised                                           conditions by applying the brakes to a
                                                                                                     system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
Active braking action through the ESP® may          spinning wheel.
                                                                                                     dard driving maneuvers.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.        When you switch off the ESP®, the
                                                                                                     Do not switch off the ESP® when a
For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see        electronic traction system is still enabled.
                                                                                                     Minispare wheel is mounted.
“Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
with the ESP® ” ( page 88).
                                                     Warning!                              G        To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
i The ESP® will only function properly if you                                                       the ESP® in driving situations where it
use wheels of the recommended tire size              If you are driving too fast, the electronic
( page 403).                                                                                        would be advantageous to have the drive
                                                     traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
                                                                                                    wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
For more information, see the “Practical             accident.
                                                                                                    better grip such as:
hints” section ( page 327) and                       The electronic traction system cannot pre-
( page 335).                                                                                           when driving with snow chains
                                                     vent the natural laws of physics from acting
                                                     on the vehicle.                                   in deep snow
                                                                                                       in sand or gravel
                                                                                                    ! Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
                                                                                                    aforementioned circumstances do not apply
                                                                                                    anymore.


86
                                                                                                               Safety and Security
                                                                                                             Driving safety systems


When you switch off the ESP®                        The ESP® switch is located on the center
    the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle
                                                    console.                                    Warning!                                G
    the engine output is not limited, which                                                     When the ESP® warning lamp v is
    allows the drive wheels to spin and                                                         illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
    thus cut into surfaces for better grip                                                      switched off or is not operational due to a
                                                                                                malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
    the traction control will still apply the
                                                                                                driving maneuvers reduces.
    brakes to a spinning wheel
                                                                                                Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
    the ESP® continues to operate when
                                                                                                ing road conditions and to the non-operating
    you are braking
                                                                                                status of the ESP®.
    you cannot activate the cruise control
                                                    1 ESP® switch
    the cruise control switches off if                                                         ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
    currently activated                                With the engine running, press ESP®     extended period with the ESP® switched off. This
                                                       switch 1 until the ESP® warning         may cause serious damage to the drivetrain
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or             lamp v in the instrument cluster        which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® warn-                                                 Limited Warranty.
ing lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes.          comes on.
However, the ESP® will then not stabilize the ve-      The ESP® is switched off.               Switching on the ESP®
hicle.
                                                                                                   Press ESP® switch 1 until the ESP®
                                                                                                   warning lamp v in the instrument
                                                                                                   cluster goes out.
                                                                                                   You are now again in normal driving
                                                                                                   mode with ESP® switched on.



                                                                                                                                           87
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems


Four wheel electronic traction system
                                                    Failure to observe these guidelines could    ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
(4MATIC) with the ESP®                                                                           the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
                                                    cause the vehicle to skid.
                                                                                                 switch position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
Models with all-wheel-drive only.                   The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-    being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
                                                    ing from excessive speed.                    Active braking action through the ESP® may
The 4MATIC improves vehicle’s ability to
                                                                                                 otherwise seriously damage the front or rear axle
use available traction, e.g. during winter
                                                                                                 brake system.
operation in mountains under snowy                 ! Do not tow with one axle raised.
conditions, by applying power to all four          Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged,   Operational tests with the engine running can
                                                   which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz     only be conducted on a two-axle dynamometer.
wheels.
                                                   Limited Warranty.
                                                                                                 i At highly demanding operating conditions,
 Warning!                                  G       ! Performance testing must only be conduct-   the electronic traction system may temporarily
                                                                                                 switch off to prevent overheating of the drive
                                                   ed on a two-axle dynamometer.
                                                                                                 wheel brakes. The message unavailable
 If you see the ESP®   warning lamp v              Otherwise the transfer case can be damaged,   See Operator’s Manual will then appear in
 flashing in the instrument cluster, proceed       which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz     the multifunction display while the ESP® warning
 as follows:                                       Limited Warranty.                             lamp v is flashing. The ESP® is still function-
                                                                                                 ing normally.
     While driving off, apply as little throttle
     as possible
     While driving, ease up on the accelera-
     tor
     Adapt your speed and driving style to
     the prevailing road conditions




88
                                                                                                                      Safety and Security
                                                                                                                          Anti-theft systems
   Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer                                          Anti-theft alarm system*                        The alarm system will also be triggered
                                                                                                     when
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized                Once the alarm system has been armed, a
                                                                                                         opening the vehicle with the
persons from starting your vehicle.                  visual and audible alarm is triggered when
                                                                                                         mechanical key
                                                     someone opens
Activating                                                                                               someone opens a door from the inside
                                                        a door
    Remove the SmartKey from the starter                                                                 someone opens the trunk with the
                                                        the trunk
    switch.                                                                                              emergency release button
                                                        the hood
Deactivating
                                                                                                     i If the alarm stays on for more than
                                                     The alarm will stay on even if the activating   30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
    Switch on the ignition ( page 32).               element (e. g. a door) is immediately           tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system*
                                                     closed.                                         ( page 247) provided Tele Aid service was
i Starting the engine will also deactivate the                                                       subscribed to and properly activated, and that
immobilizer.                                                                                         necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
In case the engine cannot be started (yet the ve-                                                    available.
hicle’s battery is charged), the system is not op-
erational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).




                                                                                                                                                 89
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems


Arming the alarm system                           Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.            Disarming the alarm system
The indicator lamp is in the center console.      The turn signal lamps flash three times             Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
                                                  and an acoustic signal sounds three
                                                                                                      The turn signal lamps flash once and an
                                                  times, to indicate that the alarm sys-
                                                                                                      acoustic signal sounds once, to
                                                  tem is armed.
                                                                                                      indicate that the alarm system is dis-
                                                  Indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after              armed.
                                                  approximately 30 seconds after arming
                                                  the alarm system.                              i The alarm system will rearm automatically
                                                                                                 after approximately 40 seconds if neither a door
                                               i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three     nor the trunk lid was opened.
                                               times, one of the following elements may not be
                                               properly closed:                                  Canceling the alarm
1 Indicator lamp                                  a door                                         To cancel the alarm:
                                                  the trunk
                                                                                                      Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
                                               Close the respective element and lock the vehi-        SmartKey.
                                               cle again.
                                                                                                 or
                                                                                                      Insert the SmartKey in the starter
                                                                                                      switch.




90
                  Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Manual transmission
Automatic transmission*
Good visibility
Climate control
Automatic climate control
Audio system
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features




                                 91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


In the “Controls in detail” section you will    For more information on locking and
find detailed information on how to oper-       unlocking, see “Getting started”
ate the equipment installed on your vehi-       ( page 32) and ( page 54).
cle. If you are already familiar with the
basic functions of your vehicle, this section   SmartKey
will be of particular interest to you.
                                                Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the
                                                SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
                                                a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are              The locking tabs for the mechanical key
given at the beginning of each segment.         portion of the two SmartKeys are a              SmartKey with remote control
                                                different color to help distinguish each        1 ‹ Lock button
                                                SmartKey unit.                                  2 Š Opening button for trunk
                                                The SmartKey provides an extended oper-           ( page 95)
                                                ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is   3 Mechanical key locking tab
                                                advisable to only unlock the vehicle when       4 ΠUnlock button
                                                you are in close proximity to it.               5 Battery check lamp
                                                                                                6 Â Panic button* ( page 81)
                                                The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
                                                                                                i Canada only:
                                                   the doors                                    Only vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm
                                                   the trunk                                    system* have SmartKeys with integrated panic
                                                                                                button 6.
                                                   the fuel filler flap
                                                                                                ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex-
                                                                                                posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro-
                                                                                                magnetic radiation.


92
                                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                       Locking and unlocking


                                                   i Canada only:                                          Use the mechanical key to lock the driver’s
 Warning!                                G         This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry           door ( page 362) and the trunk
                                                   Canada. Operation is subject to the following           ( page 99).
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the       two conditions:                                         Have the vehicle battery and the battery con-
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it         (1) This device may not cause interference, and         nections checked ( page 383).
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave                                                          If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
                                                   (2) this device must accept any interference
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with           received, including interference that may       Roadside Assistance or an authorized
 access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible         cause undesired operation of the device.        Mercedes-Benz Center.
 for children to open a locked door from the
                                                   Any unauthorized modification to this device
 inside, which could result in an accident                                                             Factory setting
                                                   could void the user’s authority to operate the
 and/or serious personal injury.                   equipment.                                          i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
                                                                                                       the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
                                                   i You can also open or close the windows and        acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If you
i USA only:                                        the tilt/sliding sunroof* using the SmartKey
                                                                                                       wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust its signal
This device complies with Part 15 of the           ( page 223).
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following                                                       volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
two conditions:                                    ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehi-     Center.
                                                   cle with the SmartKey, then either the batteries
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
    ence, and
                                                   in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is     Global unlocking
                                                   malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
(2) this device must accept any interference                                                               Press button Œ.
                                                       Try second SmartKey.
    received, including interference that may                                                                  All turn signal lamps flash once.
    cause undesired operation.                         Check the batteries in the SmartKey
                                                       ( page 95) and replace them if necessary                An acoustic signal sounds once.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
                                                       ( page 366).
could void the user’s authority to operate the                                                                 The locking knobs in the doors
equipment.                                             Use the mechanical key to unlock the driv-
                                                                                                               move up.
                                                       er’s door ( page 361) and the trunk
                                                       ( page 362).                                            The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
                                                                                                               armed.

                                                                                                                                                      93
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


The vehicle will lock again automatically   Selective setting                              Global unlocking
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system*
                                            If you frequently travel alone, you may wish      Press button Πtwice.
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
                                            to reprogram the SmartKey so that press-
locking if:                                                                                      All turn signal lamps flash once.
                                            ing button Œ only unlocks the driver’s
   neither door nor trunk is opened         door and the fuel filler flap.                       An acoustic signal sounds once.
   the SmartKey is not inserted in the         Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹                    The locking knobs in the doors
   starter switch                              simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-            move up.
                                               til battery check lamp 5 ( page 92)               The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-
   the central locking switch is not
                                               flashes twice.                                    armed.
   activated
                                               The SmartKey will then function as
Global locking                                 follows:                                    Global locking
   Press button ‹.                                                                            Press button ‹.
                                            Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
       All turn signal lamps flash three    flap                                              With the trunk and all doors closed:
       times.                                                                                    All turn signal lamps flash three
                                               Press button Πonce.
       An acoustic signal sounds three                                                           times.
       times.                                      All turn signal lamps flash once.
                                                                                                 An acoustic signal sounds three
       The locking knobs in the doors              An acoustic signal sounds once.               times.
       move down.                                  The locking knob in the driver’s              The locking knobs in the doors
                                                   door moves up.                                move down.
       The anti-theft alarm system* is
       armed.                                      The anti-theft alarm system* is dis-          The anti-theft alarm system* is
                                                   armed.                                        armed.



94
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Locking and unlocking


Restoring to factory setting                         Checking the batteries                            Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
    Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
                                                         Press button ‹ or Œ.                          If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
    simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
                                                                                                       you should do the following:
    til Battery check lamp 5 ( page 92)                  Battery check lamp ( page 92) comes
    flashes twice.                                       on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey         Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
                                                         batteries are in order.                          authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Unlocking and opening the trunk
                                                     ! If the battery check lamp does not come on         Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
You can unlock and open the trunk                    briefly during check, then the SmartKey batter-      mechanical key immediately to your
separately.                                          ies are discharged.                                  car insurance company.
                                                     Replace the batteries ( page 366).                   Have the mechanical lock replaced if
A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
(1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.          You can obtain the required batteries at any         necessary.
                                                     authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
    Press button Š until trunk lid                                                                     Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
    unlocks and begins to open.                      i If the batteries are checked within signal      will be glad to supply you with a
                                                     range of the vehicle, pressing the ‹ or Œ         replacement.
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-         button will lock or unlock the vehicle
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-   accordingly.
head clearance.

i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately ( page 99).
The trunk can also be opened from its
inside in an emergency, see “Trunk emer-
gency release” ( page 98).




                                                                                                                                             95
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Opening the doors from the inside                   Front doors                                       Opening the trunk
                                                       Pull on door handle 2 on the
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
                                                       respective front door to open door.
                                                                                                       Warning!                                 G
are safe to do so.                                     If door was locked, locking knob 1 will
                                                       move up.                                        Only drive with the trunk closed as, among
                                                                                                       other dangers such as blocked visibility,
                                                    i If you hear a warning signal you have forgot-    exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
                                                    ten to switch off the headlamps before opening
                                                    the driver’s door.                                 interior.

                                                    In addition the message Switch off lights
                                                    appears in the multifunction display.             You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta-
                                                    Switch off the headlamps.                         tionary.
                                                                                                      A minimum height clearance of 5.71 ft
                                                    Rear doors                                        (1.74 m) is required to open the trunk lid.
1 Locking knob                                         Pull up locking knob 1 on the                  ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
2 Inside door handle                                   respective rear door to unlock door.           ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
                                                                                                      head clearance.
i If the vehicle has previously been locked            Pull on door handle 2 on the
with the SmartKey, opening a door from the             respective rear door to open door.
inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
    Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
    Press button Œ or ‹ on the
    SmartKey.



96
                                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Locking and unlocking


Opening the trunk from the outside                 Opening the trunk from the inside                  Closing the trunk




1 Handle                                           1 Remote trunk opening switch
                                                                                                      1 Handle
     Press and hold button Š on the                    Press remote trunk opening switch 1            2 Handles
     SmartKey until trunk unlocks and be-              until the trunk begins to open.
                                                                                                         Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
     gins to open.                                     The trunk opens. The indicator lamp in            handle 1 or handles 2.
or                                                     remote trunk opening switch 1 comes
                                                                                                         Close trunk lid with hands placed flat
                                                       on and remains lit until the trunk is
     Pull on handle 1.                                                                                   on the trunk lid.
                                                       closed.
     The vehicle must be unlocked.
i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
                                                   i If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
                                                   separately ( page 99).
                                                                                                       Warning!                              G
separately ( page 99).
                                                   i The trunk can also be opened be opened us-        To prevent possible personal injury, always
i The trunk can also be opened from its inside     ing button Š on the SmartKey or from its in-        keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency re-          side in an emergency, see “Trunk emergency          opening when closing the trunk.
lease” ( page 98).                                 release” ( page 98).


                                                                                                                                                97
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


 Be especially careful when small children
                                                      Trunk emergency release                      ! The trunk lid swings open upwards
                                                                                                   automatically.
 are around.
                                                      With the emergency release button, the
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the                                                       Illumination of the emergency release
                                                      trunk can be opened from inside the trunk.
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it                                                         button:
                                                      The emergency release button is located
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave                                                          The button flashes 30 minutes after
                                                      on the inside of the trunk lid.
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with                                                           opening the trunk.
 access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                                                                       The button flashes 60 minutes after
 unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                                                                       closing the trunk.
 result in an accident and/or serious
 personal injury.                                                                                  i The emergency release button unlocks and
                                                                                                   opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing still
                                                                                                   or in motion.
 Warning!                                   G                                                      i The emergency release button does not
                                                                                                   open the trunk lid if the vehicle battery is dis-
 Only drive with the trunk closed as, among                                                        charged or disconnected.
 other dangers such as a blocked visibility,
 exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle                  1 Emergency release button                   i If the vehicle has previously been locked
 interior.                                                                                         with the SmartKey, opening the trunk from the
                                                         Briefly press emergency release
                                                                                                   inside using the emergency release button will
                                                         button 1.                                 trigger the anti-theft alarm system*.
i Do not place the SmartKey in the open                  The trunk unlocks and the trunk lid       To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
trunk. You may lock yourself out.                        opens.                                        Press button Œ or ‹ on the
i If the vehicle was previously centrally                                                              SmartKey.
locked, the trunk will lock automatically after                                                        Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
to confirm locking.

98
                                                                                                                      Controls in detail
                                                                                                                Locking and unlocking


Valet locking                                          Turn the mechanical key clockwise to      Automatic central locking
                                                       position 2 and remove the mechani-
i To deny any unauthorized person access to            cal key in that position to lock the      The doors and the trunk automatically lock
the trunk, lock it separately with the mechanical      trunk.                                    when the ignition is switched on and the
key. Leave only the SmartKey less its mechani-                                                   wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
cal key with the vehicle.                           The trunk remains locked even when the
                                                                                                 approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
                                                    vehicle is centrally unlocked.
The lock is located next to the handle                                                           You can open a locked door from the
above the rear license plate recess.                i You can only cancel the separate trunk lock- inside. Open door only when conditions
                                                    ing mode by means of the mechanical key.
                                                                                                 are safe to do so.
                                                       Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
                                                       lid lock.                                 i The doors unlock automatically after an ac-
                                                                                                 cident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset
                                                       Turn the mechanical key counterclock-     threshold.
                                                       wise to neutral position 1 and remove     To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking,
                                                       the mechanical key in that position to    deactivate the automatic central locking when
                                                       unlock the trunk.                         the vehicle

                                                       You can now open the trunk                    is pushed or towed
                                                       ( page 96).                                   is on a test stand
1 Neutral position                                                                               You can deactivate the automatic locking
2 Locked                                                                                         mode using the control system, see “Set-
    Close the trunk ( page 97).                                                                  ting automatic locking” ( page 143).
    Pull the mechanical key out of the
    SmartKey ( page 361).
    Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
    lid lock.

                                                                                                                                               99
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking


Locking and unlocking from the inside            The switches are located in the center                If the vehicle was previously locked with the cen-
                                                 console.                                              tral locking switch 1
You can lock or unlock the doors and the                                                                   while in the selective remote control mode,
trunk from inside using the central locking                                                                only the door opened from the inside is un-
or unlocking switch. This can be useful, for                                                               locked.
example, if you want to lock the vehicle                                                                   while in the global remote control mode, the
before starting to drive.                                                                                  complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
                                                                                                           opened from the inside.
You cannot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap
with the central locking or unlocking                                                                  Locking
switch.
                                                                                                           Press central locking switch 1.

 Warning!                              G         1 Central locking switch
                                                                                                           If all doors are closed, the vehicle
                                                                                                           locks.
                                                 2 Central unlocking switch
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it       i You can open a locked door from the inside.         Unlocking
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave    Open door only when conditions are safe to do             Press central unlocking switch 2.
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with     so.
 access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s        If the vehicle was previously centrally locked us-
                                                                                                           The vehicle unlocks.
 unsupervised access to a vehicle could          ing the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the cen-
 result in an accident and/or serious            tral unlocking switch 2.
 personal injury.




100
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                             Seats
  Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see            You cannot remove the active head re-            Rear seat head restraints
“Adjusting” ( page 34).                            straints on the driver’s and front passen-
                                                   ger’s seat.
Front seat active head restraints                  For removal of the active head restraints         Warning!                                 G
                                                   we recommend that you contact an autho-
                                                   rized Mercedes-Benz Center.                       For safety reasons, always drive with the
 Warning!                                 G                                                          rear head restraints in the upright position
                                                   i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that    when the rear seats are occupied.
                                                   it is as close to the head as possible.
 For your protection, drive only with properly                                                       Keep the area around head restraints clear
 positioned head restraints.                       For information on head restraint                 of articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
 Adjust the head restraint so that it is as        adjustment, see “Seats” ( page 34).               folding operation of the head restraints.
 close to the head as possible and the center      For information on active head restraints,
 of the head restraint supports the back of        see “Active head restraint” ( page 73).
 the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
 tential for injury to the head and neck in the
 event of an accident or similar situation.




                                                                                                                                               101
Controls in detail
Seats


Head restraint height (rear outer seats)                                                             Folding head restraints back with
                                                     Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
                                                                                                     release button
                                                     head restraints. Head restraints are
                                                     intended to help reduce injuries during an      The rear seat head restraints can be folded
                                                     accident.                                       backward for increased visibility.

                                                    i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
                                                    it is as close to the head as possible.

                                                    Raising
                                                        Manually adjust the height of the head
1 Release button                                        restraint by pulling it upward.
                                                        If the head restraint is fully retracted,
 Warning!                                  G            push release button 1 and pull the
                                                        head restraint up.                           1 Release button
 For your protection, drive only with properly
                                                                                                        Push release button 1.
 positioned head restraints.                        Lowering
                                                                                                        The head restraint will fold backward.
 Adjust head restraint so that the head re-             To lower the head restraint, push
 straint supports the back of the head at eye           release button 1 and push down on            i You can also fold the rear outer seat head
 level. This will reduce the potential for injury       the head restraint.                          restraints back using the switch in the center
 to the head and neck in the event of an ac-                                                         console.
 cident or similar situation.




102
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                     Seats


Folding head restraints back with            Placing head restraints upright               Head restraint tilt (rear outer seats)
switch in the center console                                                               Two different head restraint angle
                                                                                           positions are available:
                                                                                               Press the release button ( page 102)
                                                                                               and tilt the head restraint to the
                                                                                               desired position.
                                                                                           i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
                                                                                           it is as close to the head as possible.


                                                Pull the head restraint forward until it
1 Switch for rear seat head restraints          locks into position.
   Start the engine ( page 46).
   Press switch 1.
                                              Warning!                            G
   The rear seat head restraints will fold    Make sure the head restraints engage when
   backward.                                  placing them upright. Otherwise their
                                              protective function cannot be assured.




                                                                                                                                      103
Controls in detail
Seats


Removing and installing rear seat head                                                         Installing rear seat head restraints
restraints (rear outer seats)
                                                                                                  Insert head restraint and push it down
i The rear center seat head restraint cannot                                                      until it engages.
be removed.
                                                                                                  Push release button 1 and adjust
                                                                                                  head restraint to desired position.
 Warning!                                  G                                                   i Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
                                                                                               it is as close to the head as possible.
 For your protection, drive only with properly
 positioned head restraints.
 Adjust head restraint so that the head re-         1 Release button
 straint supports the back of the head at eye
 level. This will reduce the potential for injury   Removing rear seat head restraints
 to the head and neck in the event of an ac-
                                                       Fold back head restraint ( page 102).
 cident or similar situation.
                                                       Pull head restraint to its highest
 Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
                                                       position.
 head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
 ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-            Push release button 1 and pull out
 dent.                                                 head restraint.
 Do not interchange head restraints from
 front and rear seat.




104
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                      Seats


Lumbar support                                Multicontour seats* (Canada only)                   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).

The curvature of the front seats can be ad-   This driver’s multicontour seat has a mov-      Seat cushion depth
justed to help enhance lower back support     able seat cushion and inflatable air cush-
                                                                                                  Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
and seating comfort.                          ions built into the backrest to provide
                                                                                                  length of your upper leg using
                                              additional lumbar and side support.
                                                                                                  switch 1.
                                              The seat cushion movement, backrest
                                              cushion height and curvature can be             Backrest contour
                                              continuously varied with switches on the
                                                                                                  Adjust the contour of the backrest to
                                              side of the seat after switching on ignition.
                                                                                                  the desired position using switches 2
                                                                                                  and 3.

                                                                                              Backrest side bolsters
                                                                                                  Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
1 Adjustment lever                                                                                that they provide good lateral support
   Move adjustment lever 1 in direction                                                           using switch 4.
   of arrows until you have reached a
                                                                                              i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer
   comfortable seating position.                                                              provides the desired contour, then repeat the ad-
                                                                                              justment procedure.
                                              1 Seat cushion depth
                                              2 Backrest bottom
                                              3 Backrest center
                                              4 Backrest side bolster adjustment



                                                                                                                                        105
Controls in detail
Seats


Seat heating*                                  Level                                     Switching on seat heating

                                               3       Three indicator lamps on              Press switch 1 once.
Both switches for the front seats are locat-
ed in the center console. The red indicator            (highest level).                      Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
lamps in the switch come on to show heat-              After approximately 5 minutes,        switch come on.
ing level you have selected.                           seat heating is automatically         Continue pressing switch 1 until
                                                       switched to level 2.                  desired seat heating level is reached.
                                               2       Two indicator lamps on.
                                                                                         Switching off seat heating
                                                       After approximately 10 minutes,
                                                       seat heating is automatically         Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
                                                       switched to level 1.                  indicator lamps 2 go out.
                                               1       One indicator lamp on (lowest     i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on
                                                       level).                           the seat heating switch are flashing, there is in-
                                                                                         sufficient voltage due to too many electrical con-
                                                       After approximately 20 minutes,   sumers are turned on. The seat heating switches
                                                       seat heating is automatically     off automatically.
1 Seat heating switch
                                                       switched off.
2 Indicator lamps                                                                        The seat heating will switch back on again auto-
                                               off     No indicator lamp on.             matically as soon as sufficient voltage is avail-
   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                    able.




106
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                                Memory function*
   Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver    With the memory function you can store up       The following settings are stored for the
should check and adjust the seat height,      to three different settings.                    front passenger seat when using the but-
seat position fore and aft, and seat back-    The following settings are stored for the       tons (if so equipped depending on vehicle
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate   driver’s seat when using the buttons on the     equipment configuration) on the passen-
control, reach and comfort. The head re-      driver’s door:                                  ger door:
straint should also be adjusted for proper
                                                                                                 Front passenger seat, backrest and
height. See also the section on air bags         Driver’s seat, backrest and head
                                                                                                 head restraint position
( page 59) for proper seat positioning.          restraint position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to        Steering wheel position
ensure adequate control, reach, operation        Exterior rear view mirrors
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
adequate rear vision.                          Warning!                               G
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-     Do not activate the memory function while
dren should be seated in a properly se-        driving. Activating the memory function
cured restraint system that complies with      while driving could cause the driver to lose
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety              control of the vehicle.
Standards 213 and 225 and
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2.




                                                                                                                                  107
Controls in detail
Memory function*


The memory button and memory position     Storing positions into memory                Recalling positions from memory
switch are located on the door.
                                             Adjust the seat, steering wheel and       ! Do not operate the power seats using the
                                             exterior rear view mirrors to the         memory button if the seat backrest is in an ex-
                                             desired position ( page 34).              cessively reclined position. Doing so could cause
                                                                                       damage to front or rear seats.
                                             Turn memory position switch 2 to the
                                             desired memory position.                      Turn memory position switch 2 to the
                                                                                           desired memory position.
                                             Press memory button 1.
                                                                                           Press and hold memory position
                                             Release memory button 1 and press             switch 2 until the seat, steering wheel
                                             memory position switch 2 within               and exterior rear view mirrors have
                                             3 seconds.                                    completely moved to the stored
1 Memory button                                                                            positions.
                                             All settings are stored to the selected
2 Memory position switch
                                             position.
     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                i Releasing the memory position switch stops
                                                                                       movement to the stored positions immediately.
or
     Open the respective door.




108
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Lighting
   Lighting
For information on how to switch on the            Exterior lamp switch                 B Low beam headlamps or high beam
headlamps and use the turn signals, see                                                   headlamps when the combination
“Switching on headlamps” ( page 50)                                                       switch is pushed forward. The tail
and “Turn signals” ( page 50).                                                            lamps, license plate lamps, side
                                                                                          marker lamps, parking lamps and
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive                                          instrument panel lamps also come
on the other side of the road than the country
where the vehicle is registered, you must have                                            on.
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low                                              ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at                                            stop)
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                        ‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
                                                                                          stops)
                                                   Exterior lamp switch
                                                                                        ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
                                                   M Off
                                                     Daytime running lamp mode          † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
                                                     ( page 111)
                                                                                        i If you hear a warning signal you have
                                                   U Automatic headlamp mode            forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
                                                     Daytime running lamp mode          opening the driver’s door.
                                                     ( page 111)                        In addition the message Switch off lights
                                                                                        appears in the multifunction display.
                                                   C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
                                                     license plate lamps, side marker   Switch off the headlamps.
                                                     lamps, instrument panel lamps)




                                                                                                                                  109
Controls in detail
Lighting


Manual headlamp mode
The low beam headlamps and the parking
                                            Warning!                              G        The automatic headlamp feature is only an
                                                                                           aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
lamps can be switched on and off with the   If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,       the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
exterior lamp switch.                                                                      times.
                                               the headlamps may switch off
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to            unexpectedly when the system senses
   position B.                                 bright ambient light, for example light       Turn the exterior lamp switch to
                                               from oncoming traffic.                        position U.
Automatic headlamp mode                        the headlamps will not be automatically       With the SmartKey in starter switch
The following lamps switch on and off          switched on under foggy conditions.           position 1, only the parking lamps and
automatically depending on the brightness   To minimize risk to you and to others,           the side marker lamps will switch on
of the ambient light:                       activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp      and off automatically.
                                            switch to B when driving or when traffic         When the engine is running, the low
   Low beam headlamps
                                            and/or ambient lighting conditions require       beam headlamps, the tail and parking
   Tail and parking lamps                   you to do so.                                    lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
   License plate lamps                      In low ambient lighting conditions, only         side marker lamps will switch on and
                                            switch from position U to B with the             off automatically.
   Side marker lamps
                                            vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
                                                                                          i USA only:
                                            Switching from U to B will briefly            With the automatic headlamp mode activated
                                            switch off the headlamps. Doing so while      you can switch on the high beam headlamps in
                                            driving in low ambient lighting conditions    low ambient lighting conditions.
                                            may result in an accident.




110
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                       Lighting


Daytime running lamp mode                      i With the exterior lamp switch in                 USA only:
                                               position M or U, you cannot switch on the
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to                                                               By default, the daytime running lamp mode
                                               high beam headlamps.
   position M or U.                                                                               is deactivated. Activate the daytime
                                               The high beam flasher is available at all times.   running lamp mode using the control
   When the engine is running, the low
                                               For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp       system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
   beam headlamps are switched on.             switch to position B to permit activation of       mode (USA only)” ( page 139).
   In low ambient light conditions, the        the high beam headlamps.
   following lamps will switch on              Vehicles with automatic transmission*:
                                                                                                  i With the daytime running lamp mode
                                                                                                  activated and the exterior lamp switch in
   additionally:                               When the engine is running, and you shift          position M, you cannot switch on the high
       Tail and parking lamps                  from a driving position to position N or P,        beam headlamps.
                                               the low beam headlamps will switch off             The high beam flasher is available at all times.
       License plate lamps                     with a three-minute delay.
                                                                                                  For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
       Side marker lamps                       When the engine is running, and you                switch to position B or U to permit
i With the daytime running lamp mode                                                              activation of the high beam headlamps.
                                                   turn the exterior lamp switch to
activated and the engine running, you cannot                                                      When the engine is running, and you turn
                                                   position C, the parking lamps and
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
                                                   the side marker lamps switch on                the exterior lamp switch to position C
                                                   additionally.                                  or B, the manual headlamp mode has
Canada only:                                                                                      priority over the daytime running lamp
                                                   turn the exterior lamp switch to
The daytime running lamp mode is                                                                  mode.
                                                   position B, the manual headlamp
mandatory and therefore in a constant                                                             The corresponding exterior lamps switch
                                                   mode has priority over the daytime
mode.                                                                                             on ( page 109).
                                                   running lamp mode.
                                                   The corresponding exterior lamps
                                                   switch on ( page 109).


                                                                                                                                             111
Controls in detail
Lighting


Locator lighting and night security                i Fog lamps will operate with the parking               Push in the exterior lamp switch.
illumination                                       lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
                                                                                                           The front fog lamps switch off.
                                                   lamps should only be used in conjunction with
The locator lighting and the night security        low beam headlamps. Consult your State or               The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
illumination are described in the “Control         Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding            exterior lamp switch goes out.
system” section, see “Setting locator light-       permissible lamp operation.
ing” ( page 140) and “Setting night secu-
                                                   i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the           Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
rity illumination” ( page 141).
                                                   exterior lamp switch in position U. To switch           Switch on the low beam
                                                   on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to
Fog lamps                                                                                                  headlamps B ( page 109).
                                                   position B first.
                                                                                                           Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
 Warning!                                 G        Front fog lamps                                         second stop.
                                                       Switch on the low beam                              The front fog lamps and the rear fog
 In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,                                                              lamp switch on.
                                                       headlamps B ( page 109).
 only switch from position U to B with                                                                     The yellow indicator lamp † in the
 the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.       Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
                                                                                                           exterior lamp switch comes on
 Switching from U to B will briefly                    stop.
                                                                                                           ( page 109).
 switch off the headlamps. Doing so while              The front fog lamps switch on.
 driving in low ambient lighting conditions                                                                Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
 may result in an accident.                            The green indicator lamp ‡ in the                   stop.
                                                       exterior lamp switch comes on
                                                                                                           The rear fog lamp switches off.
                                                       ( page 109).
                                                                                                           The yellow indicator lamp † in the
                                                                                                           exterior lamp switch goes out.
                                                                                                           The front fog lamps remain lit.




112
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                             Lighting


Combination switch                            Pull the combination switch in direction   The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
                                              of arrow 2 to its original position to     operate with the engine running and with
                                              switch off the high beam.
                                                                                            the exterior lamp switch in
                                              The high beam headlamp indicator              position B ( page 109)
                                              lamp A in the instrument cluster
                                                                                            or
                                              goes out.
                                                                                            the exterior lamp switch in
                                           High beam flasher                                position U ( page 109)
                                              Pull the combination switch briefly in        or
                                              direction of arrow 2.                         the daytime running lamp mode
                                                                                            activated ( page 111)
Combination switch                         Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
1 High beam                                (C 230 (Canada only), C 280, C 350 and        i With the automatic headlamp mode activat-
2 High beam flasher                        models with 4MATIC: with Bi-Xenon*            ed: The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
                                                                                         only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
                                           headlamps)
High beam                                                                                i If you are driving faster than 25 mph
                                           The corner-illuminating front fog lamps       (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps switched
   Turn the exterior lamp switch to
                                           improve illumination of the area in the       on, the corner-illuminating front fog lamps
   position B ( page 109).                                                               function is not available.
                                           direction into which you are turning.
   Push the combination switch in
   direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
   high beam.
   The high beam headlamp indicator
   lamp A in the instrument cluster
   comes on ( page 24).

                                                                                                                                   113
Controls in detail
Lighting


Driving forward                                i If you have switched on the turn signal for        Switching off corner-illuminating front
                                               one side but turn the steering wheel in the          fog lamps
Switching on corner-illuminating front         opposite direction, the corner-illuminating front
                                               fog lamp comes on for the side indicated by the      The combination switch for the turn signal
fog lamps                                                                                           resets automatically after major steering
                                               turn signal.
     Switch on the left or right turn signal                                                        wheel movements. This will switch off the
                                               The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
     ( page 50), depending on whether          for a maximum of three minutes. Afterward, it        corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
     you are turning left or right.            goes out even if the turn signal is still switched   were activated by switching on the left or
                                               on.                                                  right turn signal.
     The respective front fog lamp comes on
     and illuminates the area in the           i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps tem- If the turn signal should stay on after
     direction into which you are turning.     porarily come on, on both sides of the vehicle if    making the turn, the turn signal and the
                                               you turn the steering wheel in one direction and     corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be
or
                                               then again in the other direction shortly thereaf-   switched off by returning the combination
     Turning steering wheel in desired         ter.                                                 switch to its original position.
     direction.
                                               i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will       i There may be a brief delay before the
     The front fog lamp on the side of your    come on automatically depending on the               corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
     steering direction comes on.              steering angle, even if you did not switch on
                                               either turn signal.
                                               If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
                                               on automatically, they will also go out
                                               automatically depending on the steering angle.




114
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                             Lighting


Driving in reverse                           Hazard warning flasher                    Switching on hazard warning flasher
                                                                                           Press hazard warning flasher
Switching on corner-illuminating front       The hazard warning flasher can be
                                                                                           switch 1.
fog lamps                                    switched on at all times, even with the
                                             SmartKey removed from the starter             All turn signal lamps are flashing.
   Place the gear selector lever (manual
                                             switch.
   transmission: gearshift lever) in                                                   i With the hazard warning flasher activated
   position R.                               The hazard warning flasher switches on    and the combination switch set for either left or
                                             automatically when an air bag deploys.    right turn, only the respective left or right turn
   The corner-illuminating front fog lamp                                              signals will operate when the ignition is switched
   opposite to your steering direction       The hazard warning flasher switch is      on ( page 32).
   comes on.                                 located on the center console.
                                                                                       Switching off hazard warning flasher
Switching off corner-illuminating front
                                                                                           Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
fog lamps
                                                                                           again.
   Place the gear selector lever (manual
   transmission: gearshift lever) out of                                               i If the hazard warning flasher has been
                                                                                       activated automatically, press hazard warning
   position R.                                                                         flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
   The respective front fog lamp goes out.


                                             1 Hazard warning flasher switch




                                                                                                                                  115
Controls in detail
Lighting


Interior lighting                          ! An interior lamp switched on manually does        Activating automatic control
                                           not go out automatically.
                                                                                                   Press rocker switch 3 to center
The controls are located in the overhead   Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON posi-         position.
control panel.                             tion for extended periods of time with the engine
                                           turned off could result in a discharged battery.        The interior lighting switch on in
                                                                                                   darkness, when you
                                           Deactivating automatic control                              unlock the vehicle
                                           i The interior lighting is factory-set to auto-             remove the SmartKey from the
                                           matic mode.                                                 starter switch
                                               Press the = symbol on rocker                            open a door
                                               switch 3.
                                                                                                       open the trunk
                                               The interior lighting remains switched
                                               off in darkness, even when you                  The interior lighting switches off after ap-
1 Rear interior lighting on/off                                                                proximately 10 seconds, see “Setting inte-
2 Right front reading lamp on/off                  unlock the vehicle                          rior lighting delayed shut-off”
3 Rocker switch for automatic control              remove the SmartKey from the                ( page 142).
  system                                           starter switch
4 Left front reading lamp on/off
                                                                                               i If a door remains open, the interior lighting
                                                   open a door                                 switches off automatically after approximately
                                                                                               5 minutes.
                                                   open the trunk




116
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Lighting


Manual control                             Switching front reading lamps on and off      Door entry lamps
                                              Press the left or right button X to
Switching front interior lighting on and                                                 For better orientation in the dark, the cor-
                                              switch on the desired front reading
off                                                                                      responding door entry lamps will switch on
                                              lamp.
                                                                                         in darkness when you open a door and the
   Press the W symbol on rocker
                                              Press the left or right button X           automatic control is activated.
   switch 3.
                                              again to switch off the respective front
                                                                                         The door entry lamps will switch off when
   The front interior lighting comes on.      reading lamp.
                                                                                         the corresponding door is closed.
   Press rocker switch 3 to center
   position to activate the automatic                                                    i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
                                                                                         switch to position 0 and switch off the exterior
   control.                                                                              headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit
                                                                                         for approximately 5 minutes.
Switching rear interior lighting on and
off                                                                                      Trunk lamp
   Press button V.
                                                                                         The trunk lamp switches on if the trunk is
   The lighting in the rear passenger                                                    opened.
   compartment comes on.
                                                                                         If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
   Press button V again.                                                                 lamp switches off automatically after
   The lighting in the rear passenger                                                    approximately 10 minutes.
   compartment goes out.




                                                                                                                                   117
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster


For a full view illustration of the instrument                                                     Adjusting instrument cluster
cluster, see “At a glance” ( page 24).           Warning!                                 G        illumination

                                                 No messages will be displayed if either the       Use reset button 1 to adjust the
                                                 instrument cluster or the multifunction dis-      illumination brightness for the instrument
                                                 play is inoperative.                              cluster.
                                                 As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
                                                                                                   i The instrument cluster illumination is
                                                 mation about your driving conditions, such        dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
                                                 as speed or outside temperature,                  bient light conditions.
                                                 warning/indicator lamps,                          The instrument cluster illumination will also be
                                                 malfunction/warning messages or the               adjusted automatically when you switch on the
                                                 failure of any systems. Driving                   vehicle’s exterior lamps.
1 Reset button                                   characteristics may be impaired.
The instrument cluster is activated when         If you must continue to drive, please do so       To brighten illumination
you                                              with added caution. Visit an authorized               Turn reset button 1 clockwise.
                                                 Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
   open a door                                                                                         The instrument cluster illumination will
   switch on ignition ( page 32)                                                                       brighten.

   press reset button 1                                                                            To dim illumination
   switch on the exterior lighting                                                                     Turn reset button 1 counterclock-
You can change the instrument cluster                                                                  wise.
settings in the Instrument cluster submenu                                                             The instrument cluster illumination will
of the control system ( page 134).                                                                     dim.



118
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Instrument cluster


Coolant temperature gauge                      ! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a         Resetting trip odometer
                                               warning in the multifunction display
The coolant temperature gauge is on the        ( page 346).                                          Make sure you are viewing the trip
left side in the instrument cluster            The engine should not be operated with the cool-      odometer and main odometer in the
( page 24).                                    ant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Doing so         multifunction display ( page 121).
                                               may cause serious engine damage which is not
                                                                                                     If it is not displayed, press button è
                                               covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
 Warning!                              G       ty.                                                   or ÿ on the multifunction steering
                                                                                                     wheel ( page 122) until the trip
    Driving when your engine is badly          i During severe operating conditions, e.g.            odometer appears in the multifunction
    overheated can cause some fluids which     stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may      display.
    may have leaked into the engine            rise close to 248°F (120°C).
    compartment to catch fire. You could be                                                          Press and hold the reset button in the
    seriously burned.                                                                                instrument cluster ( page 118) until
                                                                                                     the trip odometer is reset.
    Steam from an overheated engine can
    cause serious burns and can occur just
    by opening the hood. Stay away from
    the engine if you see or hear steam com-
    ing from it.
 Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
 and do not stand near the vehicle until the
 engine has cooled down.




                                                                                                                                      119
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster


Tachometer                                           Outside temperature indicator                      The temperature sensor is located in the
                                                                                                        front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer                                                                       sensor can be affected by road or engine
( page 24) denotes excessive engine                   Warning!                                 G        heat during idling or slow driving. There-
speed.                                                                                                  fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
                                                      The outside temperature indicator is not de-      ature can only be verified by comparison to
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as        signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
it may result in serious engine damage that is not                                                      a thermometer placed next to the sensor,
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-          is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.         not by comparison to external displays
ty.                                                   Indicated temperatures just above the freez-      (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply           ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-     When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
is interrupted if the engine is operated              face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,   ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
within the red marking.                               especially in wooded areas or on bridges.         garage), you will notice a delay before the
                                                                                                        lower temperature is displayed.
                                                     The outside temperature is indicated in the        A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
                                                     multifunction display ( page 121).                 atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
                                                                                                        perature indications caused by heat
                                                                                                        radiated from the engine during idling or
                                                                                                        slow driving.




120
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Control system
   Control system
The control system is activated as soon as                                                         Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is               Warning!                               G
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to                                      A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
                                                    conditions must always be his/her primary
    call up information about your vehicle          focus when driving.
    change vehicle settings                         For your safety and the safety of others,
For example, you can use the control                selecting features through the multifunction
system to find out when your vehicle is             steering wheel should only be done by the
next due for service, to set the language           driver when traffic and road conditions
for messages in the instrument cluster              permit it to be done safely.
display, and much more.                             Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph    1 Trip odometer
                                                    (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is       2 Main odometer
i The displays for the audio systems (radio,
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of    covering a distance of 44 feet                 3 Current program mode
the language selected.                              (approximately 14 m) every second.               (automatic transmission*)
                                                                                                   4 Current gear selector lever
                                                   The control system relays information to          position/gear range
                                                   the multifunction display.                        (automatic transmission*)
                                                                                                   5 Digital clock
                                                                                                   6 Status indicator (outside tempera-
                                                                                                     ture/digital speedometer)




                                                                                                                                      121
Controls in detail
Control system


Multifunction steering wheel                  1 Multifunction display              4 Menu systems:
                                                  Operating the control system       Press button
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are    2 Selecting the submenu or setting      è for next menu
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc-     the volume:                           ÿ for previous menu
tion steering wheel.                            Press button                       5 Moving within a menu:
                                                  æ up/to increase                   Press button
                                                  ç down/to decrease                  j for next display
                                              3 Telephone*:                           k for previous display
                                                Press button
                                                  s to take a call
                                                    to dial
                                                    to redial
                                                  t to end a call
                                                    to reject an incoming call




122
                                                                                                                      Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Control system


Depending on the selected menu                    It is helpful to think of the menus, and the   In the Settings menu, instead of functions
( page 125), pressing the buttons on the          functions within each menu, as being           you will find a number of submenus for
multifunction steering wheel will alter what      arranged in a circular pattern.                calling up and changing settings. For
is shown in the multifunction display.                                                           instructions on using these submenus, see
                                                     If you press button è or ÿ
                                                                                                 “Submenus in the Settings menu”
The information available in the multifunc-          repeatedly, you will pass through each
                                                                                                 ( page 132).
tion display is arranged in menus, each              menu one after the other.
containing a number of functions or sub-                                                         The number of menus available in the sys-
                                                     If you press button k or j
menus.                                                                                           tem depends on which optional equipment
                                                     repeatedly, you will pass through each
                                                                                                 is installed in your vehicle.
The individual functions are then found              function display, one after the other, in
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op-            the current menu.                           i The headings used in the menus table are
erations under AUDIO, for example). These                                                        designed to facilitate navigation within the sys-
functions serve to call up relevant informa-                                                     tem and are not necessarily identical to those
tion or to customize the settings for your                                                       shown in the control system displays.
vehicle.                                                                                         The first function displayed in each menu will au-
                                                                                                 tomatically show you which part of the system
i C 230 Sport and C 350 Sport:                                                                   you are in.
Steering wheel in these vehicles will vary from
steering wheel shown. However, multifunction
steering wheel symbols and feature description
apply to Sport models as well.




                                                                                                                                            123
Controls in detail
Control system


Menus                This is what you will see when you scroll   The table on the next page provides an
                     through the menus.                          overview of the individual menus.




124
                                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                    Control system


Menus, submenus and functions

                        Menu 1            Menu 2            Menu 3               Menu 4                Menu 5         Menu 6            Menu 7
                        Standard          AUDIO             NAV*                 Vehicle status        Settings       Trip computer     TEL*
                        display                                                  message memory
                        ( page 126)       ( page 127)       ( page 129)          ( page 130)           ( page 131)    ( page 144)       ( page 146)
                        Run Flat          Selecting radio   Show route guid-     Call up vehicle mal-  Reset to       Fuel consumption Load phone
                        Indicator*        station           ance instructions,   function, warning and factory        statistics from  book
                        (Canada only)                       current direction    system status messag- settings       start
                                                            traveled             es stored in memory1
    Commands/submenus




                        Digital speed-   Selecting satel-                                              Instrument     Fuel consumption Search for
                        ometer or out-   lite radio sta-                                               cluster sub-   statistics since name in
                        side temperature tion* (USA only)                                              menu           the last reset   phone book
                        Call up main-     Operating                                                    Time/Date      Distance to
                        tenance service   CD player*                                                   submenu        empty
                        display
                                                                                                       Lighting
                                                                                                       submenu
                                                                                                       Vehicle
                                                                                                       submenu
                                                                                                       Convenience
                                                                                                       submenu
1
            The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.


                                                                                                                                               125
Controls in detail
Control system


Standard display menu                        If another display is shown instead of the   Call up digital speedometer or outside
                                             standard display:                            temperature
In the standard display, the main odometer
                                                Press button è or ÿ repeatedly               Press button j or k repeatedly
and the trip odometer are shown in the
                                                until you see the standard display.          until the digital speedometer or the
multifunction display.
                                                                                             outside temperature appears in the
                                                Press button k or j to select
                                                                                             multifunction display.
                                                the functions in the standard display
                                                menu.
                                             The following functions are available:
                                             Function                           Page
                                             Run Flat Indicator* (Canada        291
                                             only)
                                             Call up digital speedometer or     126
                                             outside temperature
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer                              Call up maintenance service        310
                                             display                                      Example illustration
                                                                                          1 Digital speedometer
                                                                                          i You can select whether the digital speedom-
                                                                                          eter or the outside temperature is to be dis-
                                                                                          played, see “Select display (digital speedometer
                                                                                          or outside temperature) for status indicator”
                                                                                          ( page 135).




126
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Control system


AUDIO menu                                  Selecting radio station                           The station search depends on the se-
                                                                                              lected setting in the Vehicle submenu
                                               Turn on the radio ( page 190) and se-
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate                                                       of the control system ( page 142).
                                               lect radio. Vehicles with COMAND*:
the audio equipment which you currently                                                       Pressing button k or j will ei-
                                               Refer to separate operating instruc-
have turned on.                                                                               ther start a frequency scan or select
                                               tions.
If no audio equipment is currently turned                                                     the next stored radio station.
                                               Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the                                                  i You can only store new stations using the
                                               until the currently tuned station
multifunction display.                                                                    corresponding feature on the radio
                                               appears in the multifunction display.
                                                                                          ( page 196).
The following functions are available:
                                                                                          Vehicles with COMAND*:
Function                           Page                                                   Refer to separate operating instructions.
Selecting radio station            127                                                    You can also operate the radio in the usual
                                                                                          manner.
Selecting satellite radio station* 127
(USA only)
                                                                                          Selecting satellite radio station*
Operating CD player*               128                                                    (USA only)
                                                                                          The satellite radio is treated as a radio
                                                                                          application.
                                            1 Waveband setting                                Select satellite radio with the
                                            2 Station frequency                               corresponding soft key (SAT) in the
                                               Press button k or j repeatedly                 radio menu.
                                               until the desired station or the desired
                                               stored station is found.



                                                                                                                                      127
Controls in detail
Control system


                                                  Operating the CD player*
                                                  i The COMAND* system and the
                                                  CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as CDs
                                                  with MP3 files.

                                                  Selecting CD track
                                                     Turn on the radio and select CD or
                                                     CD changer* ( page 205).
                                                     Vehicles with COMAND*:
1 SAT mode and preset number                         Refer to separate operating                  1 Current CD (with additional number
2 Channel name or number                             instructions.                                  from 1 to 6 when running from
                                                     Press button è or ÿ repeatedly                 CD changer*)
    Press button k or j repeatedly
                                                     until the settings for the CD currently      2 Current track
    until the desired channel is found.
                                                     being played appear in the                      Press button k or j repeatedly
i For more information on satellite radio oper-      multifunction display.                          until the desired track is selected.
ation, see “Introduction to satellite radio*
(USA only)” ( page 197).                                                                          i To select a CD from the CD changer* maga-
Vehicles with COMAND*:                                                                            zine, press a number on the audio system or the
Refer to separate operating instructions.                                                         COMAND* system key pad located in the center
                                                                                                  console.
                                                                                                  For more information on CD operation, see
                                                                                                  “CD mode” ( page 201) and for the
                                                                                                  CD changer*, see ( page 204).




128
                                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Control system


Selecting CD MP3-track (vehicles with                                                                  NAV* menu
COMAND* and/or CD changer*)
                                                                                                       The NAV menu contains the functions
    Turn on the radio and select the
                                                                                                       needed to operate your navigation system.
    CD changer* ( page 205) or turn on
    COMAND* and select CD or                                                                              Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
    CD changer*. Vehicles with                                                                            until the message NAV appears in the
    COMAND*: Refer to separate                                                                            multifunction display.
    operating instructions.                                                                               If COMAND* is switched off, the mes-
i A CD with MP3 files insert in the                                                                       sage NAV OFF appears in the multifunc-
CD changer* is handled by the                       1 MP3 mode (vehicles with COMAND*)                    tion display.
audio/COMAND* system like an audio CD. In-
                                                    2 Current track                                       With COMAND* switched on but route
formation contained on the CD with MP3 files
will not shown in the multifunction display or in       Press button k or j repeatedly                    guidance not activated, the direction of
the audio/COMAND* display.                              until the desired track is selected.              travel and, if available, the name of the
                                                                                                          street currently traveled on appear in
    Press button è or ÿ repeatedly                  i Level of information displayed will vary de-        the multifunction display.
    until the settings for the CD currently         pending on the information contained on the CD
    being played appear in the                      with MP3 files insert in the single CD player of      With COMAND* switched on and route
    multifunction display.                          the COMAND* system.                                   guidance activated, the direction of
                                                    To select a CD from the CD changer* magazine,
                                                                                                          travel and maneuver instructions ap-
                                                    press a number on the audio system or the             pear in the multifunction display.
                                                    COMAND* system key pad located in the center       Please refer to the COMAND* manual for
                                                    console.
                                                                                                       instructions on how to activate the route
                                                    For more information on MP3, see “MP3              guidance system*.
                                                    notes” ( page 202), and for operating,
                                                    see “MP3 playback” ( page 204).

                                                                                                                                             129
Controls in detail
Control system


Vehicle status message memory menu                                                           Vehicle status messages have been
                                                safety checks performed on the vehicle and
                                                                                             recorded
                                                by bringing the vehicle to an authorized
Use the vehicle status message memory
                                                Mercedes-Benz Center to address the mal-     If conditions have occurred causing status
menu to scan malfunction and warning
                                                function and warning messages                messages to be recorded, the number of
messages that may be stored in the
                                                ( page 333).                                 messages appears in the multifunction
system. Such messages appear in the mul-
                                                                                             display:
tifunction display and are based on condi-
tions or system status the vehicle’s system       Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
has recorded.                                     until the vehicle status message
                                                  memory appears in the multifunction
The vehicle status message memory menu            display.
only appears if there are any messages
stored.                                           If the vehicle status message memory
                                                  menu does not appear, then there are
                                                  no messages stored.
 Warning!                              G
 Malfunction and warning messages are only
 indicated for certain systems and are inten-                                                1 Number of messages
 tionally not very detailed. The malfunction                                                    Press button k or j.
 and warning messages are simply a remind-
 er with respect to the operation of certain                                                    The stored messages will now be
 systems and do not replace the owner’s                                                         displayed in the order in which they
 and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain                                                     have occurred. For malfunction and
 the vehicle’s operating safety by having all                                                   warning messages, see “Vehicle status
 required maintenance and                                                                       messages in the multifunction display”
                                                                                                ( page 333).


130
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                       Control system


Should the vehicle’s system record any             Settings menu                               Resetting all settings
conditions while driving, the number of
                                                                                               You can reset all the functions of all
messages will reappear in the multifunc-           In the Settings menu there are two
                                                                                               submenus to the factory settings.
tion display when the SmartKey in the              functions:
starter switch is turned to position 0 or                                                         Press the reset button in the
                                                      The function Reset to factory
removed from the starter switch.                                                                  instrument cluster ( page 118) for
                                                      settings, with which you can reset all
                                                                                                  approximately 3 seconds.
i The vehicle status message memory will be           the settings to the original factory
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-      settings.                                   The request to press the reset button
er switch to position 1 or 2. You will then only                                                  once more to confirm appears in the
                                                      A collection of submenus with which
see high-priority messages in the multifunction                                                   multifunction display.
display ( page 333).                                  you can make individual settings for
                                                      your vehicle.
                                                      Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
                                                      until the Settings menu appears in the
                                                      multifunction display.




                                                                                                  Press the reset button once more.
                                                                                                  The functions of all the submenus will
                                                                                                  reset to factory settings.




                                                                                                                                        131
Controls in detail
Control system


i The settings you have changed will not be re- Submenus in the Settings menu                 The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
set unless you confirm the action by pressing the                                             Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
                                                     Press button j.
reset button a second time. After approximately                                               with button æ.
5 seconds, the Settings menu reappears in the        The collection of the submenus
multifunction display.                                                                        With the selection marker on the desired
                                                     appears in the multifunction display.
                                                                                              submenu, use the button j to access
For safety reasons, the following function are not
reset while driving:                                                                          the individual functions within that sub-
                                                                                              menu. Once within the submenu, you can
    the Headlamp mode function in the Light-
    ing submenu
                                                                                              use the button j to move to the next
                                                                                              function or the button k to move to the
                                                                                              previous function within that submenu.
                                                                                              The settings themselves are made with
                                                                                              button æ or ç.
                                                                                              The table below shows what settings can
                                                                                              be changed within the various menus.
                                                     Press button ç.                          Detailed instructions on making individual
                                                     The selection marker moves to the next   settings can be found on the following
                                                     submenu.                                 pages.




132
                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                       Control system


Instrument cluster      Time/Date                      Lighting                   Vehicle         Convenience
( page 134)             ( page 136)                    ( page 139)                ( page 142)     ( page 143)
Select speedometer      Time synchronization with head Setting daytime running    Set automatic   Activate easy-entry/exit
display mode            unit*                          lamp mode (USA only)       locking         feature*
Select language         Set the time (hours)           Setting locator lighting
Select display (speed   Set the time (minutes)         Setting night security
display or outside                                     illumination
temperature) for status
indicator
                        Select automatic time change Setting interior lighting
                        (Daylight Saving Time (DST)  delayed shut-off
                        summer/Standard time winter)
                        Set the date (month)
                        Set the date (day)
                        Set the date (year)




                                                                                                                     133
Controls in detail
Control system


Instrument cluster submenu                 Select speedometer display mode             Select language
Access the Inst.cluster submenu via the       Move the selection marker with              Move the selection marker with
Settings menu. Use the Inst.cluster           button æ or ç to the                        button æ or ç to the
submenu to change the instrument cluster      Inst.cluster submenu.                       Inst.cluster submenu.
display settings.
                                              Press button j or k repeatedly              Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available:        until the message Disp.Unit                 until the message Language appears in
                                              Speed-/odom. appears in the multifunc-      the multifunction display.
Function                           Page
                                              tion display.                               The selection marker is on the current
Select speedometer display         134
                                              The selection marker is on the current      setting.
mode
                                              setting.
Select language                    134
Select display (speed display or 135
outside temperature) for status
indicator




                                              Press button æ or ç to set
                                              speedometer unit to km or miles.




134
                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                Control system


Press button æ or ç to select     Select display (digital speedometer or      Press button æ or ç to select
the language to be used for the   outside temperature) for status             the desired setting.
multifunction display messages.   indicator
                                                                              The selected display is then shown
Available languages:                 Move the selection marker with           continuously in the lower display.
                                     button æ or ç to the
   German                                                                     The other display now appears in the
                                     Inst.cluster submenu.
                                                                              menu of the standard display:
   English
                                     Press button j or k repeatedly
   French                                                                        Digital speedometer
                                     until the message Status line
                                     display appears in the multifunction        or
   Italian
                                     display.                                    Outside temperature
   Spanish
                                     The selection marker is on the current
   Dutch                             setting.
   Danish
   Swedish
   Portuguese
   Turkish
   Russian (Canada only)




                                                                                                              135
Controls in detail
Control system


Time/Date submenu                          Time synchronization with head unit*         Set the time (hours)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the       This function can only be seen on vehicles   This function can be seen in vehicles with
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date           with COMAND* and navigation module*.         audio system, or in vehicles with
submenu to change the instrument cluster                                                COMAND* if the time synchronization with
                                              Move the selection marker with
display settings.                                                                       head unit* feature was set to Off.
                                              button æ or ç to the Time/Date
The following functions are available:        submenu.                                  i Vehicles with COMAND*:
                                                                                        For information on setting the time, refer to the
Function                           Page       Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                                                        separate COMAND operating instructions.
                                              until the message Time synchro.
Time synchronization with          136                                                      Move the selection marker with
                                              w/Head Unit appears in the multifunc-
head unit*                                                                                  button æ or ç to the Time/Date
                                              tion display.
Set the time (hours)               136                                                      submenu.
                                              The selection marker is on the current
Set the time (minutes)             137        setting.                                      Press button j or k repeatedly
Select automatic time change       137                                                      until the message Time Hours appears
(Daylight Saving Time (DST)                                                                 in the multifunction display.
summer/Standard time winter)                                                                The selection marker is on the hour
Set the date (month)               138                                                      setting.
Set the date (day)                 138
Set the date (year)                138



                                              Press button æ or ç to select
                                              the desired setting.


136
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Control system


                                                       Press button j or k repeatedly            Move the selection marker with
                                                       until the message Time Minutes            button æ or ç to the Time/Date
                                                       appears in the multifunction display.     submenu.
                                                       The selection marker is on the minute     Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                       setting.                                  until the message Daylight sav.
                                                                                                 Summer / Winter time appears in the
                                                                                                 multifunction display.
                                                                                                 The selection marker is on the current
                                                                                                 setting.
    Press button æ or ç to set the
    hour.

Set the time (minutes)
This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with                      Press button æ or ç to set the
COMAND* if the time synchronization with               minutes.
head unit* feature was set to Off.
                                                    Select automatic time change (Daylight
i Vehicles with COMAND*:                            Saving Time (DST) summer/Standard
For information on setting the time, refer to the                                                Press button æ or ç to select if
separate COMAND operating instructions.             time winter)
                                                                                                 the changeover between summer and
    Move the selection marker with                  This function can be seen in vehicles with   winter time should be automatic or
    button æ or ç to the Time/Date                  audio system, or in vehicles with            manual.
    submenu.                                        COMAND* if the time synchronization with
                                                    head unit* feature was set to Off.


                                                                                                                                  137
Controls in detail
Control system


Set the date (month)                                                                                       Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                                                                           until the message Date Set day
This function can be seen in vehicles with
audio system, or in vehicles with                                                                          appears in the multifunction display.
COMAND* if the time synchronization with                                                                   The selection marker is on the day
head unit* feature was set to Off.                                                                         setting.
i Vehicles with COMAND*:
For information on setting the date, refer to the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
    Move the selection marker with
    button æ or ç to the Time/Date                      Press button æ or ç to set the
    submenu.                                            month.
    Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                    Set the date (day)
    until the message Date Set month ap-
    pears in the multifunction display.             This function can be seen in vehicles with
                                                    audio system, or in vehicles with                      Press button æ or ç to set the
    The selection marker is on the month
                                                    COMAND* if the time synchronization with               day.
    setting.
                                                    head unit* feature was set to Off.
                                                                                                        Set the date (year)
                                                    i Vehicles with COMAND*:
                                                    For information on setting the date, refer to the   This function can be seen in vehicles with
                                                    separate COMAND operating instructions.             audio system, or in vehicles with
                                                        Move the selection marker with                  COMAND* if the time synchronization with
                                                        button æ or ç to the Time/Date                  head unit* feature was set to Off.
                                                        submenu.


138
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Control system


i Vehicles with COMAND*:                            Lighting submenu                           Setting daytime running lamp mode
For information on setting the date, refer to the                                              (USA only)
                                                    Access the Lighting submenu via the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
                                                    Settings menu. Use the Lighting            i This function is not available in countries
    Move the selection marker with                  submenu to change the lamp and lighting    where the daytime running lamp mode is
    button æ or ç to the Time/Date                  settings on your vehicle.                  mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
    submenu.
                                                    The following functions are available:         Move the selection marker with
    Press button j or k repeatedly                                                                 button æ or ç to the Lighting
    until the message Date Set year ap-             Function                            Page       submenu.
    pears in the multifunction display.             Setting daytime running lamp        139        Press button j or k repeatedly
    The selection marker is on the year             mode (USA only)                                until the message Headlamp mode ap-
    setting.                                        Setting locator lighting            140        pears in the multifunction display.
                                                    Setting night security              141        The selection marker is on the current
                                                    illumination                                   setting.
                                                    Setting interior lighting delayed   142
                                                    shut-off




    Press button æ or ç to set the
    year.




                                                                                                                                        139
Controls in detail
Control system


   Press button æ or ç to select               i For safety reasons, resetting the Lighting      If you do not open a door after unlocking
   manual operation (Manual) or daytime        submenu to factory settings ( page 131) while     the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps
   running lamp mode (Constant).               driving will not deactivate the daytime running   will switch off automatically after
                                               lamp mode.                                        approximately 40 seconds.
With daytime running lamp mode activated
                                               The following message appears in the
and the exterior lamp switch in                                                                     Move the selection marker with
                                               multifunction display:
position M or U, the low beam                  Lighting - Cannot be completely reset                button æ or ç to the Lighting
headlamps are switched on when the             to factory settings while driving.                   submenu.
engine is running.
                                                                                                    Press button j or k repeatedly
In low ambient light conditions the            Setting locator lighting                             until the message Surround lighting
following lamps will switch on additionally:   With the locator lighting feature activated          appears in the multifunction display.
   Parking lamps                               and the exterior lamp switch in                      The selection marker is on the current
                                               position U, the following lamps will                 setting.
   Tail lamps                                  switch on during darkness when the vehi-
   License plate lamps                         cle is unlocked with the SmartKey:
   Side marker lamps                              Parking lamps
For more information on the daytime               Tail lamps
running lamp mode, see “Lighting”                 License plate lamps
( page 109).
                                                  Side marker lamps
                                                  Front fog lamps
                                               The locator lighting switches off when the
                                               driver’s door is opened.                             Press button æ or ç to switch
                                                                                                    the locator lighting function On or Off.


140
                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                 Control system


   Turn the exterior lamp switch to          If after turning off the engine you do not      Press button æ or ç to switch
   position U when exiting the vehicle.      open a door or do not close an opened           the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
                                             door, the lamps will automatically switch       On or Off.
   The locator lighting feature is
                                             off after 60 seconds.
   activated.                                                                                Turn the exterior lamp switch to
                                                Move the selection marker with               position U before turning off the
Setting night security illumination             button æ or ç to the Lighting                engine.
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)            submenu.
                                                                                             The headlamps delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would      Press button j or k repeatedly               feature is activated.
like the exterior lamps to remain on for        until the message Headl. delayed          You can temporarily deactivate the head-
15 seconds during darkness after exiting        shut-off appears in the multifunction
                                                                                          lamp delayed shut-off feature:
the vehicle and closing all doors.              display.
                                                                                             Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
With the headlamps delayed shut-off             The selection marker is on the current
                                                                                             SmartKey in the starter switch to
feature activated and the exterior lamp         setting.
                                                                                             position 0.
switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will                                                      Then turn it to position 2 and back to
switch on when the engine is turned off:                                                     position 0.
   Parking lamps                                                                             The headlamps delayed shut-off
                                                                                             feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
   Tail lamps                                                                                as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
   License plate lamps                                                                       the starter switch.
   Side marker lamps
   Front fog lamps



                                                                                                                                 141
Controls in detail
Control system


Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off       Press button æ or ç to switch                 Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                 the interior lighting delayed shut-off        until the message Audio search
Use this function to set whether you would
                                                 feature Off or On.                            appears in the multifunction display.
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have                                                      The selection marker is on the current
removed the SmartKey from the starter         Vehicle submenu                                  setting.
switch.                                       Access the Vehicle submenu via the
                                              Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
   Move the selection marker with
                                              to make general vehicle settings.
   button æ or ç to the Lighting
   submenu.                                   The following function is available:
   Press button j or k repeatedly             Function                               Page
   until the message Interior light.
                                              Selecting audio search function 142
   delay.sw.off appears in the multifunc-
   tion display.                              Setting automatic locking              143
   The selection marker is on the current
                                              Selecting audio search function                  Press button æ or ç to set the
   setting.
                                              Use of the Audio search function to select       audio search function to Frequency
                                              a radio station ( page 127) will enable          or Memory.
                                              you to start a frequency scan (Frequency)     To select a radio station, see “Selecting ra-
                                              or select a radio station stored in memory    dio station” ( page 127).
                                              (Memory).
                                                 Move the selection marker with
                                                 button æ or ç to the Vehicle
                                                 submenu.



142
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system


Setting automatic locking                                                                  Convenience submenu
Use this function to activate or deactivate                                                Access the Convenience submenu via the
the automatic central locking. With the                                                    Settings menu. Use the Convenience
automatic central locking system                                                           submenu to change the settings for a
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at                                              number of convenience features.
vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
                                                                                           The following functions are available:
(15 km/h).
                                                                                           Function                           Page
   Move the selection marker with
   button æ or ç to the Vehicle                                                            Activate                           144
   submenu.                                     Press button æ or ç to switch              easy-entry/exit feature*
   Press button j or k repeatedly               the automatic central locking On or Off.
   until the message Automatic door
   lock appears in the multifunction dis-
   play.
   The selection marker is on the current
   setting.




                                                                                                                                143
Controls in detail
Control system


Activate easy-entry/exit feature*                Move the selection marker with           Trip computer menu
                                                 button æ or ç to the
Use this function to activate and
                                                 Convenience submenu.                     Use the trip computer menu to call up
deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
                                                                                          statistical data on your vehicle.
( page 40).                                      Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                 until the message Easy-entry feature     The following information is available:
 Warning!                               G        appears in the multifunction display.
                                                                                          Function                           Page
                                                 The selection marker is on the current   Fuel consumption statistics from 144
 You must make sure no one can become            setting.                                 start
 trapped or injured by the moving steering
 wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is                                                Fuel consumption statistics        145
 activated.                                                                               since last reset
 To stop steering wheel movement, do one of                                               Distance to empty                  146
 the following:
     Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
                                                                                          Fuel consumption statistics from start
     ( page 40).                                                                             Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
     Press memory position switch*                                                           until the first function of the trip
     ( page 108).                                                                            computer menu appears in the
 Do not leave children unattended in the ve-     Press button æ or ç to switch               multifunction display.
 hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.   the easy-entry feature On or Off.           Press button j or k repeatedly
 Children could open the driver’s door and                                                   until the message From start appears
 unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit                                                in the multifunction display.
 feature, which could result in an accident
 and/or serious personal injury.



144
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                      Control system


                                                    Fuel consumption since last reset          Resetting fuel consumption statistics
                                                       Press button ÿ or è repeatedly             Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
                                                       until the first function of the trip       until the first function of the trip
                                                       computer menu appears in the               computer menu appears in the
                                                       multifunction display.                     multifunction display.
                                                       Press button j or k repeatedly             Press button j or k repeatedly
                                                       until the message Since reset appears      until the reading that you want to reset
                                                       in the multifunction display.              appears in the multifunction display.
                                                                                                  Press and hold the reset button in the
1 Distance driven since start                                                                     instrument cluster ( page 118) until
2 Time elapsed since start                                                                        the value is reset to 0.
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
                                                    1 Distance driven since last reset
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
                                                    2 Time elapsed since last reset
                                                    3 Average speed since last reset
                                                    4 Average fuel consumption since last
                                                      reset




                                                                                                                                    145
Controls in detail
Control system


Distance to empty                           TEL menu*
                                                                                             Never operate radio transmitters equipped
   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                        with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
   Press button ÿ or è repeatedly            Warning!                              G         out being connected to an external antenna)
                                                                                             from inside the vehicle while the engine is
   until the first function of the trip
                                                                                             running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
   computer menu appears in the              A driver’s attention to the road must always
                                                                                             tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
   multifunction display.                    be his/her primary focus when driving. For
                                                                                             possibly resulting in an accident and
                                             your safety and the safety of others, we
   Press button j or k repeatedly                                                            personal injury.
                                             recommend that you pull over to a safe
   until the message Range: appears in
                                             location and stop before placing or taking a
   the multifunction display.                                                               You can use the functions in the TEL menu
                                             telephone call. If you choose to use the
   The calculated remaining driving range    telephone while driving, please use the        to operate your telephone, provided it is
   based on the current fuel tank level      hands-free device and only use the             connected to a hands-free system and
   appears in the multifunction display.     telephone when weather, road and traffic       switched on.
                                             conditions permit.                                Switch on the telephone and Audio or
                                             Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from       COMAND*.
                                             using a cellular telephone while driving a        Press button ÿ or è on the
                                             vehicle.                                          steering wheel repeatedly until the
                                             Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph       message TEL appears in the
                                             (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is          multifunction display.
                                             covering a distance of 44 feet                 Which messages will appear in the
                                             (approximately 14 m) every second.             multifunction display depends on whether
                                                                                            your telephone is switched on or off:




146
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Control system


   If the telephone is off, the message     Answering a call                               Dialing a number from the phone book
   Phone off appears in the multifunction
                                            When your telephone is ready to receive        If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
   display.                                 calls, you can answer a call at any time. In   you may select and dial a number from the
   If the telephone is on:                  the multifunction display you will see the     phone book at any time.
                                            message, or if available, the caller ID
   The telephone will then search for a                                                       Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
                                            (name and number):
   network. During this time the multi-                                                       until the message TEL appears in the
   function display is empty.                                                                 multifunction display.
   As soon as the telephone has found a                                                       Press button j or k.
   network, the message READY appears in
                                                                                              The control system reads the phone
   the multifunction display.                                                                 book which is stored in the telephone.
                                                                                              This may take several minutes. The
                                                                                              message Please wait appears in the
                                                                                              multifunction display.
                                                                                              When the message Please wait
                                               Press button s.                                disappears, the phone book has been
                                                                                              loaded.
                                               You have answered the call. The
                                               duration of the call appears in the            Press button j or k repeatedly
                                               multifunction display.                         until the desired name appears in the
                                                                                              multifunction display.
This standby message indicates that your
                                            Ending a call or rejecting an incoming            The stored names are displayed in
telephone is ready for use and you can
                                            call                                              ascending or descending alphabetical
operate it using the control system.
                                               Press button t.                                order.



                                                                                                                                 147
Controls in detail
Control system


                                                    If the connection is successful and     Redialing
                                                    this feature is supported by your       The control system stores the most
                                                    network provider, the name of the       recently dialed phone numbers. This
                                                    party you are calling (if stored in     eliminates the need to search through your
                                                    your phone book) and the duration       entire phone book.
                                                    of the call will appear in the multi-
                                                    function display.                          Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
                                                                                               until the message TEL appears in the
                                                                                               multifunction display.
                                                                                               Press button s.
1 Name from the phone book
                                                                                               The first number in the redial memory
i If you press and hold button j or k                                                          appears in the multifunction display.
for longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rap-
idly through the list of names until you release                                               Press button j or k repeatedly
the button again.                                                                              until the desired name appears in the
                                                                                               multifunction display.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing
button t.                                                                                      Press button s.
                                                    If no connection is made, the
    Press button s.                                 control system stores the dialed           The control system dials the selected
    The system dials the selected phone             number in the redial memory.               phone number.
    number.




148
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Manual transmission
  Manual transmission
Manual transmission is standard
equipment on select models and not
                                                 Do not park this vehicle in areas where
                                                 combustible materials such as grass, hay or
                                                                                                Warning!                                G
available on all models.
                                                 leaves can come into contact with the hot      On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
For information on driving with a manual         exhaust system, as these materials could be    in order to obtain braking action. This could
transmission, see “Manual transmission”          ignited and cause a vehicle fire.              result in drive wheel slip and reduced
( page 46).                                                                                     vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
                                                                                                prevent this type of loss of control.
 Warning!                               G        Warning!                              G
                                                 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
 For vehicles equipped with a manual trans-
                                                 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                                                                Warning!                                G
 mission, getting out of your vehicle with the
                                                 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
 gearshift lever not engaged in first or                                                        Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
                                                 children unattended in the vehicle, or with
 reverse gear and parking brake engaged is                                                      structing the pedals’ range of movement.
                                                 access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
 dangerous.                                                                                     Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
                                                 could move the gearshift lever, which could
 Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged                                                    cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
                                                 result in an accident and/or serious person-
 first or reverse gear alone may not prevent                                                    the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
                                                 al injury.
 your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting                                                     have sufficient clearance.
 people or objects.                                                                             During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
 Always set the parking brake in addition to                                                    the objects could get caught between or be-
 engaging first or reverse gear ( page 54).                                                     neath the pedals. You could then no longer
                                                                                                brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci-
 When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
                                                                                                dents and injury.
 towards the road curb.




                                                                                                                                         149
Controls in detail
Manual transmission


                                            ! When you are shifting into the 5th or 6th          Shifting into reverse
                                            gear, make sure that you press the gearshift le-
                                            ver to the right. Otherwise, you could accidental-   ! Only shift into reverse gear R when the vehi-
                                            ly shift into the 3th or 4th gear and damage the     cle is stationary, as the transmission could oth-
                                            transmission.                                        erwise be damaged.
                                            Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the            Stop the vehicle completely.
                                            engine can result in engine damage that is not
                                            covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-             Fully depress clutch pedal.
                                            ty.
                                                                                                     Move the gearshift lever to neutral
                                            Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using        position (no gear selected).
Gearshift pattern for manual transmission   the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged
                                            which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-           Move the gearshift lever to the left until
                                            ited Warranty.                                           you feel a certain resistance.
                                            Do not exceed the engine speed limits. Refer to          Push the gearshift lever past this
                                            tachometer ( page 120) for engine speeds.
                                                                                                     resistance.
                                                                                                     Then move the gearshift lever forward
                                                                                                     into position R.




150
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Automatic transmission*
   Automatic transmission*
Automatic transmission is standard                                                                  Gear selector lever
equipment on select models and available           Warning!                                G
as optional equipment on select other                                                               The gear selector lever is located on the
models.                                            Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-     lower part of the center console.
                                                   structing the pedals’ range of movement.
For more information on driving with an            Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
automatic transmission, see “Automatic             cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
transmission*” ( page 47).                         the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear        have sufficient clearance.
shifting process to your individual driving        During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
style by continually adjusting the shift           the objects could get caught between or be-
points up or down. These shift point adjust-       neath the pedals. You could then no longer
ments are performed based on current               brake or accelerate. This could lead to acci-
operating and driving conditions.                  dents and injury.
If the operating conditions change, the                                                             Gearshift pattern for automatic
                                                                                                    transmission
automatic transmission reacts by
adjusting its shift program.                                                                         P Park position
                                                                                                     R Reverse gear
i During the brief warm-up, transmission                                                             N Neutral
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic                                                     D Drive position
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature.                                                                                        i The current gear selector lever position P,
                                                                                                    R, N or D appears in the multifunction display
                                                                                                    ( page 153).




                                                                                                                                              151
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*


                                                 Shifting procedure                          ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
 Warning!                               G                                                    Do not place full load on the engine until the
                                                 The automatic transmission selects indi-    operating temperature has been reached.
 It is dangerous to shift the gear selector      vidual gears automatically, depending on:   Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
 lever out of park position P or neutral                                                     when the vehicle is stopped.
                                                    gear selector lever position D
 position N if the engine speed is higher than
                                                    ( page 153) with gear ranges             Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off
 idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the                                               on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri-
                                                    ( page 156)
 brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate                                                   ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov-
 quickly forward or reverse. You could lose         the selected program mode (C/S)          ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
 control of the vehicle and hit someone or          ( page 157)
                                                                                             When the gear selector lever is in drive
 something. Only shift into gear when the           the position of the accelerator pedal    position D, you can influence transmission
 engine is idling normally and when your right      ( page 155)                              shifting by:
 foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
                                                    the vehicle speed                            limiting the gear range
An additional indication of the current gear                                                     changing gears manually
selector lever position can be found on the
cover of the shifting-gate.
The indicators come on when you activate
a switch (e.g. unlocking the vehicle or
opening a door) and go out after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.




152
                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                            Automatic transmission*


Gear selector lever positions                     Effect                                   Effect
The current gear selector lever position          Rather, the driver should always     ë Neutral
appears in the multifunction display.             set the parking brake in addition
                                                                                           No power is transmitted from the
                                                  to placing the gear selector lever
                                                                                           engine to the drive axle. When
                                                  in park position P to secure the
                                                                                           the brakes are released, the
                                                  vehicle.
                                                                                           vehicle can be moved freely
                                                  The SmartKey can only be                 (pushed or towed).
                                                  removed from the starter switch          To avoid damage to the trans-
                                                  with the gear selector lever in
                                                                                           mission, never engage neutral
                                                  park position P. With the
                                                                                           position N while driving.
                                                  SmartKey removed, the gear
                                                  selector lever is locked in park         If the ESP® is deactivated or
                                                  position P.                              malfunctioning:
1 Current gear selector lever position                                                     Move gear selector lever to neu-
                                                  If the vehicle’s electrical system
                                                                                           tral position N only if the vehicle
                                                  is malfunctioning, the gear
         Effect                                                                            is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
                                                  selector lever could remain
ì Park position                                                                            icy roads.
                                                  locked in park position P
         Gear selector lever position             ( page 363).                         ê Drive
         when the vehicle is parked. Place   í Reverse gear                                The transmission shifts
         gear selector lever in park                                                       automatically. All forward gears
                                                  Place gear selector lever in             are available.
         position P only when vehicle is
                                                  position R only when vehicle is
         stopped. The park position is not
                                                  stopped.
         intended to serve as a brake
         when the vehicle is parked.


                                                                                                                         153
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*


! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
reason with gear selector lever in neutral         Warning!                               G        Warning!                              G
position N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz           Position P alone is not intended to or capa-    When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
Limited Warranty.                                  ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,     SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                   possibly hitting people or objects. Always      with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
                                                   set the parking brake in addition to shifting   children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                   to park position P ( page 54).                  access to an unlocked vehicle. Children
                                                   When parked on an incline, turn the front       could move the gear selector lever from
                                                   wheels towards the road curb.                   park position P, which could result in an
                                                                                                   accident and/or serious personal injury.
                                                   Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
                                                   bustible materials such as grass, hay or        Getting out of your vehicle without taking
                                                   leaves can come into contact with the hot       the above measurements to secure it is
                                                   exhaust system, as these materials could be     dangerous.
                                                   ignited and cause a vehicle fire.




154
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Automatic transmission*


Driving tips                                 Stopping                                         Working on the vehicle
                                             When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
Accelerator position                            Leave the transmission in gear.                Warning!                             G
Your driving style influences the               Hold the vehicle with the brake.               When working on the vehicle, set the
transmission’s shifting behavior:
                                             When you stop for a longer period of time         parking brake and move gear selector lever
Less throttle     Earlier upshifting         with the engine idling and/or on a hill:          to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle
More throttle     Later upshifting                                                             could roll away.
                                                Set the parking brake.
Kickdown                                        Move the gear selector lever to park
                                                position P.
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.                                Maneuvering
   Press the accelerator past the point of   When you maneuver in tight areas,
   resistance.                               e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
   Depending on the engine speed the            Control the vehicle speed by gradually
   transmission shifts into a lower gear.       releasing the brakes.
   Ease on the accelerator when you have        Accelerate gently.
   reached the desired speed.
                                                Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
   The transmission shifts up again.




                                                                                                                                     155
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*


Gear ranges                                           Effect                                    Effect
With the gear selector lever in drive           ï The transmission shifts through         ç The transmission shifts through
position D, you can select a gear range for           sixth gear only (applies to               second gear only.
the automatic transmission to operate                 vehicles with 7-speed automatic
                                                                                                Allows the use of engine’s
within.                                               transmission only).
                                                                                                braking power when driving
You can limit the gear range by pressing        î The transmission shifts through                  on steep downgrades
the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and         fifth gear only (applies to
reverse the gear range limit by pressing              vehicles with 7-speed automatic              in mountainous regions
the gear selector lever to the right (D+)             transmission only).                          under extreme operating
( page 158).                                    é The transmission shifts through                  conditions
The selected gear range appears in the                fourth gear only.                   æ The transmission operates in
multifunction display.                          è The transmission shifts through               first gear only.
                                                      third gear only.
                                                                                                For maximum use of engine’s
                                                      With this selection you can use           braking effect on very steep or
                                                      the braking effect of the engine.         lengthy downgrades.




1 Current gear range



156
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                      Automatic transmission*


Automatic shift program                   The selected program mode appears in the              Press program mode selector switch
                                          multifunction display.                                repeatedly until the letter of the
The program mode selector switch is                                                             desired program mode appears in the
located on the lower part of the center                                                         multifunction display.
console.
                                                                                                Select C for comfort driving:
                                                                                                   The vehicle starts out in second
                                                                                                   gear (both forward and reverse) for
                                                                                                   gentler starts. This does not apply if
                                                                                                   full throttle is applied or gear
                                                                                                   range 1 is selected.
                                                                                                   Traction and driving stability are
                                          1 Selected program mode (comfort or                      improved on icy roads.
                                            sport)
                                                                                                   Upshifts occur earlier even when
Program mode selector switch              ! Never change the program mode when the                 you give more gas. The engine then
                                          gear selector lever is out of park position P. This      operates at lower rpms and the
C Comfort        For comfort driving      could result in a change of driving characteristics      wheels are less likely to spin.
S Sport          For standard driving     for which you may not be prepared.
                                                                                                Select S for standard driving:
                                          i The last selected program mode (C or S) is
                                          switched on when the engine is restarted.                The vehicle starts out in first gear.
                                                                                                   Upshifts occur later.




                                                                                                                                   157
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission*


One-touch gearshifting                              Limiting gear range                                    Extending gear range
                                                                                                               Briefly press the gear selector lever to
With the gear selector lever in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
                                                     Warning!                                   G              the right in the D+ direction.
range.                                                                                                         The transmission will shift to the next
                                                     On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
                                                                                                               higher gear as permitted by the shift
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.        in order to obtain braking action. This could
                                                                                                               program. This action simultaneously
Do not place full load on the engine until the       result in drive wheel slip and reduced
operating temperature has been reached.                                                                        extends the gear range of the transmis-
                                                     vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
                                                                                                               sion.
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only    prevent this type of loss of control.
when the vehicle is stopped.                                                                               i If you press on the accelerator when the en-
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel when driving off                                                           gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
                                                        Briefly press the gear selector lever to
on slippery road surfaces. This may cause seri-                                                            will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
                                                        the left in the D- direction.
ous damage to the drivetrain which is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.             The transmission will shift to the next
                                                        lower gear as permitted by the shift
                                                        program. This action simultaneously
                                                        limits the gear range of the transmis-
                                                        sion ( page 156).
                                                    i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
                                                    shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
                                                    gear if the engine’s max. speed would be
                                                    exceeded.




158
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                     Automatic transmission*


Canceling gear range limit                    Shifting into optimal gear range              Emergency operation
                                                                                            (Limp-Home Mode)
   Press and hold the gear selector lever        Press and hold the gear selector lever
   in the D+ direction until D reappears in      in the D- direction.
                                                                                            If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
   the multifunction display ( page 153).
                                                 The transmission will automatically        sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
   The transmission will shift from the          select the gear range suited for optimal   no longer shifts, the transmission is most
   current gear range directly to gear           acceleration and deceleration. This will   likely operating in limp-home (emergency
   range D.                                      involve shifting down one or more          operation) mode. In this mode only second
                                                 gears.                                     gear and reverse gear can be selected.
                                                                                               Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
                                                                                               Move the gear selector lever to park
                                                                                               position P.
                                                                                               Turn off the engine.
                                                                                               Wait at least 10 seconds before
                                                                                               restarting.
                                                                                               Restart the engine.
                                                                                               Move the gear selector lever to
                                                                                               position D (for second gear) or
                                                                                               position R.
                                                                                               Have the transmission checked at an
                                                                                               authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
                                                                                               soon as possible.



                                                                                                                                 159
Controls in detail
Good visibility


For information on the windshield wipers,       i The headlamps will automatically be           Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” ( page 51).             cleaned when you have
                                                    switched on the headlamps                   For more information on setting the rear
Headlamp cleaning system*                                                                       view mirrors, see “Mirrors” ( page 41).
                                                    and
The button is located on the left side of the       operated the windshield wipers with wind-   Interior rear view mirror,
dashboard.                                          shield washer fluid fifteen times           antiglare position
                                                When you switch off the ignition, the counter
                                                resets.
                                                For information on filling up the washer
                                                reservoir, see “Windshield washer system
                                                and headlamp cleaning system*”
                                                ( page 280).




1 Headlamp washer button                                                                        1 Lever
   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                                                              Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
                                                                                                   by moving lever 1 towards the wind-
   Press button 1.
                                                                                                   shield.
   The headlamps are cleaned with a
                                                                                                   The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
   high-pressure water jet.




160
                                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                  Good visibility


Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*
The reflection brightness of the exterior
                                                   react, for example, if the rear window
                                                   sunshade* is in raised position.
                                                                                                        Warning!                                G
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and          Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles        Exercise care when using the passen-
the interior rear view mirror will respond         (incident light) could blind you. As a result,       ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
automatically to glare when                        you may not be able to observe traffic con-          surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
   the ignition is switched on                     ditions and could cause an accident.                 for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
                                                                                                        are closer than they appear. Check your
   and
                                                                                                        interior rear view mirror or glance over your
   incoming light from headlamps falls on          Warning!                                 G           shoulder before changing lanes.
   the sensor in the interior rear view
   mirror.                                         In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
                                                                                                       Sun visors
                                                   may escape from the mirror housing if the
The rear view mirror will not react if
                                                   mirror glass breaks.                                The sun visors protect you from sun glare
   reverse gear R is engaged
                                                   Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not        while driving.
   the interior lighting is turned on              allow the liquid to come into contact with
                                                   eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
                                                                                                        Warning!                                G
 Warning!                                G         In case it does, immediately flush affected
                                                   area with water, and seek medical help if            Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
 The auto-dimming function does not react if       necessary.
                                                                                                        Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
 incoming light is not aimed directly at
                                                                                                        closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
 sensors in the interior rear view mirror.        ! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with          glare can endanger you and others.
 The interior rear view mirror and the exterior   the vehicle paint finish can be completely re-
                                                  moved only while in the liquid state and by apply-
 rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
                                                  ing plenty of water.



                                                                                                                                                 161
Controls in detail
Good visibility


                                                   Rear window sunshade*
                                                                                                    Warning!                              G
                                                    Warning!                               G        When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                                    SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                    When operating the rear window sunshade,        with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
                                                    make sure there is no danger of anyone be-      children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                    ing harmed by the raising or lowering proce-    access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                    dure.                                           unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                                                                    result in an accident and/or serious
                                                    The raising or lowering procedure can be
1 Mounting                                                                                          personal injury.
                                                    immediately halted by briefly pressing the
2 Vanity mirror cover                               switch.
3 Vanity mirror lamp                                                                               The switch is located in the center console.
                                                    Briefly press switch again to raise or lower
4 Sun visor
                                                    the rear window sunshade completely.
    Swing sun visor 4 down when you
    experience glare.
    To use illuminated vanity mirror, lift up
    vanity mirror cover 2.
i If sun visor 4 is disengaged from
mounting 1 with vanity mirror cover 2 open,
vanity mirror lamp 3 will switch off.

i If sunlight enters through a side window,                                                        1 Rear window sunshade switch
close vanity mirror cover 2 (if open), disengage
sun visor 4 from mounting 1 and pivot to the
side.

162
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Good visibility


! Make sure that the movement of the rear         Rear window defroster                         Activating
window sunshade is not restricted by objects on
                                                                                                    Press button F or 1 in the
the rear window shelf. Otherwise, the sunshade    The rear window defroster uses a large
or the objects could be damaged.                                                                    climate control panel ( page 165) or
                                                  amount of power. To keep the battery
                                                                                                    automatic climate control panel*
   Switch on the ignition ( page 32).             drain to a minimum, switch off the
                                                                                                    ( page 175).
                                                  defroster as soon as the rear window is
Always raise or lower the sunshade fully          clear.                                            The indicator lamp on the button
for its support against the window frame.                                                           comes on.
                                                  The defroster is automatically deactivated
Raising or lowering the sunshade                  after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of op-
                                                                                                Deactivating
                                                  eration depending on the outside tempera-
   Press switch 1 briefly.                        ture.                                             Press button F or 1 again.
   The sunshade is raised or lowered com-                                                           The indicator lamp on the button goes
   pletely.                                        Warning!                             G           out.

Stopping the raising or lowering                   Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
                                                                                                ! If the rear window defroster switches off too
procedure                                                                                       soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this
                                                   removed from the rear window before          means that too many electrical consumers are
   Press switch 1 again.                           driving. Visibility could otherwise be       operating simultaneously and there is insuffi-
                                                   impaired, endangering you and others.        cient voltage in the battery. The system re-
   The sunshade stops.                                                                          sponds automatically by deactivating the rear
                                                                                                window defroster.
                                                     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
                                                                                                As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
                                                                                                rear window defroster automatically turns itself
                                                                                                back on.




                                                                                                                                           163
Controls in detail
Climate control




USA standard equipped with climate control, depending on vehicle production date. Canada standard equipped with climate control.



164
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                       Climate control


      Item                                                                                           Item
 1 Left side defroster vent, fixed                                                               1 Air volume control
 2 Left side air vent, adjustable                                                                2 Left side temperature control
 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             3 Right side temperature control
   for left side air vent                                                                        4 Air distribution control
 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             5 Rear window defroster
   for left center air vent
                                                                                                 6 AC cooling on/off
 5 Left center air vent, adjustable
                                                     USA only (depending on vehicle production
                                                                                                 7 Air distribution and air volume
 6 Right center air vent, adjustable                                                               (automatic mode)
                                                     date)
 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             8 Air recirculation
   for right center air vent
                                                                                                 9 Front defroster
 8 Thumbwheel for air volume control
   for right side air vent
 9 Right side air vent, adjustable
 a Right side defroster vent, fixed
 b Climate control panel

i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders       Canada only
for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.




                                                                                                                                     165
Controls in detail
Climate control


The climate control is operational when-          Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and       i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
ever the engine is running. You can oper-         odors are filtered out before outside air en-   may require replacement of the filter before its
ate the climate control system in either the      ters the passenger compartment through          scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
automatic or manual mode. The system              the air distribution system.                    the air volume to the interior.
cools or heats the interior depending on          The air conditioning will not engage (no
                                                                                                  If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
the selected interior temperature and the                                                         before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
                                                  cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated         ture” ( page 223). The climate control will then
current outside temperature.                      ( page 172).                                    adjust the interior temperature to the set value
                                                                                                  much faster.
 Warning!                                G         Warning!                              G        Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
                                                                                                  shield free of snow and debris.
 When operating the climate control, the air
                                                   Follow the recommended settings for heat-      Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
 that enters the passenger compartment                                                            air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
                                                   ing and cooling given on the following pag-
 through the air vents can be very hot or very                                                    window.
                                                   es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
 cold (depending on the set temperature).
                                                   impairing visibility and endangering you and
 This may cause burns or frostbite on unpro-
                                                   others.
 tected skin in the immediate area of the air
 vents. Always keep sufficient distance be-
 tween unprotected parts of the body and the
 air vents. If necessary, use the air distribu-
 tion control ( page 168) to direct the air to
 air vents in the vehicle interior that are not
 in the immediate area of unprotected skin.




166
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Climate control


Deactivating the climate control                 Operating the climate control system                    Use temperature controls 2 and 3
system                                           in automatic mode                                       ( page 165) to separately adjust the
                                                                                                         air temperature on each side of the
                                                 i When operating the climate control system             passenger compartment.
 Warning!                               G        in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to
                                                                                                         The temperature of the vehicle interior
                                                 adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
                                                 bution.                                                 is adjusted automatically.
 When the climate control is switched off, the
 outside air supply and circulation are also     In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
                                                 switched on when the system is cooling. If nec-      Deactivating
 switched off. Only choose this setting for a
 short time. Otherwise the windows could         essary, this function can be switched off by            Press button U ( page 165) again.
 fog up, impairing visibility and endangering    pushing the 2 button.
                                                                                                         The indicator lamp on the button goes
 you and others.
                                                 Activating                                              out. The automatic operation of air vol-
                                                                                                         ume and air distribution switches off.
Deactivating                                         Press button U ( page 165) while
                                                     the engine is running.
   Set air volume control 1 ( page 165)
   to position 0.                                    The indicator lamp on the button
                                                     comes on. The air volume and air distri-
Reactivating                                         bution are adjusted automatically.
   Make sure the ignition is switched on.
   Set air volume control 1 ( page 165)
   to any speed.
   The previous settings are once again in
   effect.



                                                                                                                                           167
Controls in detail
Climate control


Setting the temperature                              Decreasing                                          Adjusting air distribution and volume
                                                         Turn temperature control 2
Use temperature controls 2 and 3                                                                         Use air distribution control 4
                                                         and/or 3 ( page 165) slightly coun-
( page 165) to separately adjust the air                                                                 ( page 165) to adjust the air distribution.
                                                         terclockwise.
temperature on each side of the passenger                                                                The following symbols are located on the
compartment. You should raise or lower                   The climate control system will corre-          controls:
the temperature setting in small incre-                  spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).               perature.                                       Symbol     Function
The climate control will adjust to the set                                                               a          Directs air through the center,
temperature as fast as possible.
                                                     i If you turn the temperature control fully
                                                     counterclockwise for one side of the vehicle, you              side and rear passenger
                                                     are decreasing the temperature for the other                   compartment air vents
Increasing                                           side of the vehicle as well.
                                                                                                         Z          Directs air to the windshield
    Turn temperature control 2                                                                                      and the side defroster vents
    and/or 3 ( page 165) slightly clock-
    wise.
                                                                                                         b          Directs air into the entire
                                                                                                                    vehicle interior
    The climate control system will corre-
                                                                                                         Y          Directs air to the footwells
    spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
    perature.
i If you turn the temperature control fully
clockwise for one side of the vehicle, you are in-
creasing the temperature for the other side of
the vehicle as well.




168
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                                Climate control


   Press button U ( page 165).              Adjusting air volume                       Front defroster
   The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                            Six blower speeds are available.           You can use this setting to defrost the
   out. The automatic air distribution is
                                                                                       windshield, for example if it is iced up.
   switched off. The air distribution is       Press button U ( page 165).
                                                                                       You can also defog the windshield and the
   controlled according to the selected        The indicator lamp in the button goes   side windows.
   control setting.                            out. The automatic air volume control
   Turn air distribution control 4             is switched off. The air volume is      i Keep this setting selected only until the
                                                                                       windshield or the side windows are clear again.
   ( page 165) to the desired symbol.          adjusted according to the currently
                                               selected setting.
                                                                                       Activating
Opening center and side air vents              Use the air volume control 1
                                               ( page 165) to adjust the air volume.      Press button P or 0
   Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8
                                                                                          ( page 165).
   ( page 164) upward.
                                                                                          The indicator lamp on the button
   The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
                                                                                          comes on.
   air vents 2 and 9 are open.
                                                                                       The air conditioning switches
Closing center and side air vents                                                      automatically to the following functions:
   Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8                                                             maximum blowing and heating
   ( page 164) downward.                                                                      power
   The center air vents 5 and 6 and side                                                      air flows onto the windshield and
   air vents 2 and 9 are closed.                                                              the front side windows
                                                                                              the air recirculation mode is
                                                                                              switched off



                                                                                                                                169
Controls in detail
Climate control


i If you have switched on the defrost function   Air recirculation mode                         Activating
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
                                                                                                    Press button , ( page 165).
make any other settings.                         Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
                                                 unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle         The indicator lamp on the button
Deactivating                                     from the outside (e.g. before driving              comes on.
                                                 through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
    Press button P or 0
                                                 intake of outside air and recirculates the
                                                                                                i The air recirculation mode is activated auto-
    ( page 165) again.                                                                          matically at high outside temperatures.
                                                 air in the passenger compartment.
    The indicator lamp on the button goes                                                       The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when
                                                                                                the air recirculation mode is automatically
    out. Defrosting is turned off.
                                                  Warning!                             G        switched on.
i The cooling remains switched on.                                                              A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-
                                                  Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-   mately 30 minutes.
Windshield fogged on the outside                  ing you and others. If the windows begin to
                                                  fog on the inside, switching off the air
i Keep this setting selected only until the       recirculation mode immediately should clear
windshield is clear again.
                                                  interior window fogging. If interior window
    Switch the windshield wipers on               fogging persists, make sure the air
    ( page 51).                                   conditioning ( page 172) is activated, or
If the automatic mode of the climate con-         press button P or 0.
trol is switched off:
    Turn air distribution control 4
    to a or Y ( page 165).




170
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                          Climate control


Deactivating                                                                                        Convenience closing
                                                     When using the air recirculation mode with
   Press button , ( page 165).                       convenience closing feature, should the up-       Press button , ( page 165) for
                                                     ward movement of a window be blocked by           approximately 2 seconds.
   The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                                     some obstructions including but not limited
   out.                                                                                                The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
                                                     to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic
                                                                                                       will close. You can release button ,
i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au-      reversal feature will not operate.
                                                                                                       once the closing procedure has begun.
tomatically:
                                                     In the event that the closing procedure           The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
   after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is     causes potential danger, the closing of the       continue closing until they are fully
   below approximately 41°F (5°C)
                                                     side windows can be immediately halted by         closed. The indicator lamp on the but-
   after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is        pressing or pulling the respective window         ton comes on. The air recirculation
   turned off                                        switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding           mode is activated.
   after 30 minutes if the outside temperature       sunroof* can be immediately halted by
   is above approximately 41°F (5°C)                 moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in     Convenience opening
                                                     the overhead control panel in any direction.
Air recirculation mode with conve-                                                                     Press button , for approximately
                                                     The closing of the side windows and               2 seconds.
nience closing or opening feature
                                                     tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
                                                                                                       The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
                                                     again pressing and holding the , button.
 Warning!                                   G                                                          will return to their previous position.
                                                                                                       You can release button , once the
 Never operate the side windows and the                                                                opening procedure has begun. The win-
 tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility                                                     dows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
 of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-                                                            opening until they have reached their
 cedure.                                                                                               previous position. The indicator lamp
                                                                                                       on the button goes out. The air recircu-
                                                                                                       lation mode is deactivated.


                                                                                                                                         171
Controls in detail
Climate control


i A side window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will                                                      Activating
only return to its previous position if it has not    Warning!                            G        Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
been moved to another position using the re-
spective side window switch or tilt/sliding sun-      If you turn off the cooling function, the    dehumidify the air with the air condition-
roof* switch after it was closed with                 vehicle will not be cooled when weather      ing.
button ,. A side window or tilt/sliding sun-          conditions are warm. The windows can fog         Press button 2 ( page 165).
roof* that was moved will remain in its current       up more quickly. Window fogging may
position if button , is used to re-open the re-                                                        The indicator lamp on the button
                                                      impair visibility and endanger you and
maining side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof*.                                                         comes on.
                                                      others.
                                                                                                   The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
Air conditioning
                                                                                                   R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
                                                     Deactivating
The cooling function, only operational                                                             which are harmful to the ozone layer.
                                                     It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
when the engine is running, cools the vehi-                                                        ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on
                                                     tioning (cooling) function of the climate
cle interior down to the selected tempera-                                                         again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
                                                     control system. The air in the vehicle will
ture. The cooling function also                                                                    losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-
                                                     then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.     self off.
dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
thus preventing the windows from fogging                Press button 2 ( page 165).                Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
up.                                                                                                authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                        The indicator lamp on the button goes
i Condensation may drip out from underneath             out.
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication       The cooling function switches off after
of a malfunction.
                                                        a short delay.




172
                                                                                                               Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Climate control


Rear passenger compartment                                                                 Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents
                                                                                              Push the slide for the left center
                                                                                              vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
                                                                                              left, right, up, or down.
compartment is controlled via the climate
control panel ( page 165).                                                                    The air flow is directed in the corre-
                                                                                              sponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 1
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment is                                                i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
the same as at the dashboard center air vents.                                             for the center air vents 1 and 3 upward.
The air vents for the rear passenger             1 Left center air vent
compartment are located in the rear                                                        Adjusting air volume
                                                 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center console.                                    center air vents                           Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
                                                 3 Right center air vent                      The air volume is increased or
                                                                                              decreased.




                                                                                                                                    173
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control




USA standard equipped with automatic climate control, depending on vehicle production date.
Automatic climate control* optional for Canada.


174
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Automatic climate control


      Item                                                                                           Item
 1 Left side defroster vent, fixed                                                               1 Left side air distribution control
 2 Left side air vent, adjustable                                                                2 Front defroster
 3 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             3 Temperature control, left, raising
   for left side air vent                                                                        4 Display
 4 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             5 Air volume control, raising
   for left center air vent
                                                                                                 6 Temperature control, right, raising
 5 Left center air vent, adjustable
                                                     USA only (depending on vehicle production
                                                                                                 7 Rear window defroster
 6 Right center air vent, adjustable
                                                     date)                                       8 Right side air distribution control
 7 Thumbwheel for air volume control
   for right center air vent                                                                     9 Charcoal filter

 8 Thumbwheel for air volume control                                                             a AC cooling on/off
   for right side air vent                                                                           Residual heat/ventilation
 9 Right side air vent, adjustable                                                               b Temperature control, right, lowering
 a Right side defroster vent, fixed                                                              c Air volume control, lowering
 b Automatic climate control panel                                                               d Temperature control, left, lowering
                                                                                                 e Air recirculation
i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders       Canada only                                 f Automatic climate control on/off
for the center air vents and side air vents to the
middle position.
                                                                                                   (complete system)
                                                                                                 g Air distribution and air volume
                                                                                                   (automatic mode)

                                                                                                                                        175
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


The automatic climate control is operation-       Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and       i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
al whenever the engine is running. You can        odors are filtered out before outside air       may require replacement of the filter before its
operate the automatic climate control sys-        enters the passenger compartment                scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
tem in either the automatic or manual             through the air distribution system.            the air volume to the interior.
mode. The system cools or heats the inte-         The air conditioning will not engage (no
                                                                                                  If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
rior depending on the selected interior                                                           before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
                                                  cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated         ture” ( page 223). The automatic climate con-
temperature and the current outside tem-          ( page 184).                                    trol will then adjust the interior temperature to
perature.
                                                                                                  the set value much faster.

 Warning!                                G         Warning!                              G        Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
                                                                                                  shield free of snow and debris.
                                                   Follow the recommended settings for            Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
 When operating the automatic climate                                                             air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
                                                   heating and cooling given on the following
 control, the air that enters the passenger                                                       window.
                                                   pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
 compartment through the air vents can be
                                                   impairing visibility and endangering you and
 very hot or very cold (depending on the set
                                                   others.
 temperature). This may cause burns or frost-
 bite on unprotected skin in the immediate
 area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
 distance between unprotected parts of the
 body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
 air distribution control ( page 178) to
 direct the air to air vents in the vehicle
 interior that are not in the immediate area of
 unprotected skin.




176
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                              Automatic climate control


Deactivating the automatic climate               Operating the automatic climate con-
control system                                   trol system in automatic mode

                                                 i When operating the automatic climate con-
 Warning!                               G        trol system in automatic mode, you will only rare-
                                                 ly need to adjust the temperature, air volume
 When the automatic climate control is           and air distribution.
                                                                                                      1 Temperature, left
 switched off, the outside air supply and cir-   In automatic mode, the dehumidify function is
                                                 switched on when the system is cooling. If nec-      2 Blower speed
 culation are also switched off. Only choose
                                                 essary, this function can be switched off by         3 Temperature, right
 this setting for a short time. Otherwise the
 windows could fog up, impairing visibility      pushing the button 2 or 9 ( page 175).                  Use temperature controls 3 and
 and endangering you and others.                 i You can switch the automatic climate con-             d or 6 and b ( page 175) to sepa-
                                                 trol system on and off for each side of the pas-        rately adjust the air temperature on
Deactivating                                     senger compartment as desired.                          each side of the passenger compart-
                                                                                                         ment.
   Press button ´ ( page 175).                   Activating                                              The temperature of the vehicle interior
   The indicator lamp on the button                  Press button U ( page 175) while                    is adjusted automatically.
   comes on.                                         the engine is running.
                                                                                                      Deactivating
Reactivating                                         The indicator lamp on the button
                                                     comes on. The air volume and air distri-            Press button U ( page 175) again.
   Press button ´ ( page 175).                       bution are adjusted automatically.                  The indicator lamp on the button goes
   The indicator lamp on the button goes                                                                 out. The automatic operation of air vol-
   out. The previous settings are once                                                                   ume and air distribution switches off.
   again in effect.



                                                                                                                                           177
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Setting the temperature                             Decreasing                                           Adjusting air distribution
                                                        Press temperature button b
Use temperature controls 3 and d for                                                                     Use air distribution controls 1 and 8
                                                        and/or d ( page 175) until the de-
the left side or 6 and b for the right side                                                              ( page 175) to separately adjust the air
                                                        sired temperature appears in the
( page 175) to separately adjust the air                                                                 distribution on each side of the passenger
                                                        display 4 ( page 175).
temperature on each side of the passenger                                                                compartment. The following symbols are
compartment. You should raise or lower                  The automatic climate control system             found on the controls:
the temperature setting in small incre-                 will correspondingly adjust the interior
ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).              air temperature.                                 Symbol     Function
The automatic climate control will adjust                                                                a          Directs air through the center,
to the set temperature as fast as possible.
                                                    i If you decrease the temperature for one side
                                                    of the vehicle to the lowest adjustable value then              side and rear passenger
                                                    you will see the message LO in the display. This                compartment air vents
Increasing                                          also decreases the temperature for the other
                                                    side of the vehicle.
                                                                                                         Z          Directs air to the windshield
    Press temperature button 3                                                                                      and the side defroster vents
    and/or 6 ( page 175) until the de-
    sired temperature appears in the
                                                                                                         b          Directs air into the entire
                                                                                                                    vehicle interior
    display 4 ( page 175).
                                                                                                         Y          Directs air to the footwells
    The automatic climate control system
    will correspondingly adjust the interior
    air temperature.                                                                                        Turn air distribution control 1 or 8
                                                                                                            ( page 175) to the desired symbol.
i If you increase the temperature for one side                                                              The indicator lamp on the button U
of the vehicle to the highest adjustable value
then you will see the message HI in the display.                                                            ( page 175) goes out.
This also increases the temperature for the other
side of the vehicle.


178
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                        Automatic climate control


    The automatic air distribution is              Adjusting air volume                        Front defroster
    switched off. The air distribution is
    controlled according to the selected           Use button U ( page 175) for auto-          You can use this setting to defrost the
    control setting.                               matic mode or air volume controls ˜         windshield, for example if it is iced up.
                                                   or Q ( page 175) to adjust air volume       You can also defog the windshield and the
i You can also turn the air distribution control   manually.                                   side windows.
to a position between two symbols.
                                                   Seven blower speeds are available.          i Keep this setting selected only until the
Opening center and side air vents                                                              windshield or the side windows are clear again.
                                                      Press button ˜ to decrease
    Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8                    or Q ( page 175) to increase air
                                                      volume to the desired level.             Activating
    ( page 174) upward.
                                                      The indicator lamp on the button U          Press button P or 0
    The center air vents 5 and 6 and side
                                                      goes out.                                   ( page 175).
    air vents 2 and 9 ( page 175) are
    open.                                             The automatic air distribution remains      The indicator lamp on the button
                                                      switched on.                                comes on.
Closing center and side air vents                                                              The air conditioning switches
    Turn thumbwheels 3, 4, 7 and 8                                                             automatically to the following functions:
    ( page 174) downward.                                                                             cooling on to dehumidify
    The center air vents 5 and 6 and side                                                             maximum blowing and heating
    air vents 2 and 9 ( page 174) are                                                                 power
    closed.
                                                                                                      air flows onto the windshield and
                                                                                                      the front side windows
                                                                                                      the air recirculation mode is
                                                                                                      switched off

                                                                                                                                        179
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


i If you have switched on the defrost function   Windshield fogged on the outside              Maximum cooling MAXCOOL
using the P or 0 button, you cannot
make any other settings.                         i Keep this setting selected only until the   If the left and right air distribution controls
                                                 windshield is clear again.
                                                                                               as well as the airflow volume control are
Deactivating                                         Switch the windshield wipers on           set to U ( page 175) and there is a
                                                     ( page 51).                               high need for cooling, the display
   Press button P or 0
                                                 If the automatic mode of the automatic cli-   “MAXCOOL” appears.
   ( page 175) again.
                                                 mate control is switched off:                 This provides the fastest possible cooling
   The indicator lamp on the button goes
                                                     Turn air distribution control 1 or 8      of the vehicle interior (when side windows
   out.
                                                     to a or Y ( page 175).                    and tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).
   The previous settings are once again in
   effect.
i The cooling remains switched on.




180
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                             Automatic climate control


Air recirculation mode                         Activating                                          Deactivating
                                                   Press button , ( page 175).                         Press button , ( page 175) again.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle         The indicator lamp on the button                    The indicator lamp on the button goes
from the outside (e.g. before driving              comes on.                                           out.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
                                               i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated au-
                                               matically at high outside temperatures.             tomatically:
air in the passenger compartment.
                                               The indicator lamp on the button , is not lit           after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
                                               when the air recirculation mode is automatically        below approximately 41°F (5°C)
 Warning!                             G        switched on.                                            after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is
                                               A quantity of outside air is added after approxi-       turned off
 Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-   mately 30 minutes.                                      after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
 ing you and others. If the windows begin to                                                           is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
 fog on the inside, switching off the air
 recirculation mode immediately should clear
 interior window fogging. If interior window
 fogging persists, make sure the air
 conditioning ( page 175) is activated, or
 press button P or 0.




                                                                                                                                               181
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Air recirculation mode with conve-                                                               Convenience opening
                                                      The closing of the side windows and
nience closing or opening feature
                                                      tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by       Press button , for approximately
                                                      again pressing and holding the , button.       2 seconds.
 Warning!                                   G                                                        The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
                                                     Convenience closing                             will return to their previous position.
 Never operate the side windows and the
                                                        Press button , ( page 165) for               You can release button , once the
 tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
                                                        approximately 2 seconds.                     opening procedure has begun. The win-
 of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
                                                                                                     dows and tilt/sliding sunroof continue
 cedure.                                                The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
                                                                                                     opening until they have reached their
 When using the air recirculation mode with             will close. You can release button ,
                                                                                                     previous position. The indicator lamp
 convenience closing feature, should the up-            once the closing procedure has begun.
                                                                                                     on the button goes out. The air recircu-
 ward movement of a window be blocked by                The windows and tilt/sliding sunroof*
                                                                                                     lation mode is deactivated.
 some obstructions including but not limited            continue closing until they are fully
 to arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic           closed. The indicator lamp on the but-   i A side window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will
                                                        ton comes on. The air recirculation      only return to its previous position if it has not
 reversal feature will not operate.
                                                        mode is activated.                       been moved to another position using the re-
 In the event that the closing procedure                                                         spective side window switch or tilt/sliding sun-
 causes potential danger, the closing of the                                                     roof* switch after it was closed with
 side windows can be immediately halted by                                                       button ,. A side window or tilt/sliding sun-
                                                                                                 roof* that was moved will remain in its current
 pressing or pulling the respective window
                                                                                                 position if button , is used to re-open the re-
 switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding                                                         maining side windows or tilt/sliding sunroof*.
 sunroof* can be immediately halted by
 moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in
 the overhead control panel in any direction.




182
                                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                             Automatic climate control


Charcoal filter                                    Activating
                                                       Press button e ( page 175).
                                                                                                     Warning!                                   G
An activated charcoal filter markedly
reduces bad odors and removes pollutants               The indicator lamp on the button              Never operate the side windows and the
from air entering the passenger compart-               comes on.                                     tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
ment. The charcoal filter can be activated                                                           of anyone being harmed by the closing pro-
or deactivated.
                                                   i If you press and hold button e, the side        cedure.
                                                   windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* will close.
The system switches automatically to the                                                             When using the charcoal filter with conve-
air recirculation mode, if the                     i The activated charcoal filter should be         nience closing feature, should the upward
                                                   switched off when windows fog up on the inside,
                                                                                                     movement of a window be blocked by some
    charcoal filter is switched on                 or if the passenger compartment needs to be
                                                   quickly heated or cooled down.                    obstructions including but not limited to
    carbon monoxide (CO) or nitrogen                                                                 arms, hands, fingers. etc., the automatic re-
    oxide (NOX) concentration of the out-                                                            versal feature will not operate.
    side air increases beyond a predeter-                                                            In the event that the closing procedure
    mined level                                                                                      causes potential danger, the closing of the
i The automatic air recirculation mode does                                                          side windows can be immediately halted by
not function if the A/C mode is deactivated (in-                                                     pressing or pulling the respective window
dicator lamp on button 2 or 9 not lit), or                                                           switch. The closing of the tilt/sliding
if the outside temperature has fallen below 41°F                                                     sunroof* can be immediately halted by
(5°C).                                                                                               moving the tilt/sliding sunroof* switch in
                                                                                                     the overhead control panel in any direction.
                                                                                                     The closing of the side windows and
                                                                                                     tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
                                                                                                     again pressing and holding the button e.



                                                                                                                                                 183
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Deactivating                                          Air conditioning                                    Deactivating
    Press button e ( page 175).                                                                           It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
                                                      The cooling function, only operational
                                                                                                          tioning (cooling) function of the automatic
    The indicator lamp on the button goes             when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
                                                                                                          climate control system. The air in the
    out.                                              cle interior down to the selected tempera-
                                                                                                          vehicle will then no longer be cooled or
                                                      ture. The cooling function also
i Press and hold button e for approx.                 dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
                                                                                                          dehumidified.
2 seconds. The side windows and or tilt/sliding
sunroof* will return to their previous position.      thus preventing the windows from fogging               Press button 2 or 9
You can release button e once the opening             up.                                                    ( page 175).
procedure has begun. The windows and tilt/slid-                                                              The indicator lamp on the button goes
ing sunroof* continue opening until they have         i Condensation may drip out from underneath
reached their previous position.                      the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication      out.
                                                      of a malfunction.
A window or tilt/sliding sunroof* will only return                                                           The cooling function switches off after
to its previous position if it has not been moved                                                            a short delay.
to another position using the respective window        Warning!                                 G
switch or tilt/sliding sunroof* switch after it was
closed with button e. A window or tilt/slid-           If you turn off the cooling function, the
ing sunroof* that was moved will remain in its         vehicle will not be cooled when weather
current position if button e is used to
                                                       conditions are warm. The windows can fog
re-open the remaining windows or tilt/sliding
sunroof*.                                              up more quickly. Window fogging may
                                                       impair visibility and endanger you and
                                                       others.




184
                                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                                 Automatic climate control


Activating                                           Residual heat and ventilation                       Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can            (Canada only)
                                                                                                            Switch off the ignition ( page 32).
dehumidify the air with the air condi-
                                                     With the engine switched off, it is possible           Press button 9 ( page 175).
tioning.
                                                     to continue to heat or ventilate the interior          The indicator lamp on the button
    Press button 2 or 9                              for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes               comes on.
    ( page 175) again.                               use of the residual heat produced by the
    The indicator lamp on the button                 engine.                                             Deactivating
    comes on.                                        i How long the system will provide heating de-         Press button 9 ( page 175).
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant            pends on
                                                                                                            The indicator lamp on the button goes
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs                  the coolant temperature
                                                                                                            out.
which are harmful to the ozone layer.                    the temperature set by the operator
                                                                                                         The residual heat is automatically turned
! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on        The blower will run at speed setting 1 regardless
                                                     of the air distribution control setting.            off:
again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned it-                                                           when the ignition is switched on
self off.
                                                                                                            after about 30 minutes
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.                                                                            if the battery voltage drops




                                                                                                                                               185
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control


Rear passenger compartment                       The air vents for the rear passenger      Adjusting air distribution
adjustable air vents                             compartment are located in the rear
                                                                                              Push the slide for the left center
                                                 center console.
                                                                                              vent 1 or right center vent 3 to the
The air conditioning for the rear passenger
                                                                                              left, right, up, or down.
compartment is controlled via the auto-
matic climate control panel ( page 175).                                                      The air flow is directed in the
                                                                                              corresponding direction.
i The temperature at the center air vents 1
and 3 for the rear passenger compartment is                                                i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
the same as at the dashboard center air vents.                                             for the center air vents 1 and 3 upward.

                                                                                           Adjusting air volume
                                                                                              Turn thumbwheel 2 up or down.
                                                 1 Left center air vent                       The air volume is increased or
                                                 2 Thumbwheel for air volume control for      decreased.
                                                   center air vents
                                                 3 Right center air vent




186
                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                       Audio system
   Audio system
Audio and telephone, operation                    Operating safety

These instructions are intended to help
you become familiar with your                      Warning!                               G
Mercedes-Benz audio system. They con-
tain useful tips and a detailed description        Any alterations made to electronic
of the user functions.                             components can cause malfunctions.
                                                   The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite
 Warning!                                G         radio*, and telephone* are interconnected.
                                                   When one of the components is not opera-
 In order to avoid distraction which could         tional or has not been removed/replaced
 lead to an accident, the driver should enter      properly, the function of other components
 system settings with the vehicle at a             may be impaired.
 standstill and operate the system only when       This condition might seriously impair the
 road and traffic conditions permit. Always        operating safety of your vehicle.
 pay full attention to traffic conditions first
                                                   We recommend that you have any service
 before operating system controls while
                                                   work on electronic components carried out
 driving.
                                                   by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
 Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
 (approximately 50 km/h), your car is
 covering a distance of 44 feet
 (approximately 14 m) every second.




                                                                                                               187
Controls in detail
Audio system


Operating and display elements




188
                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                  Audio system


   Item                      Page       Item                       Page       Item                         Page
1 CD changer mode selector     201   9 Speed dialing memory                g Soft keys                       190
                                       (telephone) in descending           h Volume                          190
   AUX mode selector           193
                                       order
2 Single CD mode selector      204                                         j Switching on/off                190
                                     a Accepting a call              212
3 Radio mode selector                  (telephone)                         k Manual tuning/seek tuning       195
                                                                             (radio)
4 Mute function (radio)        196   b Telephone mode selector       208
   Pause (CD)                  208                                            Track search, reverse (CD)     207
                                     c Speed dialing memory          210
                                       (telephone) in ascending            l Manual tuning/seek tuning       195
5 Volume distribution          192
                                       order                                 (radio)
6 Sound settings               191
                                     d Terminating a call            213      Track search,                  207
7 Display                                                                     fast forward (CD)
                                       (telephone)
8 Alphanumeric keypad
                                     e CD slot
                                     f CD ejection                   204




                                                                                                            189
Controls in detail
Audio system


Button and soft key operation                  Operation                                           Switching off
                                                                                                        Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
In these instructions, the alphanumeric
                                               Switching the unit on/off                           or
keypad (right side of radio panel) and the
function buttons (left side of radio panel)                                                             Press M button.
                                               Switching on
are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys
below the display panel are referred to as          Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch        i Should excessively high temperatures occur
“soft keys”.                                        to position 1 or 2.                            while the audio system is being operated, the
                                                                                                   display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise,
! Do not press directly in the display face.        If the audio system was on as you              HIGH TEMP will appear in the display, after which
Otherwise, the display will be damaged.             removed the SmartKey from the starter          the audio system will be switched off for a
                                                    switch, the audio system will                  cooling-down period.
                                                    automatically come back on as you
                                                    turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2.          Adjusting the volume
                                               or                                                       Turn rotary control of N button.
                                                    Press M button.                                     The volume will increase or decrease
                                                                                                        depending on the direction turned.
                                               i If the radio is switched on without the Smart-
                                               Key in the starter switch, it will automatically    i If your vehicle equipment includes a Mer-
                                               switch off again after approx. 30 minutes.          cedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you
                                               If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the   can adjust its volume separately from the volume
                                               display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM       of the audio system while the telephone is being
                                               network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network).            used.




190
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Audio system


Adjusting sound functions                            The radio switches back to the               Sound system*
                                                     standard radio menu 8 seconds after
The bass and treble functions are called up                                                       You can either program the sound settings
                                                     the last soft key is pressed.
by pressing the O button.                                                                         manually ( page 191) or choose settings
                                                                                                  via preset sound characteristics.
Settings for bass and treble are stored         Adjusting treble
separately for the AM and FM wavebands,                                                           You can select from among the following
                                                     Press O button repeatedly until
weather band, CD mode and telephone                                                               settings:
                                                     TREBLE appears in the display.
mode.
                                                                                                       STANDARD: conventional stereo sound.

Bass                                                                                                   SURROUND: the sound is set for better
                                                                                                       three-dimensional acoustic character-
     Press O button repeatedly until                                                                   istics.
     BASS appears in the display.
                                                                                                       SPEECH: the sound is optimized for the
                                                                                                       spoken word.
                                                                                                       Press O button repeatedly until
                                                     Press + or – soft key to increase or
                                                                                                       STANDARD, SURROUND, or SPEECH appears
                                                     decrease tone level accordingly.
                                                                                                       in the display.
                                                or                                                     Press X or Y soft key repeatedly
                                                     Press RES soft key briefly to reset treble        until the desired sound setting has
     Press + or – soft key to increase or            tones to their center level.                      been reached.
     decrease tone level accordingly.                The radio switches back to the                    The sound is set accordingly.
or                                                   standard radio menu 8 seconds after          or
                                                     the last soft key is pressed.
     Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass
     tones to their center level.


                                                                                                                                        191
Controls in detail
Audio system


   Press RES soft key briefly.                 Press RES soft key briefly; the respec-      Fader
                                               tive sound function is reset to its center
   The sound setting is reset depending                                                          Press P button repeatedly until
                                               level.
   on the sound source activated.                                                                FADER appears in the display.
                                          or
      Radio mode: STANDARD
                                               Press and hold RES soft key until RESET
      CD/AUX mode: SURROUND
                                               appears in the display.
      Telephone: SPEECH
                                               The sound settings for bass and treble
   The radio switches back to the              are returned to their center level and
   standard radio menu 8 seconds after         the volume is set to a predefined level.
   the last soft key is pressed.
                                               Vehicles with sound system*:
                                                                                                 Press V or W soft key.
Returning sound functions to factory           The sound setting is reset depending
                                                                                                 The volume is distributed accordingly
settings                                       on the sound source activated.
                                                                                                 between the front and rear of the
   Press O button to call up settings             Radio mode: STANDARD                           vehicle.
   menu in the display.
                                                  CD/AUX mode: SURROUND                     or
                                                  Telephone: SPEECH                              Press RES soft key briefly.
                                                  The radio switches back to the                 The fader is reset to its center level.
                                                  standard radio menu 4 seconds
                                                                                                 The radio switches back to the
                                                  after the last soft key is pressed.
                                                                                                 standard radio menu 8 seconds after
                                                                                                 the last soft key is pressed.
                                          Adjusting volume distribution
                                          Call up fader and balance functions by
                                          pressing the P button.

192
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Audio system


Adjusting balance                                Returning volume distribution to               Telephone* muting
                                                 factory settings
     Press P button repeatedly until                                                            If your vehicle equipment includes a
     BALANCE appears in the display.                  Press P button to call up settings        Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
                                                      menu in the display.                      telephone*, you can adjust its volume
                                                                                                separately from the volume of the audio
                                                                                                system while the telephone is being used.

                                                                                                Connecting an external audio source
                                                                                                (AUX) to the radio*
                                                                                                An optional dealer-installed cinch-connec-
     Press X or Y soft key.                                                                     tor* for connecting an external audio
                                                      Press RES soft key briefly; the           source may become available for your
     The volume is distributed between the                                                      vehicle model. Feature description is
                                                      respective volume distribution is reset
     left and right sides of the vehicle.                                                       based on preliminary information at time
                                                      to its center (flat) level.
or                                                                                              of printing. Contact an authorized
                                                 or                                             Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.
     Press RES soft key briefly.
                                                      Press and hold RES soft key until RESET   You can adjust the volume ( page 190),
     The balance is reset to its center level.        appears in the display.                   the sound settings ( page 191) and the
     The radio switches back to the                   The volume distribution settings for      volume distribution ( page 192) for the
     standard radio menu 8 seconds after              fader and balance are set to their        AUX input.
     the last button is pressed.                      center level.
                                                                                                Calling up AUX mode
                                                      The radio switches back to the
                                                      standard radio menu 4 seconds after          Press and hold Q button until AUX
                                                      the last soft key is pressed.                appears in the display.


                                                                                                                                    193
Controls in detail
Audio system


Canceling AUX mode                             Press WB soft key.                           Automatic seek tuning ( page 195)
     Press any audio source button.            The weather band menu is called up.          Scan search ( page 195)
                                               The waveband currently selected              Station memory ( page 195)
Radio operation
                                               appears in the upper left-hand corner
                                                                                            Automatic station memory (Autostore)
                                               of the display.
                                                                                            ( page 196)
Selecting radio mode
                                            Calling up wavebands for radios              The station search proceeds in the
     Press b button.                                                                     following frequency increments:
                                            with SAT
Calling up wavebands                           Press FM, AM, or WB soft key repeatedly      200 kHz in FM range
                                               until desired waveband has been              10 kHz in AM range
You can choose from among the FM, AM,
                                               selected.
and WB wavebands.
                                               The FM, AM, and WB wavebands are          Direct frequency input
Weather band ( page 196).
                                               called up one after another.                 Select desired waveband.
i FM waveband:        87.7......107.9 MHz
                                               The waveband currently selected
AM waveband:      530......1710 KHz            appears in the upper left-hand corner
                                               of the display.
Calling up wavebands for radios
without SAT                                 Selecting a station
     Press FM or AM soft key to switch      The following options are available for
     between FM and AM.                     selecting a station:
     The FM and AM wavebands are called        Direct frequency input ( page 194)           Press * button.
     up one after another.                                                                  Enter desired frequency with
                                               Manual tuning ( page 195)
or                                                                                          buttons 1 to R.

194
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                               Audio system


i You can only enter frequencies within the re-    i If no station is received after two                    The station last played will be
spective waveband.                                 consecutive scans of the complete frequency              selected and SC disappears from
If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds, the   range, then the scan stops at the frequency from         the display.
radio will return to the last station tuned.       which it began.
                                                                                                      Station memory
Manual tuning                                      Scan search
                                                                                                      You can store ten AM and ten FM stations
    Select desired waveband.                           Starting scan search                           in the memory.
    Press S or T button for approx.                        Select desired waveband.                      Storing stations
    3 seconds.                                                                                              Tune in desired station.
    Press button repeatedly until desired                                                                   Press and hold desired station
    frequency has been reached.                                                                             button 1 to R until a brief
    Step-by-step station tuning takes place                                                                 signal tone is heard.
    in ascending or descending order. Each                                                                  The frequency is stored on the
    time the button is pressed, the radio                                                                   selected station button.
    tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During
                                                           Press SC soft key.                            Calling up stations
    manual tuning, the radio is muted.
                                                           SC will appear in the display. The               Press desired station button 1
Automatic seek tuning                                      radio briefly tunes in all receivable            to R briefly.
                                                           stations on the waveband selected.
    Select desired waveband.
                                                       Ending scan search
    Press S or T button briefly.
                                                           Press SC soft key or S or T.
    The radio will tune to the next highest
    or next lowest receivable frequency.



                                                                                                                                         195
Controls in detail
Audio system


Autostore – automatic station memory            Calling up stations                    Weather band
The Autostore memory function provides             Press desired station button 1
an additional memory level. The station            to R.
memory for manually stored stations is not
                                                Leaving the Autostore memory level
overwritten.
                                                   Press FM or AM soft key briefly.
   Calling up Autostore memory level and
   storing stations                          Interrupting radio mode
                                             The radio mode is interrupted by an          Press WB soft key.
                                             incoming call on the telephone*
                                                                                          The weather band station last received
                                             ( page 212).
                                                                                          is tuned in.
                                                Mute on
                                                                                       Selecting a weather band station
                                                   Press U button.
                                                                                       directly
                                                   The radio mode is interrupted and
       Press AS soft key briefly.                  MUTED appears in the display.
                                                                                          Select desired weather band station
                                                                                          with buttons 1 to 7.
       The radio switches to the Autostore
                                                Mute off
       memory level. AS and SEARCH                                                        If a station cannot be tuned in, a search
       appear in the display and the radio         Press U button.                        is automatically started.
       finds the ten stations with the             The radio mode is again active.
       strongest signals. These stations
       are stored on the station
       buttons 1 to R in order of
       signal strength.



196
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Audio system


Search                                           Introduction to satellite radio*              i Additional satellite radio equipment and a
                                                 (USA only)                                    subscription to a satellite radio service provider
    Press S or T button to tune in
                                                                                               are required for the satellite radio operation de-
    the next receivable weather band                                                           scribed here.
                                                 SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 chan-
    station.
                                                 nels of digital-quality radio, among others   Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
i If no weather band station is received after   music, sports, news, and entertainment,       for details and availability for your vehicle.
three consecutive scans of the complete fre-     free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio   Note that categories and channels shown in illus-
quency range, then the scan stops at the chan-   uses a fleet of high-power satellites to      trations are dependent on programming content
nel with which it began and NO WB FOUND          broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to          delivered by the service provider. Programming
appears in the display.                                                                        content is subject to change. Therefore,
                                                 coast, in the contiguous U.S.
If this happens, switch back to standard radio                                                 channels and categories shown in illustrations
mode.                                            This diverse, satellite-delivered program-    and descriptions contained in this manual may
                                                 ming is available for a monthly subscrip-     differ from the channels and categories
                                                 tion fee.                                     delivered by the service provider.
Scan search
                                                 For more information and service
    Starting scan search                         availability call the SIRIUS Service
                                                                                               i Satellite radio service may be unavailable or
                                                                                               interrupted from time to time for a variety of rea-
        Press SC soft key.                       Center ( page 201), or contact                sons, such as environmental or topographic con-
                                                 www.siriusradio.com.                          ditions and other things beyond the service
        SC will appear in the display. The
                                                                                               provider’s or our control. Service might also not
        radio briefly tunes in all receivable                                                  be available in certain places (e.g., in tunnels,
        weather band stations.                                                                 parking garages, or within or next to buildings) or
    Ending scan search                                                                         near other technologies.

        Press SC soft key or S or T.
        The weather band station last
        played will be selected and SC
        disappears from the display.

                                                                                                                                           197
Controls in detail
Audio system


Program categories                              The telephone number of the SIRIUS                 i The system will tune to a default station if no
                                                Service Center (888-539-7474) is                   station had been selected previously.
The channels are categorized. Categories
                                                displayed.
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program (category mode)           Press ESN soft key.
( page 199).
                                                    The twelve-digit electronic serial
                                                    number (ESN) of the SAT tuner*
Calling up the SAT main menu
                                                    installed in your vehicle is displayed.
   Press SAT soft key.                          This information is required to call the
   SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand      SIRIUS Service Center for an activation
   corner of the display.                       request.                                           The first channel 001 is called up and the
                                                                                                   PTY system changes to All categories.
   Prior to activation of the satellite radio   i Credit card information may also be
   service ( page 198).                         required for your application.                     If no station can be received, ACQUIRING
                                                The activation process takes approximately 5 to    appears in the display.
   After activation of satellite radio
   service ( page 198).                         10 minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Cen-   If the Satellite radio service is not
                                                ter.                                               activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the
Prior to activation of the satellite radio                                                         radio display and NO SAT will appear in the
                                                After activation of the satellite radio            multifunction display.
service
                                                service
                                                The satellite radio main menu appears.
                                                The radio station selected last is audible,
                                                provided it can be received.




198
                                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                                  Audio system


Selecting a station                         Accessing via number keys                      The system tunes to channel 16.
The following options are available:           Enter number of preset you wish to          The station you have selected begins to
                                               select, e.g. 1.                             play.
   Selecting a station using the selected
   category ( page 199).                       The radio plays the station stored       i You can only enter available channel num-
                                               under this number and the PTY function   bers.
   Tuning via station presets
                                               changes to the category corresponding
   ( page 199).
                                               to the station.                          Tuning via the program category list
   Tuning via scan search ( page 200).
                                                                                        The category list contains all currently
   Tuning via manual channel input          Tuning via manual channel input
                                                                                        receivable categories of programs. It is
   ( page 199).                                                                         arranged alphabetically.
   Tuning via the program category list                                                    Selecting a category
   ( page 199).
                                                                                                Press PTY soft key.
Tuning via station presets
Ten satellite radio station presets are
available.
                                            Example: tuning in channel 16
You can access the presets via number
keys.                                          Press * button.
                                               Input line appears in the main radio
                                               menu.
                                                                                                The current PTY category of the
                                               Use number keys to enter desired                 station is displayed.
                                               channel within 8 seconds, e.g. 1
                                               6.


                                                                                                                              199
Controls in detail
Audio system


        Press X or Y soft key.                          Press and hold S or T                  Obtaining additional text information
                                                        button for approx. 3 seconds until
        This switches between the                                                              Additional text information (artist, title)
                                                        desired station has been reached.
        individual categories.                                                                 related to the current channel can be
                                                                                               displayed.
     When changing the category, the             Tuning via scan search
     channel selected last in the new                                                             Press INF soft key.
                                                 Scan search is characterized as follows:
     category becomes audible.
                                                                                                  The title being played is displayed.
     The system will automatically switch to        Scan search plays a channel for
                                                    approx. 8 seconds and then skips to           Press INF soft key again.
     a station of the selected category if the
     currently selected station is not of the       the next channel within the current cat-      The name of the artist performing the
     selected category. Otherwise, the              egory.                                        title being played is displayed.
     currently selected station remains             Scan search can be terminated
                                                                                               i If a button is not pressed within 4 seconds,
     tuned.                                         manually.                                  the radio will return to the standard display.
     Tuning a station within the selected           Press SC soft key.
     category                                                                                  Storing stations
                                                    The search starts. SC appears in the
     The channels identified for the                display.                                      Tune in desired station.
     currently selected category are                                                              Press and hold desired station
                                                    Press SC soft key again.
     arranged numerically. Only one entry is                                                      button 1 to R until a brief signal
     visible at a time.                             The search stops.
                                                                                                  tone is heard.
        Press S or T button briefly.                                                              The frequency is stored on the selected
        The next station within the category                                                      station button.
        is started.
or


200
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                               Audio system


    The radio saves the current station at       CD mode
    the memory preset selected. The                                                                 Warning!                                G
    memory preset selected appears in the
                                                 Safety precautions                                 In order to avoid distraction which could
    status line, e.g. S3.
                                                                                                    lead to an accident, the driver should insert
i There are ten presets available.                Warning!                                G         CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
An existing entry is overwritten in the memory                                                      operate the audio system only if permitted
list when a new entry is given.                   The single CD player and the CD changer*          by road, weather and traffic conditions.
                                                  are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger     Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Calling up the ESN information menu               of invisible laser radiation if the housing is    (approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a
    Press INF soft key.                           opened or damaged.                                distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)
                                                  Do not open the housing. The single CD            every second.
    Press ESN soft key.                           player and the CD changer* do not contain
    The twelve-digit electronic serial            any parts that can be serviced by the user.      General notes
    number (ESN) of the SAT tuner*                For safety reasons, have any service work
    installed in your vehicle is displayed.       which may be necessary performed only by         The system may not be able to play audio
                                                  qualified personnel.                             CDs with copy protection.
    Press RET soft key to exit the menu.
                                                                                                   Playing copied CDs may cause
                                                                                                   malfunctions during playback.
                                                                                                   ! If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can be-
                                                                                                   come warped due to the heat that develops in
                                                                                                   the CD drive or CD changer*.
                                                                                                   In certain situations, the CDs can then no longer
                                                                                                   be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such
                                                                                                   damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                   Limited Warranty.


                                                                                                                                             201
Controls in detail
Audio system


! Your CD drive or CD changer* has been de-           Tips on handling CDs                            Information on MP3 data carriers
signed to play CDs which correspond to the
                                                         Handle CDs carefully to prevent              i CD media, CD burning software and
EN 60908 standard. You can therefore only use
CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.                  interference during playback.                CD writers are available in great variety. Due to
                                                                                                      this variety, it cannot be guaranteed that the
If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that      Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust       CD changer will be able to play every
have data on both sides (one side with DVD data,         on the CDs.                                  user-written CD.
the other side with audio data), they cannot be
ejected and will damage the drive.                       Do not write on CDs or apply any labels      The burning process can lead to data errors and
                                                         or other material to them.                   aging of the medium may result in data loss.
Do not use CDs with an 8 cm diameter, not                                                             Therefore, the CD changer may be restricted in
even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play               Clean CDs from time to time with a           its ability to play MP3 data carriers; it may play
CDs with an 8 cm diameter or playing such                commercially available cleaning cloth.       them with reduced sound quality, or it may not
CDs with an adapter may cause damage to                  Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;      be able to play them at all.
the CD drive. Such damage is not covered                 instead, wipe it in a straight line start-   Problems may be encountered during playback
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.                   ing in the center and moving outward.        of user-written CDs with a storage capacity of
                                                         Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays,     more than 700 MB. These CDs do not meet valid
Should excessively high or low tempera-                  etc. for cleaning.                           standards as of this printing.
tures occur while in CD changer mode*,
CD ERROR will appear in the display, and the             Replace the CD in its case after use.        Compatible MP3 data carriers
CD will be muted until the temperature has               Protect CDs from heat and direct             The CD changer can read the following
reached an acceptable level for the system               sunlight.                                    data carriers in MP3 mode:
to continue operation.
                                                      MP3 notes                                           CD-DA
The single CD player play audio CDs, the
CD changer* can play audio CDs as well as             The CD changer* can play audio CDs as               CD-R
CDs with MP3 files.                                   well as CDs with MP3 files.                         CD-RW




202
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                          Audio system


Compatible file systems and compres-          Compatible bit and sampling rates                  Information on copyright
sion methods
                                              Fixed and variable bit rates of up to              The music tracks that you create for use in
Use Romeo or Joliet. Depending on file for-   320 kBit/s are possible.                           MP3 mode or that you play in MP3 mode
mat used, up to 128 characters are possi-                                                        are subject to copyright laws under appli-
                                              The following table lists possible sampling
ble.                                                                                             cable international and national regula-
                                              rates:
                                                                                                 tions.
The following compression methods are
compatible:                                   MPEG1                   44.1 KHz, 48 KHz,          In many countries, the reproduction of
                                              Audio Layer3            32 KHZ                     copyrighted materials is not permitted,
   MP3
                                              MPEG2                   22.5 KHz, 24 KHz,          even if only for personal use, without the
   WMA                                                                                           express prior consent of the copyright
                                              Audio Layer3            16 KHz
   WAV                                                                                           holder.
                                              MPEG2.5                 11.025 KHz,
                                              Audio Layer3            12 KHz, 8 KHz              Please check the current copyright laws
                                                                                                 for your country and comply with them.
                                              WMA                     32 KHz, 44.1 KHz,
                                                                      48 KHz                     These restrictions do not apply, for exam-
                                                                                                 ple, to your own compositions and record-
                                                                                                 ings, or for recordings for which
                                              i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128
                                              kBit/s or higher and with the specified sampling   authorization has been obtained from the
                                              rates.                                             copyright holder.
                                              The use of rates other than those specified may
                                              lead to noticeably inferior sound quality.




                                                                                                                                      203
Controls in detail
Audio system


MP3 playback                                       i Keep in mind that the single CD player in the        Remove CD from slot.
                                                   audio system unit is not able to play CDs with
You can play an MP3 CD on the                                                                         i If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot
                                                   MP3 files.
CD changer* as you would any standard                                                                 within approx. 15 seconds, the system automat-
audio CD. All of the functions described for           Make sure the system is switched on.           ically pulls the CD back in and plays it.
the CD changer also apply for the playback             Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of      If a CD is pulled back in, press EJECT button for
of MP3 CDs. Keep in mind that the single               the CD must face upwards.                      5 seconds; the CD will then be ejected.
CD player in the audio system unit is not
able to read MP3 CDs.                                  The system automatically pulls the CD          Operational readiness of CD changer*
                                                       into the CD slot. The audio CD begins
The first 99 tracks on the CD, including               to play.                                       If a CD changer* has been installed in the
tracks in subdirectories, are recognized                                                              vehicle, it can be operated from the front
and played. Any additional tracks will not         ! If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected    control panel of the audio system.
be played.                                         before inserting a new CD. Inserting a second      A loaded magazine must be installed to
                                                   CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will   play CDs.
i Due to the branched data structure, play-        cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the
back of the first track may be delayed slightly.   Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.                    The CD changer* is located in the glove
                                                                                                      box.
Operating the single CD player in the
                                                   i If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or can-
                                                   not be read, WRONG CD ERROR will appear in the
audio system unit                                  display.                                           Loading/unloading the CD magazine

Loading a CD                                                                                          i The CD changer* may not be able to play au-
                                                   Ejecting a CD                                      dio CDs with copy protection.
The single CD player in the audio system               Make sure the system is switched on.               Slide changer door to the right and
unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot                                                                 press g button.
for loading the drive is located underneath            Press EJECT button.
the soft keys.                                         The system ejects the CD. NO CD will               Magazine will be ejected.
                                                       appear in the display.


204
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Audio system


                                                  Push magazine into CD changer* 2 in          After the last track on a CD has finished,
                                                  direction of arrow and close sliding         the next CD is automatically played.
                                                  door.
                                                                                               Playing tracks
                                               Playing CDs                                     You have the following options:
                                               Single CD player in the audio unit                 Audio system with CD changer*:
                                                                                                  selecting CDs
                                                  Press i button.
                                                                                                  Direct track entry
                                                  CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand
                                                  corner of the display.                          Track skip forward/reverse
1 CD
2 CD changer                                   The CD will resume playback at the point           Fast forward/reverse
3 CD tray                                      where it was switched off.                         Scan
4 CD magazine
                                               CD changer*                                        Random tracks
   Remove magazine 4 and pull
   CD tray 3 fully out.                           Press Q button.                                 Repeat track
   Place CD 1 in recess of tray, label side       CD and the selected magazine slot
   up.                                            number appear in the upper left-hand
   Push tray into magazine in direction of        corner of the display.
   arrow.                                      If you have not removed a CD since the last
                                               time the CD audio source was activated,
i CDs which have been inserted improperly or
are unreadable will not be played.             the last CD listened to will begin to play at
                                               the point where it was switched off.



                                                                                                                                     205
Controls in detail
Audio system


Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD            Direct track entry                         Skipping tracks forward/backward
changer*
                                                                                                 Skipping tracks forward
                                                                                                     Press S button briefly.
                                                                                                     The next track will be played.
                                                                                                 Skipping tracks backward
                                                                                                     Press T button briefly.
                                                   You can make a direct selection from              If the track has been playing for
    You can select from among the                  among the tracks on a CD.                         more than 10 seconds, the unit
    inserted CDs with buttons                                                                        skips back to the beginning of the
                                                      Press * button.
    R to 6.                                                                                          track currently playing. If less than
                                                      Enter track number using buttons 1             10 seconds have been played, the
    R = CD player in the audio unit
                                                      to R.                                          unit skips back to the beginning of
    1 to 6 = CDs in the                                                                              the previous track.
    CD changer*                                       The number of the track being played
                                                      appears next to TRACK in the display.   Pressing the T or S button
    The magazine slot number of the                                                           repeatedly will result in multiple tracks
    selected CD appears next to CD in the             You can only enter available track
                                                                                              being skipped.
    display, and the number of the                    numbers.
    currently played track appears next
    to TRACK.
i If there is no CD in the selected magazine
slot, NO CD appears in the display with the cor-
responding slot number.



206
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Audio system


Fast forward/reverse                           Random play                                  Repeat
   Fast forward                                The random function (RDM) plays the          The track being played is repeated until the
                                               tracks of the current CD in random order.    repeat function is switched off.
       Press and hold S button until
       desired point has been reached.         i When you start the RDM function, the RPT   i When you start the RPT function, the RDM
                                               function is automatically switched off.      function is automatically switched off.
   Reverse
       Press and hold T button until               Switching on random                          Switching on repeat
       desired point has been reached.                 Press RDM soft key.                          Press RPT soft key.
i The track number and the relative time of            RDM appears in the display.                  RPT appears in the display.
the track is shown in the display during the           A randomly selected track is
                                                                                                Switching off repeat
search.                                                played.
                                                                                                    Press RPT soft key again.
                                                   Switching off random
Scan
                                                       Press RDM soft key again.
   Starting scan
       Press SC soft key.
       SC will appear in the display.
       Each track on the current CD will be
       played for approx. 8 seconds in as-
       cending order.
   Ending scan
       Press SC soft key or T or S.



                                                                                                                                      207
Controls in detail
Audio system


Pause function                             Track and time display                        GSM network phones
The CD changer mode is interrupted by an
                                                                                         Using your Mercedes-Benz specified
incoming call on the telephone*
                                                                                         mobile telephone*, a number of functions
( page 212).
                                                                                         and operating steps can be performed and
   Switching on pause function                                                           displayed in the audio system display.
                                                                                         Further operating instructions not covered
                                                                                         here can be found in the operating instruc-
                                              Press T soft key.                          tions for the multifunction steering wheel
                                                                                         and the cellular telephone*.
                                              The number of the track being played
                                              and the elapsed playing time appear in     If your audio system is set up for telephone
                                              the display.                               operation, the t symbol will appear in
                                                                                         the display.
      Press U button.                         Press T soft key again.
                                                                                         When you insert your Mercedes-Benz
      The CD changer mode is                  The total number of tracks and the total   specified mobile telephone* into the
      interrupted and PAUSE appears in        playing time of the CD appear in the       telephone cradle, you will be prompted to
      the display.                            display.                                   enter your PIN for 30 seconds
   Switching off pause function               Press T soft key.                          ( page 209). This display disappears
                                                                                         when you press any button.
      Press U button.                         The standard CD playback menu
                                              appears in the display.                    When your mobile telephone is inserted
      The CD changer mode is active                                                      into the telephone cradle, you will see the
      again.                                                                             reception strength in the upper right-hand
                                                                                         corner of the display.



208
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Audio system


Switching on the telephone                   PIN entry                                      i If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times,
                                                                                            NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK
Switching on the telephone                                                                  via your telephone. Please refer to the separate
                                                                                            telephone operating instructions for more
   Press h button.                                                                          information.
   If the telephone was previously
   switched off, PROCESSING appears in                                                      Adjusting the volume
   the display and you will then be                                                             Turn rotary control of N button
   prompted to enter your PIN.                                                                  during a telephone call.
                                                Enter PIN number using buttons 1
Switching off the telephone                     to R.                                           The volume will increase or decrease
                                                                                                depending on the direction turned.
   Press h button for approx.                   If necessary, correct number entered
   3 seconds.                                   with the CLR soft key. Press soft key       i The volume can be adjusted separately for
                                                briefly to delete the last digit entered;   telephone mode and audio mode.
   PROCESSING appears in the display until
                                                press soft key and hold to delete the
   the telephone is off. Afterward,                                                         Adjusting sound
                                                complete number.
   PHONE OFF appears in the display.
                                                Press OK soft key after entering correct        Adjust sound during a telephone call.
                                                PIN.                                            Sound adjustment ( page 191).
                                                READY or ROAMING will appear in the
                                                display.




                                                                                                                                      209
Controls in detail
Audio system


Placing a call                                 i If the telephone number has been saved to-
                                               gether with a name in the telephone book, the
Entering a telephone number and                name will appear in the display.
starting the dialing process
                                               Phone book
                                               The numbers stored in the phone book of
                                               the telephone can be called up either by
                                               name or number.                                           Press MEM soft key or press
                                               In addition, incoming calls are stored in the             button ‚ or ƒ.
                                               phone book.                                               Press desired numerical key 2
                                               i This is only possible, however, when the call           to 9.
   Enter desired telephone number using
                                               information transmitted includes the number of
   buttons 1 to R.                             the person calling. If the telephone number is not
                                                                                                         The stored entries are selected
                                                                                                         according to the alphabetical order
   The number can have up to 32 digits,        transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the
                                               phone book.                                               of the initial letters (e.g. for
   but only twelve of these are visible in
                                                                                                         S -Smith, press button 7 four
   the display.                                    Searching and calling up telephone                    times).
   If necessary, correct number entered            book entries by name
                                                                                                    or
   with the CLR soft key. Press soft key           You can access your mobile
   briefly to delete the last digit entered;       telephone’s phone book using the                      Press and hold button ‚
   press soft key and hold to delete the           audio system. You can access both the                 or ƒ.
   complete number.                                main entries and the sub-entries of                   The system jumps from one initial
   After correct telephone number has              your phone book.                                      letter to the next in ascending or
   been entered, press s button.                                                                         descending order.



210
                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                               Audio system


        Press and hold button ‚                         When you have selected a number,     Press MEM soft key or press
        or ƒ until desired initial letter               press s button.                      button ‚ or ƒ.
        has been reached.
                                                        The call will be made.               Press RCV soft key (received calls).
or
                                                     Viewing the telephone number of a       The number of received calls and
        Press button ‚ or ƒ                          telephone book entry                    then the call last received appear
        repeatedly until desired entry has                                                   briefly in the display.
                                                        Search for desired entry.
        been reached.
                                                        Press NUM soft key.                  Select desired telephone number
        The stored entries are selected in                                                   with button ‚ or ƒ.
        alphabetical order with the                     The telephone number of the phone
                                                                                             The letter R and the number of the
        sub-entries.                                    book entry appears in the display.
                                                                                             memory position appear in the
i Several sub-entries can be stored for each         Returning calls received                upper left-hand corner of the
main entry (name). These entries are marked by                                               display. The numbers are stored in
a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the                                             the order of the calls received.
upper left-hand corner of the display. The
following abbreviations for sub-entries are possi-                                           When you have selected a number,
ble:                                                                                         press s button.
CEL = Mobile phone                                                                           The call will be made.
HOM = Home
WOR = Work
FAX = Fax
PAG = Pager
TEL = Main




                                                                                                                            211
Controls in detail
Audio system


  Speed dial                             Redial                                                         The letter L and the number of the
                                                                                                        memory position appears in the
  If you have stored telephone numbers   If the number you have dialed is busy, you
                                                                                                        left-hand corner of the display. The
  as speed dial numbers in your          can again place calls to the last ten
                                                                                                        numbers are stored in the order of
  telephone, you can also enter these    telephone numbers dialed using the redial
                                                                                                        the calls received.
  with buttons 1 to R on the radio       function.
  head unit.                                                                                            When you have selected a number,
                                         i If you have activated the automatic redial                   press s button.
      Press desired button 1 to R        function on your telephone, the number of the
      briefly.                           person being called is automatically redialed af-              The call will be made.
                                         ter a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.
      Press s button.                    Refer to the separate operating instructions for        Accepting an incoming call
      The call will be made.             the mobile telephone.
                                                                                                 If the telephone is active in the background
  Turbo dial                                 Manual redial
                                                                                                 (reception symbol is visible in the display),
  If you have stored telephone numbers                                                           the audio source is muted when an incom-
  as turbo dial numbers in your                                                                  ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
  telephone, you can also enter these                                                            heard and the caller’s telephone number,
  with buttons 1 to R on the radio                                                               or the name under which the telephone
  head unit.                                                                                     number has been saved in the phone book,
                                                                                                 appears in the display. If the caller’s
      Press desired button 1 to R                                                                number is not transmitted with the call,
      until the call is made.
                                                  Press s button.                                CALL will appear in the display.

                                                  The telephone number last dialed                  Press s button.
                                                  will appear in the display.                       The call is accepted.
                                                  Select desired telephone number
                                                  with button ‚ or ƒ.

212
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Audio system


Muting a call                                  Talking with two callers at the same                 You are connected with the second
                                               time                                                 caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is
then no longer able to hear you.               If you wish to receive or place another call         Switching between calls
                                               during an already active call, you can
   Mute on                                                                                             Press 2 and s buttons.
                                               accept or place the second call and switch
       Press MUT soft key.                     between the callers or combine them into                This switches between the calls.
                                               one call. Note that the features described              The non-active call is kept on hold.
       MIC MUTE will appear in the display.
                                               here are depending on availability from              Terminating a call
   Mute off                                    your mobile phone service provider.
                                                                                                       Press t button.
       Press MUT soft key again.                    Placing/accepting a second call
                                                                                                       The current call is terminated. You
Terminating a call                                     Place new call by entering                      are again connected with the caller
                                                       telephone number manually.                      previously placed on hold.
   Press t button.
                                                       Press s button.                              Combining two calls
   The current call is terminated and the
   muted audio source becomes active                   You are connected to the second                 Press 3 and s buttons.
   again.                                              caller; the first caller is kept on
                                                       hold.                                           The calls are combined into one
                                                                                                       call.
                                               or
                                                                                                    Terminating a combined call
                                                       Press s button to accept a
                                                       second call.                                    Press t button.
                                                                                                       The connection to both callers is
                                               i You will be notified of the second call acous-        terminated.
                                               tically, but you will not see this in the display.




                                                                                                                                         213
Controls in detail
Audio system


TDMA or CDMA network phones                    Switching on the telephone                        Press OK soft key after entering correct
                                                                                                 code.
Using your Mercedes-Benz specified             Switching on the telephone
                                                                                                 The telephone is unlocked. If you have
mobile telephone*, a number of functions
                                                  Press h button.                                entered an incorrect code, you must
and operating steps can be performed and
                                                                                                 enter the correct code.
displayed in the audio system display.            If you have programmed an unlock
                                                  code for the telephone, you must now
Further operating instructions not covered                                                    Switching off the telephone
                                                  enter the code.
here can be found in the operating instruc-
                                                                                                 Press h button for approx.
tions for the multifunction steering wheel
                                                                                                 3 seconds.
and the mobile telephone*.
                                                                                                 PROCESSING appears in the display until
If your audio system is set up for telephone
                                                                                                 the telephone is off. Afterward,
operation, the t symbol will appear in
                                                                                                 PHONE OFF appears in the display.
the display.
When you insert your Mercedes-Benz                                                            Adjusting the volume
specified mobile telephone* into the              Enter code using buttons 1                     Turn rotary control of N button
telephone cradle, you will be prompted to         to R.                                          during a telephone call.
enter your PIN for 30 seconds
( page 209). This display disappears              If necessary, correct number entered           The volume will increase or decrease
when you press any button.                        with the CLR soft key. Press soft key          depending on the direction turned.
                                                  briefly to delete the last digit entered;
When your mobile telephone is inserted            press soft key and hold to delete the       i The volume can be adjusted separately for
into the telephone cradle, you will see the       complete number.                            telephone mode and audio mode.
reception strength in the upper right-hand
corner of the display.



214
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                           Audio system


Adjusting sound                                  If necessary, correct number entered                  You can access your mobile
                                                 with the CLR soft key. Press soft key                 telephone’s phone book with the audio
   Adjust sound during a telephone call.
                                                 briefly to delete the last digit entered;             system. You can access both the main
   Sound adjustment ( page 191).
                                                 press soft key and hold to delete the                 entries and the sub-entries of your
                                                 complete number.                                      phone book.
Placing a call
                                                 After correct telephone number has
Entering a telephone number and                  been entered, press s button.
starting the dialing process
                                             i If the telephone number has been saved to-
                                             gether with a name in the phone book, the name
                                             will appear in the display.

                                             Phone book
                                                                                                          Press MEM soft key or press
                                             The numbers stored in the phone book of
                                                                                                          button ‚ or ƒ.
                                             the mobile telephone can be called up
                                             either by name or number.                                    Press desired numerical key 2
   Enter desired telephone number using                                                                   to 9.
                                             In addition, incoming calls are stored in the
   buttons 1 to R.
                                             phone book.                                                  The stored entries are selected
   The number can have up to 32 digits,                                                                   according to the alphabetical order
   but only twelve of these are visible in   i This is only possible, however, when the call              of the initial letters (e.g. for
                                             information transmitted includes the number of
   the display.                                                                                           S -Schneider, press button 7
                                             the person calling. If the telephone number is not
                                             transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the                 four times).
                                             phone book.                                          or
                                                 Searching and calling up phone book
                                                 entries by name

                                                                                                                                        215
Controls in detail
Audio system


      Press and hold button ‚              i Several sub-entries can be stored for each
      or ƒ.                                main entry (name). These entries are marked by
                                           a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the
      The system jumps from one initial    upper left-hand corner of the display. The
      letter to the next in ascending or   following abbreviations for sub-entries are possi-
      descending order.                    ble:
      Press and hold button ‚              CEL = Mobile phone
      or ƒ until desired initial letter    HOM = Home
      has been reached.                    WOR = Work                                           Press MEM soft key or press
                                           FAX = Fax                                            button ‚ or ƒ.
or                                         PAG = Pager
                                           TEL = Main                                           Press RCV soft key (received calls).
      Press button ‚ or ƒ
      repeatedly until desired entry has           When you have selected a number,             The number of received calls and
      been reached.                                press s button.                              then the call last received appear
                                                                                                briefly in the display.
      The stored entries are selected in           The call will be made.
      alphabetical order with the                                                               Select desired telephone number
                                               Viewing the telephone number of a
      sub-entries.                                                                              with button ‚ or ƒ.
                                               phone book entry
                                                                                                The letter R and the number of the
                                                   Search for desired entry.
                                                                                                memory position appear in the
                                                   Press NUM soft key.                          upper left-hand corner of the
                                                   The telephone number of the phone            display. The numbers are stored in
                                                   book entry appears in the display.           the order of the calls received.

                                               Returning calls received                         When you have selected a number,
                                                                                                press s button.
                                                                                                The call will be made.

216
                                                                                                                 Controls in detail
                                                                                                                         Audio system


Speed dial                             Redial                                                        Select desired telephone number
                                                                                                     with button ‚ or ƒ.
If you have stored telephone numbers   If the number you have dialed is busy, you
as speed dial numbers in your          can again place calls to the last ten                         The letter L and the number of the
telephone, you can also enter these    telephone numbers dialed using the redial                     memory position appears in the
with buttons 1 to R on the radio       function.                                                     left-hand corner of the display. The
unit.                                                                                                numbers are stored in the order of
                                       i If you have activated the automatic redial                  the calls received.
   Press desired button 1 to R         function on your mobile telephone, the number
   briefly.                            of the person being called is automatically redi-             When you have selected a number,
                                       aled after a short waiting period if there is a busy          press s button.
   Press s button.                     signal.
                                       Refer to the separate operating instructions for              The call will be made.
   The call will be made.
                                       the mobile telephone.
Turbo dial                                                                                    Accepting an incoming call
                                           Manual redial
If you have stored telephone numbers                                                          If the telephone is active in the background
as turbo dial numbers in your                                                                 (reception symbol is visible in the display),
telephone, you can also enter these                                                           the audio source is muted when an incom-
with buttons 1 to R on the radio                                                              ing call is received. A ringing tone can be
unit.                                                                                         heard and the caller’s telephone number,
   Press desired button 1 to R                                                                or the name under which the telephone
   until the call is made.                                                                    number has been saved in the telephone
                                                                                              book, appears in the display. If the caller’s
                                                Press s button.                               number is not relayed, CALL will appear in
                                                The telephone number last dialed              the display.
                                                will appear in the display.                      Press s button.
                                                                                                 The call is accepted.

                                                                                                                                     217
Controls in detail
Audio system


Muting a call                                  Accepting a second incoming call                     Placing a second call
It is possible to mute a call; the caller is   If you receive another call during an                If you wish to place another call during an
then no longer able to hear you.               already active call, you can accept the              already active call, you can place the
                                               second call and switch between the two.              second call and switch between the callers
   Mute on
                                                                                                    or combine them into one call. Note that
                                                   Accepting a second call
       Press MUT soft key.                                                                          this feature is dependent on availability
       MIC MUTE will appear in the display.
                                                       Place new call by entering                   from your mobile phone service provider.
                                                       telephone number manually.
   Mute off                                                                                            Placing a second call
                                               i You will be notified of the second call acous-            Place a new call by entering
       Press MUT soft key again.               tically, but you will not see this in the display.
                                                                                                           telephone number manually.
                                                   You are connected to the second
Terminating a call                                                                                         Press s button.
                                                   caller; the first caller is kept on hold.
   Press t button.                                                                                         You are connected to the second
                                                   Switching between calls
   The current call is terminated and the                                                                  caller; the first caller is kept on
   muted audio source becomes active                   Press s button.                                     hold.
   again.                                              This switches between the calls.                Terminating a call
                                                       The non-active call is kept on hold.
                                                                                                           Press t button.
                                                   Terminating a call
                                                                                                           The current call is terminated. The
                                                       Press t button.                                     connection to the caller previously
                                                       The current call is terminated. The                 kept on hold is also interrupted;
                                                       connection to the caller previously                 however, reconnection is indicated
                                                       kept on hold is also interrupted;                   by an acoustic signal.
                                                       however, reconnection is indicated
                                                       by an acoustic signal.

218
                                                                                                             Controls in detail
                                                                                                                     Audio system


Combining two calls                    Emergency calls “911”                             The following conditions must be met for a
                                                                                         “911” emergency call:
   Press s button.
                                       The following describes how to dial a “911”
                                                                                             Telephone must be switched on.
   The calls are combined into one     emergency call using the audio system
   call.                               head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified              The corresponding mobile communica-
                                       mobile phone* is inserted in the phone                tions network must be available.
Terminating a combined call
                                       cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the
   Press t button.                     descriptions refer to the audio system
                                                                                         i Emergency calls may not be possible with all
                                                                                         telephone networks or if certain network servic-
   The connection to both callers is   head unit.                                        es and/or telephone functions are active. Check
   terminated.                         Consult the separate telephone operating          with your local service providers.
                                       instructions that came with your mobile           If you cannot make an emergency call, you
                                       phone* for information on how to place a          will have to initiate rescue measures
                                       “911” emergency call on the mobile                yourself.
                                       phone*.
                                                                                         GSM network phones
                                        Warning!                                G
                                                                                         Placing a “911” emergency call using
                                        The “911” emergency call system is a public      audio head unit with the phone locked
                                        service. Using it without due cause is a crim-       Press h button to switch to
                                        inal offense.                                        telephone operation.
                                                                                             PIN? appears in the audio display.
                                                                                             Enter 911 using the number keypad on
                                                                                             the audio head unit.



                                                                                                                                   219
Controls in detail
Audio system


   Press OK soft key or s button for       i If no SIM card is in the mobile phone, NO       Placing a “911” emergency call using
   dialing to begin.                       SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that     audio head unit with the phone
                                           case, you only can make an emergency call on      unlocked
   DIALING appears in the audio display    the mobile phone itself, without the use of the
   while the telephone establishes the     head unit.                                           Press h button to switch to
   connection.                                                                                  telephone operation.
   Wait until the emergency call center    TDMA/CDMA network phones                             Enter 911 using the number keypad on
   answers, then describe the emergency.                                                        the audio head unit.
                                           Placing a “911” emergency call using
                                           audio head unit with the phone locked                Press s button for dialing to begin.
Placing a “911” emergency call using
audio head unit with the phone                                                                  DIALING appears in the audio display
                                               Press h button to switch to
unlocked                                                                                        while the telephone establishes the
                                               telephone operation.
                                                                                                connection.
   Press h button to switch to                 CODE? appears in the audio display.
   telephone operation.                                                                         Wait until the emergency call center
                                               Enter 911 using the number keypad on             answers, then describe the emergency.
   Enter 911 using the number keypad on        the audio head unit.
   the audio head unit.
                                               Press OK soft key or s button for
   Press s button for dialing to begin.        dialing to begin.
   DIALING appears in the audio display        DIALING appears in the audio display
   while the telephone establishes the         while the telephone establishes the
   connection.                                 connection.
   Wait until the emergency call center        Wait until the emergency call center
   answers, then describe the emergency.       answers, then describe the emergency.




220
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                      Power windows
   Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
                                              Warning!                               G         When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                               SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
The side windows are opened and closed
                                              When closing the power windows, make             with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
electrically. The switches for all the side
                                              sure there is no danger of anyone being          children unattended in the vehicle, or with
windows are on the driver’s door. The
                                              harmed by the closing procedure.                 access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
switches for the respective windows are
                                                                                               unsupervised access to a vehicle could
on the front passenger door and the rear      The closing of the door windows can be im-       result in an accident and/or serious
doors.                                        mediately halted by releasing the switch or,     personal injury.
                                              if switch was pulled past the resistance
                                              point and released, by either pressing or
                                              pulling the respective switch.                  i You can also open or close the power win-
                                                                                              dows using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
                                              If the window encounters an obstruction         feature” ( page 223) and “Convenience clos-
                                              that blocks its path in a circumstance where    ing feature” ( page 223).
                                              you pulled the switch past the resistance       Depending on current position, the windows may
                                              point and released it to close the window,      also open or close when the air recirculation
                                              the automatic reversal function will stop the   button , in the control panel of the climate
                                              window and open it slightly.                    control ( page 165) or automatic climate
                                                                                              control* (Canada only) ( page 175), or the
1 Left front window                           If the window encounters an obstruction         charcoal filter button e in the control panel
2 Right front window                          that blocks its path in a circumstance where    of the automatic climate control* (Canada only)
3 Right rear window                           you are closing the window by pulling and       ( page 183) is pressed and held.
4 Left rear window                            holding the switch, by pressing and holding        Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
5 Rear window override switch                 button ‹ on the SmartKey, or by press-
  ( page 80)                                  ing and holding button , or e on the
                                              climate control panel, the automatic rever-
                                              sal function will not operate.


                                                                                                                                       221
Controls in detail
Power windows


Opening the windows                               Fully opening the windows
   Press switch 1 to 4 to the resistance
                                                  (Express-open)                                      Warning!                               G
   point.                                             Press switch 1 to 4 past the                    Driver’s door only:
                                                      resistance point and release.                   If within 5 seconds you again pull the switch
   The corresponding window will move
   downwards until you release the                    The corresponding window opens                  past the resistance point and release, the
   switch.                                            completely.                                     automatic reversal will not function.

Closing the windows                               Fully closing the windows                          Stopping windows
                                                  (Express-close)
   Pull switch 1 to 4 to the resistance                                                                 Press or pull respective switch again.
   point.                                             Pull switch 1 to 4 past the
   The corresponding window will move                 resistance point and release.                  Synchronizing power windows
   upwards until you release the switch.              The corresponding window closes
                                                      completely.                                    The power windows must be
                                                                                                     resynchronized each time
 Warning!                                G        ! If the upward movement of the window is
                                                  blocked during the closing procedure, the win-        after the battery has been
 If you pull and hold the switch up when          dow will stop and open slightly.                      disconnected or discharged.
 closing the window, and upward movement          Remove the obstruction, pull the switch again         if the power windows cannot be fully
 of the window is blocked by some obstruc-        past the resistance point and release.                opened (Express-open) or closed
 tion including but not limited to arms, hands,   If the window still does not close when there is      (Express-close).
 fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not   no obstruction, then pull and hold the switch
 operate.                                         again. The side window will then close without
                                                                                                        Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
                                                  the obstruction sensor function.




222
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Power windows


   Pull the power window switches until         Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
                                                                                                 Release button ‹ to stop the closing
   the side windows are closed.                 handle. The SmartKey must be in close            procedure. To open, press and hold
                                                proximity to the door handle.                    button Œ. To continue the closing
   Hold the switches for approximately
   1 second.                                    Press and hold button Πuntil the                procedure after making sure that there
                                                windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*            is no danger of anyone being harmed by
   The power windows are synchronized.                                                           the closing procedure, press and hold
                                                have reached the desired position.
                                                                                                 button ‹.
Summer opening feature                          Release button Πto interrupt pro-
                                                cedure.                                        Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate                                                      handle. The SmartKey must be in close
the vehicle before driving off by simulta-   Convenience closing feature                       proximity to the door handle.
neously:
                                                                                               Press and hold button ‹ until the
   opening the side windows
                                              Warning!                                G        windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
   opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*                                                           are completely closed.
                                              When closing the windows and the tilt/slid-      Release the ‹ button to stop
                                              ing sunroof*, make sure that there is no         procedure.
                                              danger of anyone being harmed by the clos-
                                              ing procedure.                                Make sure all windows and the tilt/sliding
                                                                                            sunroof* are properly closed before leav-
                                              If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-   ing the vehicle.
                                              lows:




                                                                                                                                   223
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*


Opening and closing the power                With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
tilt/sliding sunroof                         screen can be slid into the roof opening to   Warning!                                G
                                             guard against sun rays. When sliding the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened and   sunroof open, the screen will also retract.   When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make
closed electrically. The switch for the                                                    sure there is no danger of anyone being
tilt/sliding sunroof is on the overhead                                                    harmed by the closing procedure.
control panel.                                                                             The opening/closing procedure of the
                                                                                           tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately
                                                                                           halted by releasing the switch or, if the
                                                                                           switch was moved past the resistance point
                                                                                           and released, by moving the switch in any
                                                                                           direction.
                                                                                           The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
                                                                                           In the event of an accident, the glass may
                                             Screen
                                                                                           shatter. This may result in an opening in the
                                                                                           roof.

Sunroof switch                                                                             In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
                                                                                           their seat belts or not wearing them properly
1 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
                                                                                           may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
2 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
                                                                                           opening also presents a potential for injury
3 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
                                                                                           for occupants wearing their seat belts
4 Push back to slide sunroof open
                                                                                           properly as entire body parts or portions of
                                                                                           them may protrude from the passenger
                                                                                           compartment.



224
                                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                              Power tilt/sliding sunroof*


                                                   i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-      Opening and closing the power
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                   nance noises may result in addition to the usual    tilt/sliding sunroof
 SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                   wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
 with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave      sure changes in the passenger compartment. To          To open, close, raise, or lower the
 children unattended in the vehicle, or with       reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-       tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof
 access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s          sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side      switch to resistance point in the
 unsupervised access to a vehicle could            window slightly.                                       required direction of arrows 1 to 4.
 result in an accident and/or serious
                                                   i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding          Release the sunroof switch when the
 personal injury.
                                                   sunroof using the SmartKey, see “Summer open-          tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the
                                                   ing feature” ( page 223) and “Convenience              desired position.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans-       closing feature” ( page 223).
port any objects with sharp edges which can        Depending on current position, the tilt/sliding     Fully opening (Express-open) and
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.             sunroof may also open or close when the air re-     closing (Express-close) the power
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is   circulation button , in the control panel of        tilt/sliding sunroof
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in   the climate control ( page 165) or automatic
malfunctions.                                      climate control* (Canada only) ( page 181), or         To open or close the tilt/sliding
                                                   the charcoal filter button e in the control            sunroof, move the sunroof switch past
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
                                                   panel of the automatic climate control* (Canada        the resistance point in the required
manually should an electrical malfunction occur
                                                   only) ( page 183) is pressed and held.                 direction of arrow 1 to 4 and
( page 364).
                                                       Switch on the ignition ( page 32).                 release.
                                                                                                          The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
                                                                                                          completely.




                                                                                                                                            225
Controls in detail
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*


Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof               Synchronizing the power tilt/sliding           Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
during Express-operation                              sunroof
                                                                                                     Move and hold the sunroof switch in di-
    Move the sunroof switch in any                                                                   rection of arrow 1 ( page 224) until
                                                      The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
    direction.                                                                                       the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at
                                                      synchronized
                                                                                                     the rear.
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is         after the battery has been
blocked during the closing procedure, the                                                            Hold the sunroof switch for
                                                         disconnected or discharged
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.                                                  approximately 1 second.
                                                         after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
                                                                                                     Check the Express-open feature
                                                         closed manually ( page 364)
                                                                                                     ( page 225).
                                                         after a malfunction
                                                                                                     If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
                                                         if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open   completely, the tilt/sliding sunroof is
                                                         smoothly                                    synchronized. Otherwise repeat the
                                                                                                     above steps.




226
                                                                                                                  Controls in detail
                                                                                                                     Driving systems
   Driving systems
The driving system of your vehicle is
described on the following pages:             Warning!                                 G
   Cruise control, with which the vehicle     The cruise control is a convenience system
   can maintain a preset speed.               designed to assist the driver during vehicle
For information on the BAS, ABS and ESP®,     operation. The driver is and must always re-
see “Driving safety systems” ( page 82).      main responsible for the vehicle’s speed and
                                              for safe brake operation.
Cruise control                                Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
                                              and weather conditions make it advisable to
The cruise control automatically maintains    travel at a steady speed.                         1 Sets current or higher speed
the speed you set for your vehicle.                                                             2 Sets current or lower speed
                                                  The use of cruise control can be danger-
The use of cruise control is recommended          ous on winding roads or in heavy traffic      3 Cancels cruise control
for driving at a constant speed for extend-       because conditions do not allow safe          4 Resumes at last set speed
ed periods of time. You can set or resume         driving at a steady speed.
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph           The use of cruise control can be danger-      Setting current speed
(30 km/h).                                        ous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in          Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
The cruise control function is operated by        tire traction can result in wheel spin and       speed.
means of the cruise control lever.                loss of control.
                                                                                                   Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
                                                  Deactivate cruise control when driving
The cruise control lever is the uppermost         in fog.
                                                                                                   control lever.
lever on the left-hand side of the steering                                                        The current speed is set.
column ( page 22).                            The “Resume” function should only be oper-
                                              ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-      Remove your foot from the accelerator
                                              ously set speed and wishes to resume this            pedal.
                                              particular preset speed.
                                                                                                   Cruise control is activated.

                                                                                                                                    227
Controls in detail
Driving systems


i On uphill or downhill grades, cruise control    ! Vehicles with automatic transmission*:            Setting a higher speed
may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once   Moving the gear selector lever to position N
                                                                                                          Lift cruise control lever to position 1
the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.   while driving also cancels cruise control. Howev-
                                                  er, the gear selector lever should not be moved         and hold it up until the desired speed is
                                                  to position N while driving, except to coast when       reached.
Canceling cruise control
                                                  the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy       Release cruise control lever.
There are several ways to cancel cruise           roads).
control:                                                                                                  The new speed is set.
                                                  i Vehicles with manual transmission: The set
     Step on the brake pedal.                     cruise controlled speed is switched off when de-    i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
                                                  clutching exceeds 4 seconds during shifting a       deactivate cruise control. After brief accelera-
     Cruise control is canceled. The last                                                             tion (e.g. for passing), cruise control will resume
                                                  new gear.
     speed set is stored for later use.                                                               the last speed set.
or                                                i The last stored speed is canceled when you
                                                  turn off the engine.
     Briefly push the cruise control lever to
     position 3.
     Cruise control is canceled. The last
     speed set is stored for later use.




228
                                                                                                                Controls in detail
                                                                                                                    Driving systems


Setting a lower speed                               Fine adjustment in 1 mph                 Setting to last stored speed
                                                    (Canada: 1 km/h) increments              “Resume” function)
    Depress cruise control lever to
    position 2 and hold it down until the
    desired speed is reached.
                                                    Faster
                                                                                              Warning!                              G
                                                       Briefly tip cruise control lever in
    Release cruise control lever.
                                                       direction of arrow 1.                  The speed stored in memory should only be
    The new speed is set.                                                                     set again if prevailing road conditions per-
                                                    Slower                                    mit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
i Vehicles with automatic transmission*:                                                      differences arising from returning to preset
When you use the cruise control lever to deceler-      Briefly tip cruise control lever in
ate, the transmission will automatically down-                                                speed could cause an accident and/or seri-
                                                       direction of arrow 2.
shift if the engine’s braking power does not                                                  ous injury to you and others.
brake the vehicle sufficiently.
                                                                                                Briefly push cruise control lever to
                                                                                                position 4.
                                                                                                The cruise control resumes the last set
                                                                                                speed.
                                                                                                Remove your foot from the accelerator
                                                                                                pedal.




                                                                                                                                     229
Controls in detail
Loading


Roof rack*                                                                                 Ski sack* (Canada only)


 Warning!                                 G
 Only use roof racks approved by
 Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to
 avoid damage to the vehicle.
 Follow the manufacturer’s installation in-
 structions. Otherwise, an improperly at-
 tached roof rack system or its load could          Mount the roof rack only between the
 become detached from the vehicle.                  fastening points (see arrows).
                                                                                           1 Handle
 Do not exceed the maximum roof load of             Secure the roof rack according to      2 Cover
 220 lbs (100 kg).                                  manufacturer’s instructions for        3 Armrest
 Take into consideration that when the roof
                                                    installation.
 rack is loaded, the handling characteristics                                              Unfolding and loading
 are different from those when operating the                                                   Fold armrest 3 down (arrow).
 vehicles without the roof rack loaded.
                                                                                           ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
                                                                                           against the armrest when it is folded down, as
! Load the roof rack in such a way that the ve-                                            you could otherwise damage it.
hicle cannot be damaged while driving.
                                                                                               Pull handle 1 and swing cover 2
Make sure
                                                                                               down.
   you can fully raise the tilt/sliding sunroof*.
   you can fully open the trunk.


230
                                                                                           Controls in detail
                                                                                                           Loading




4 Hook and loop fastener                   5 Button                       From trunk, slide skis into ski sack.
   Unfasten hook and loop fastener 4.        Open trunk lid.
   Pull ski sack into passenger compart-     Press button 5.            Warning!                               G
   ment and unfold.                          The flap opens downward.   The ski sack is designed for up to four pairs
                                                                        of skis. Do not load the ski sack with other
                                                                        objects.
                                                                        Always fasten the ski sack securely. In an
                                                                        accident, an unfastened ski sack can cause
                                                                        injury to vehicle occupants.




                                                                                                                231
Controls in detail
Loading


                                                                                         Unloading and folding
                                                                                            Loosen the straps.
                                                                                            Disconnect hook 7 from eye 8.
                                                                                            Unload skis.
                                                                                            Close flap in trunk.
                                                                                            Fold and flatten ski sack lengthwise.
                                                                                            Place folded ski sack inside recess of
                                                                                            backrest.
6 Strap                                        7 Hook
                                               8 Eye                                        Fasten hook and loop fastener.
  Tighten strap 6 by pulling at the loose
  end (arrow) until the skis in the ski sack     Connect hook 7 to eye 8.                   Close ski sack compartment cover.
  are tightly secured.
                                                 Tighten strap by pulling at the loose
                                                 end (arrow).




232
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Loading


Removing the ski sack                                                                      Split rear bench seat*
You can remove the ski sack for cleaning
                                            Warning!                                   G
                                                                                           To expand the cargo area, you can fold
or drying.                                  Never drive vehicle with trunk open while      down the left and right rear seat backrests.
                                            the ski sack is removed. Deadly carbon
                                                                                           The two sections can be folded down
                                            monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
                                                                                           separately.
                                            terior, resulting in unconsciousness and
                                            death.
                                                                                            Warning!                               G
                                           i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac-       When expanding the luggage area, always
                                           cessing the trunk, always close the flap.
                                                                                            fold the seat cushions fully forward.
                                           Installing the ski sack                          Unless you are transporting cargo, the
                                                                                            backrests must remain properly locked in
1 Button                                   Install the ski sack in the reverse order.
                                                                                            the upright position.
2 Ski sack frame
                                               Push ski sack frame 2 with ski sack          In an accident, during hard braking or
3 Flap
                                               inward until the ski sack frame snaps        sudden maneuvers, loose items will be
   Open trunk lid.                             into place.                                  thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause
   Press button 1.                             Close flap 3.                                injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
                                                                                            are securely fastened in the vehicle.
   The flap 3 opens downward.                  Close trunk lid.
                                                                                            Always use the cargo tie down rings*
   Press button 1 firmly until ski sack
                                                                                            ( page 236).
   frame 2 is released.
   Pull ski sack frame 2 with ski sack
   out.


                                                                                                                                   233
Controls in detail
Loading


Folding the backrest forward                                                               Returning the backrest to original
                                                                                           position
The release handle 1 is located in the
trunk.




                                             Pull release handle 2.
                                             Fold seat cushion 3 forward.
                                                                                              Fold backrest 2 rearward until it
                                             Fold backrest 4 forward.                         engages.
   Pull release handle 1.
   Fully retract and fold rearward head   ! Always release the seat cushion and fold it       Fold seat cushion 1 rearward until it
                                          forward before folding the seat backrests for-      locks into position.
   restraints ( page 103).                ward. Otherwise, the backrest covering may be
                                          damaged.




234
                                                                                                                       Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                      Loading


                                                                                                    Loading instructions
                                                Warning!                                 G
                                                If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
                                                up, then the backrest is not properly locked
                                                into position.
                                                Always lock backrest in its upright position
                                                when rear seat bench is occupied, cargo is
                                                being carried in the trunk, or the extended
                                                cargo compartment is not in use. Check for
If the backrest is not locked into position,    secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
a red indicator 3 will be visible.              backrest.
                                                                                                    The total load weight including vehicle
   Check for secure locking by pushing          In an accident, during hard braking or sud-         occupants and luggage/cargo should not
   and pulling on the backrest.                 den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown           exceed the load limit indicated on the cor-
                                                around inside the vehicle, and cause injury         responding placard located on the driver’s
                                                to vehicle occupants unless the items are           door B-pillar.
                                                securely fastened in the vehicle.
                                                                                                    The handling characteristics of a fully load-
                                                To help avoid personal injury during a              ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
                                                collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care         tribution. It is therefore recommended to
                                                when transporting cargo.                            load the vehicle according to the illustra-
                                                                                                    tions shown, with the heaviest items being
                                               i To prevent unauthorized persons from ac-           placed towards the front of the vehicle.
                                               cess to the trunk, always lock backrest in its up-
                                               right position.



                                                                                                                                           235
Controls in detail
Loading


Always place items being carried against                                                           Cargo tie-down rings*
                                                  To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
                                                  sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
them as securely as possible.                                                                      The four cargo tie-down rings are located
                                                  when transporting cargo.
                                                                                                   in the trunk.
The heaviest portion of the cargo should al-      Never drive vehicle with trunk open. Deadly
ways be kept as low as possible since it in-      carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter ve-
fluences the handling characteristics of          hicle interior resulting in unconsciousness
the vehicle.                                      and death.

 Warning!                               G        i The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob-
                                                 jects.
 Always fasten items being carried as secure-
                                                 The enlarged cargo area should only be used for
 ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and   items which do not fit in the trunk alone.
 fastening materials appropriate for the
 weight and size of the load.                                                                      Cargo tie-down rings
 In an accident, during hard braking or sud-                                                          Carefully secure cargo by applying
 den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown                                                            even load on all rings with rope
 around inside the vehicle and can cause in-                                                          sufficient strength to hold down the
 jury to vehicle occupants unless the items                                                           cargo.
 are securely fastened in the vehicle.
                                                                                                      Always follow loading instructions
                                                                                                      ( page 235).




236
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                                            Useful features
  Useful features
Storage compartments                              Glove box


 Warning!                                G
 Do not store any flammable substances in-
 side the vehicle or in the trunk. Otherwise
 the flammable substances could ignite and
 start a fire inside the vehicle.
 To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
 sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care                                                               1 Unlocking
 when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-    1 Glove box lid release                             2 Locking
 gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not   2 Glove box lid
 pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat                                                           Locking glove box
 backs. Do not place anything on the shelf        Opening glove box
                                                                                                         Insert mechanical key ( page 361)
 below the rear window.                               Pull glove box lid release 1.                      into the glove box lock and turn it to
 Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy                                                                position 2.
                                                      The glove box lid 2 opens downward.
 objects.
 Keep compartment lids closed. This will help                                                         Unlocking glove box
                                                  Closing glove box
 to prevent stored objects from being thrown                                                             Turn mechanical key in the glove box
                                                      Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
 about and injuring vehicle occupants during                                                             lock to position 1.
 an accident.                                     i Audio system/COMAND* with CD chang-
                                                  er*: The CD changer* is located in the glove box.




                                                                                                                                           237
Controls in detail
Useful features


Storage compartment/telephone* tray         Closing storage compartment                      Armrest in the rear passenger
under front center armrest                                                                   compartment
                                               Press armrest down until it engages
A flat storage tray with a deeper storage      into place.
compartment underneath is located below
the front center armrest. Both can be       Opening the storage tray/telephone*
opened separately.                          tray
                                               Press button 3 on driver’s side or
                                               button 2 on passenger side and lift
                                               armrest.

                                            Closing the storage tray/telephone*
                                            tray                                                 Pull the top of the armrest out and fold
                                               Press armrest down until it engages               it down.
                                               into place.                                   ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
                                                                                             against the armrest when it is folded down, as
                                            i The mobile phone cradle ( page 245), the       you could otherwise damage it.
1 Handle to open storage compartment        Roadside Assistance button • ( page 250)
2 Button to open storage tray/tele-         and the Information button ¡ ( page 251)
  phone* tray, passenger side               are located in the storage tray (if equipped).
3 Button to open storage tray/tele-
  phone* tray, driver’s side

Opening storage compartment
   Pull handle 1 and lift armrest.



238
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                          Useful features


Parcel net in front passenger footwell           Cup holders
                                                                                                   Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
(all models, except C 280 4MATIC and
                                                                                                   holder may come loose during braking, vehi-
C 350 4MATIC)
A small convenience parcel net is located
                                                  Warning!                               G         cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
                                                                                                   thrown around in the vehicle interior.
in the front passenger footwell. It is for                                                         Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
                                                  In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
small and light items, such as road maps,                                                          or may cause an accident and/or serious
                                                  vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
mail, etc.                                                                                         personal injury.
                                                  ment, only use containers that fit into the
                                                  cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
 Warning!                                 G       do not fill containers to a height where the    Cup holders in front of seat armrest
                                                  contents, especially hot liquids, could spill   Underneath the swiveling cup holder is
 The parcel net is intended for storing           during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an ac-    another stationary cup holder. You can
 light-weight items only.                         cident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants    only use this when the swiveling cup holder
 Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or       may cause serious personal injury. Liquids      is pulled out and completely turned
 fragile objects may not be transported in the    spilled on vehicle equipment may cause          outward.
 parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak-    damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
 ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be          Limited Warranty.
 thrown around inside the vehicle and cause       When not in use, keep the cup holder
 injury to vehicle occupants.                     closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
 The parcel net cannot protect transported        to you or others when contacted during
 goods in the event of an accident.               braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
                                                  dent.




                                                                                                                                          239
Controls in detail
Useful features


Sliding out swiveling cup holder                   Turning swiveling cup holder outward     Turning swiveling cup holder inward and
                                                                                            sliding it in




    Push button 1.                                    Turn the cup holder in direction of
    The cup holder slides upward.                     arrow 2 until it engages.                Turn the cup holder in direction of
                                                      You can now use both cup holders.        arrow 3 until it engages.
! No objects should be in the swiveling cup                                                    Press the cup holder in direction of
holder when the swiveling cup holder is slid up-
ward. Otherwise the swiveling cup holder or the                                                arrow 4 until it engages.
objects could be damaged.
                                                                                            ! No objects should be in the stationary cup
                                                                                            holder when the swiveling cup holder is turned
                                                                                            inward and pushed in. Otherwise the swiveling
                                                                                            cup holder or the objects could be damaged.




240
                                                                                                              Controls in detail
                                                                                                                   Useful features


Cup holder in rear seat armrest                  Ashtrays                                  Removing ashtray insert

                                                 Center console ashtray                     Warning!                              G
                                                                                            Remove front ashtray only with vehicle
                                                                                            standing still. Set the parking brake to
                                                                                            secure vehicle from movement. Move gear
                                                                                            selector lever to position N (manual trans-
                                                                                            mission: second gear). With gear selector
                                                                                            lever in position N (manual transmission:
                                                                                            second gear) turn off the engine.
1 Cup holder
                                                                                              Secure vehicle from movement by
Opening cup holder
                                                 1 Cover plate                                setting the parking brake.
    Briefly press the front of cup holder 1.     2 Sliding button
                                                                                              Move the gear selector lever to
    The cup holder slides out slightly.          3 Ashtray insert
                                                                                              position N (manual transmission:
    Pull out the cup holder until it stops.         Briefly press the bottom of cover         second gear).
                                                    plate 1.
                                                                                              Now you have more room to take out
Closing cup holder                                  The cover plate opens automatically.      the ashtray insert.
    Slide cup holder back until it engages.                                                   Push sliding button 2 to the right.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight                                                      The ashtray insert 3 slides out
against the armrest when it is folded down, as                                                slightly.
you could otherwise damage it.
                                                                                              Remove the ashtray insert.


                                                                                                                                   241
Controls in detail
Useful features


Reinstalling ashtray insert              Removing ashtray insert                  Cigarette lighter
   Push the ashtray insert 3 down into      Push button 1 to disengage ashtray
                                            insert 2 and remove it.
   the retainer until it engages.
                                                                                   Warning!                               G
   Push down cover plate 1 to close
                                         Reinstalling ashtray insert
   ashtray.                                                                        Never touch the heating element or sides of
   The cover plate engages.                 Push the ashtray insert 2 down into    the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
                                            the retainer until it engages.         knob only.
Rear seat ashtray                           Push at top of cover 3 to close        Make sure that any children traveling with
                                            ashtray.                               you do not injure themselves or start a fire
                                                                                   with the hot cigarette lighter.
                                                                                   When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
                                                                                   SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
                                                                                   with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
                                                                                   children unattended in the vehicle, or with
                                                                                   access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
                                                                                   unsupervised access to a vehicle could
                                                                                   result in an accident and/or serious
                                                                                   personal injury.
1 Button
2 Ashtray insert
                                                                                     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
3 Cover
   Pull at top of cover 3.




242
                                                                                                                   Controls in detail
                                                                                                                        Useful features


                                          ! The lighter socket can be used to accommo-         Power outlet
                                          date 12V DC electrical accessories (up to a max-
                                          imum of 85 W) designed for use with the              The power outlet is located in the rear pas-
                                          standard “cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in      senger compartment.
                                          mind, however, that connecting accessories to
                                          the lighter socket (for example extensive con-
                                          necting and disconnecting, or using plugs that do
                                          not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket.
                                          With the socket damaged, the lighter may no
                                          longer be able to be placed in the heating
                                          (pushed-in) position, or the lighter may pop out
1 Cover plate                             too early with the lighter not hot enough.
2 Cigarette lighter                       To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
                                          socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-
   Briefly press the bottom of cover      trical accessories designed for use with the stan-
   plate 1.                               dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V
                                                                                               1 Power outlet
                                          power outlets ( page 243) in your vehicle
   The cover plate opens automatically.   whenever possible.                                   2 Cover
   Push in cigarette lighter 2.               Push down cover plate 1 to close                     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
   The cigarette lighter will pop out         ashtray.                                             Pull at top of cover 2.
   automatically when hot.
                                              The cover plate engages.                             Flip cover 1 to the left and insert
                                                                                                   electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).
                                                                                               i The power outlet can be used to
                                                                                               accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
                                                                                               (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
                                                                                               of 180 W.


                                                                                                                                         243
Controls in detail
Useful features


Telephone*                                                                                                i Various mobile phone cradles can be in-
                                                       Warning!                                 G         stalled in the front center armrest, see separate
                                                                                                          installation instructions for the mobile phone
 Warning!                                 G            Please do not forget that your primary re-         cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
                                                       sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s   tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
 Never operate radio transmitters equipped             attention to the road must always be               ter.
 with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-       his/her primary focus when driving. For            The functions and services available to you while
 out being connected to an external antenna)           your safety and the safety of others, we rec-      using the mobile phone depend on your service
 from inside the vehicle while the engine is           ommend that you pull over to a safe location       provider and the type of mobile phone you are
                                                                                                          using. See also separate operating manual for in-
 running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-            and stop before placing or taking a tele-
                                                                                                          structions on how to use your mobile phone.
 tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-         phone call.
 sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious                                                            When the mobile phone is inserted in the
                                                       If you choose to use the telephone1 while
 personal injury.                                                                                         cradle, you can operate the telephone us-
                                                       driving, please use the hands-free device
                                                                                                          ing the following devices:
                                                       and only use the telephone when road,
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-           weather and traffic conditions permit. Some            mobile phone keypad
phone or a citizens band unit, should only             jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
                                                                                                              COMAND* (see separate operating in-
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-            mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
                                                                                                              structions)
nected to an antenna that is installed on              Only operate the COMAND*1 if road, weath-
the outside of the vehicle.                                                                                   buttons s and t on the multi-
                                                       er and traffic conditions permit.
                                                                                                              function steering wheel ( page 122)
The external antenna must be approved by               Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-                                                                       audio system ( page 208)
                                                       (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-                covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
tion on the installation of an approved                ly 14 m) every second.
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
                                                   1
mitter operation instructions regarding use            Observe all legal requirements.
of an external antenna.

244
                                                                                                                    Controls in detail
                                                                                                                         Useful features


Please note that these functions are only            If applicable, remove the cover for the        Push the top of the mobile phone in di-
available with Mercedes-Benz approved                external antenna connection from the           rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the
mobile phones. Please contact an                     back of the mobile phone and store it in       mobile phone release button engages.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for in-              a safe place. Be sure to comply with the
                                                                                                    The mobile phone is connected to the
formation on features available for your             mobile phone’s operating instructions
                                                                                                    network via the external antenna.
mobile phone of choice.                              as well.
                                                                                                    The mobile phone is linked to the
The cradle is located in the front center
                                                                                                    hands-free device and the multifunc-
armrest.
                                                                                                    tion steering wheel.
   Open telephone tray ( page 238).                                                                 The battery is charged depending on its
                                                                                                    charge status and the position of the
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone                                                              SmartKey in the starter switch. The
cradle                                                                                              charge procedure will be indicated in
Once the mobile phone has been inserted                                                             the mobile phone’s display.
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to                                                         You can place or receive phone calls. You
use the hands-free device to respond dur-                                                       can control other functions of the mobile
ing phone calls.                                  Example illustration
                                                                                                phone via the control system
                                                  1 Insert the mobile phone
! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along                                                   ( page 146), audio system ( page 208),
with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the   2 Connector contact                           COMAND* (see separate operating
mobile phone cradle.                              3 Mobile phone cradle                         instructions).
                                                     Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
                                                     into connector contact 2 on
                                                                                                i When you take the SmartKey out of the
                                                                                                starter switch, the mobile phone remains
                                                     cradle 3.                                  switched on for approx. 10 minutes. If you place
                                                                                                or receive a call during this time, the mobile
                                                                                                phone switches off 10 minutes after the call has
                                                                                                been completed.

                                                                                                                                          245
Controls in detail
Useful features


Removing mobile phone from mobile                     Changing mobile phone cradle                 Installing a different mobile phone cra-
phone cradle                                          If you require a different cradle for your   dle
                                                      mobile phone, remove the present cradle
                                                      before installing a new one.

                                                      Removing an existing mobile phone cra-
                                                      dle




Example illustration                                                                               Example illustration
1 Release catch for mobile phone                                                                   1 Contact plate
2 Mobile phone cradle                                                                              2 Recesses
                                                                                                   3 Mobile phone cradle
i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a                                                      Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis-   Example illustration                            recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
connected.                                            1 To release the mobile phone cradle
                                                                                                      Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
    Press release catch in direction of               2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
                                                                                                      until it engages.
    arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of              3 Mobile phone cradle
    mobile phone cradle 2.                               Press release button in direction of
                                                         arrow 1 and take mobile phone
                                                         cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2.


246
                                                                                                                         Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Useful features


Tele Aid*                                            The Tele Aid system                            system or COMAND* System control
                                                                                                    counterclockwise or press button ç on
                                                     (Telematic Alarm Identification on
! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system      Demand)
                                                                                                    the multifunction steering wheel.
may only be performed by completing the sub-
scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance                                                           To activate, press the SOS button, the
                                                     The Tele Aid system consists of three
call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete                                                            Roadside Assistance button • or
                                                     types of response:
either of these steps will result in a system that                                                      the Information button ¡, depend-
is not activated.                                       automatic and manual emergency                  ing on the type of response required.
If you have any questions regarding activation,         roadside assistance                         i The SOS button is located in the overhead
please call the Response Center at                                                                  control panel ( page 249).
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or                          information
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).                                                                         The Roadside Assistance button • and the
                                                     The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
                                                                                                    Information button ¡ are located in the arm-
Shortly after the completion of your Tele            ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,     rest storage compartment ( page 238).
Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a            properly connected, not damaged and cel-
user ID and password. By visiting                    lular and GPS coverage is available.           ! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular net-
                                                                                                    work for communication and the GPS (Global Po-
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”               The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can      sitioning System) satellites for vehicle location.
(USA only), you will have access to account          be adjusted when using the volume control      If either of these signals are unavailable, the
information, remote door unlock and                  on the audio system or COMAND* System          Tele Aid system may not function and if this oc-
more.                                                or on the multifunction steering wheel. To     curs, assistance must be summoned by other
                                                     raise, turn the rotary volume control on au-   means.
                                                     dio system or COMAND* System clock-
                                                     wise or press button æ on the
                                                     multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
                                                     turn the rotary volume control on audio




                                                                                                                                               247
Controls in detail
Useful features


i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the         than 10 seconds or do not come on). The         Emergency calls
audio system or COMAND* System unit is muted           message malfunction Visit workshop
                                                                                                       An emergency call is initiated automatical-
and the selected mode (radio, tape or CD) paus-        appears in the multifunction display.
es. The optional cellular phone (if installed) and                                                     ly following an accident in which the emer-
inserted in cradle switches off. If you must use                                                       gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
this phone, we recommend that you use it only           Warning!                              G        air bags deploy.
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
                                                                                                       An emergency call can also be initiated
Remove the phone from the cradle and place the          If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on
call. The navigation* system (if engaged) will                                                         manually by opening the cover next to the
                                                        the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on
continue to run. The multifunction display in the                                                      interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
                                                        the Information button remain illuminated
instrument cluster is available for use, and spo-                                                      briefly pressing the button located under
                                                        continuously in red and/or the message
ken commands are only available by pressing the                                                        the cover. See ( page 249) for
RPT button on audio system or COMAND* Sys-              malfunction Visit workshop is
                                                                                                       instructions on initiating an emergency call
tem unit. A pop-up window will appear in the au-        displayed in the multifunction display after
                                                                                                       manually.
dio system or COMAND* System unit display to            the system self-check, a malfunction in the
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress. After     system has been detected.                      Once the emergency call is in progress, the
the TeleAid call has ended, the optional cellular                                                      indicator lamp on the SOS button will
phone switches on again. A PIN entry might be           If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
                                                                                                       begin to flash. The message
necessary.                                              above, the system may not operate as
                                                                                                       Connecting Call appears in the multifunc-
                                                        expected. Have the system checked at the
                                                                                                       tion display. When the connection is estab-
System self-check                                       nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
                                                                                                       lished, the message Call connected
                                                        possible.
Initially, after switching on ignition, mal-                                                           appears in the multifunction display. All in-
functions are detected and indicated (the                                                              formation relevant to the emergency, such
indicator lamps in the SOS button, the                                                                 as the location of the vehicle (determined
Roadside Assistance button • and the                                                                   by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
Information button ¡ stay on longer                                                                    cle model, identification number and color
                                                                                                       are generated.


248
                                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                                              Useful features


A voice connection between the Response                                                                 Initiating an emergency call manually
Center and the occupants of the vehicle                Warning!                                G
will be established automatically soon af-
ter the emergency call has been initiated.             If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
The Response Center will attempt to                    flashing continuously and there was no
determine more precisely the nature of the             voice connection to the Response Center
accident provided they can speak to an                 established, then the Tele Aid system could
occupant of the vehicle.                               not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
                                                       vant cellular phone network is not available).
The Tele Aid system is available if                    The message Call failed appears in the
    it has been activated and is operation-            multifunction display for approximately
    al. Activation requires a subscription             10 seconds.
    for monitoring services, connection                Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
    and cellular air time                              moned by other means.
    the relevant cellular phone network
    and GPS signals are available and pass
    the information on to the response cen-                                                             1 Cover
    ter                                                                                                 2 SOS button
                                                                                                           Briefly press on cover 1.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos-
sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from                                                       The cover will open.
the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-
tion on to the Response Center.                                                                            Press SOS button 2 briefly.
                                                                                                           The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
                                                                                                           will flash until the emergency call is
                                                                                                           concluded.


                                                                                                                                             249
Controls in detail
Useful features


   Wait for a voice connection to the             Roadside Assistance button •                    i While the call is connected you can change
   Response Center.                               The Roadside Assistance button • is             to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
                                                                                                  on the audio system or COMAND* System unit.
   Close cover 1 after the emergency              located below the center armrest cover.
   call is concluded.                                                                             A voice connection between the Roadside
                                                     Open the storage compartment under
                                                                                                  Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
                                                     the center armrest ( page 238).
                                                                                                  of the vehicle will be established.
 Warning!                                G           Press and hold button (for longer than
                                                                                                     Describe the nature of the need for
                                                     2 seconds).
 If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the                                                      assistance.
 vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,         A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
                                                                                                  The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
 vehicle in a dangerous road location), please       Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
                                                                                                  dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
 do not wait for voice contact after you have        The button will flash while the call is in
                                                                                                  Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
 pressed the emergency button. Carefully             progress. The message
                                                                                                  tow your vehicle to the nearest
 leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-          Connecting call will appear in the
                                                                                                  Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such
 tion. The Response Center will automatically        multifunction display.
                                                                                                  as labor and/or towing, charges may ap-
 contact local emergency officials with the       When the connection is established, the         ply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance Man-
 vehicle’s approximate location if they re-       message Call connected appears in the           ual for more information.
 ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot         multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
 make voice contact with the vehicle occu-                                                        These programs are only available in the
                                                  will transmit data generating the vehicle
 pants.                                                                                           USA:
                                                  identification number, model, color and
                                                  location (subject to availability of cellular      Sign and Drive services: Services such
                                                  and GPS signals).                                  as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
                                                                                                     the replacement of a flat tire with the
                                                                                                     vehicle spare tire are obtainable.




250
                                                                                                                            Controls in detail
                                                                                                                                  Useful features


i The indicator lamp on the Roadside                  Information button ¡                             A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance button • remains illuminated in                                                             Assistance Center representative and the
                                                      The Information button ¡ is located
red for approximately 10 seconds during the sys-                                                       occupants of the vehicle will be estab-
tem self-check after switching on the ignition (to-   below the center armrest cover.
                                                                                                       lished. Information regarding the operation
gether with the SOS button and the Information           Open the storage compartment under            of your vehicle, the nearest
button ¡).                                               the center armrest ( page 238).               Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz
See system self-check ( page 248) if the indi-                                                         USA products and services is available to
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on           Press and hold button (for longer than
                                                         2 seconds).                                   you.
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance         A call to the Customer Assistance             For more details concerning the Tele Aid
button • is flashing continuously and there              Center will be initiated. The button will     system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
was no voice connection to the Response Center           flash while the call is in progress. The      use your ID and password (sent to you sep-
established, then the Tele Aid system could not          message Connecting call will appear           arately) to learn more (USA only).
initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vant cellular phone network was not available).
                                                         in the multifunction display.                 i The indicator lamp in the Information
The message Call failed appears in the mul-           When the connection is established, the          button ¡ remains illuminated in red for ap-
tifunction display.                                   message Call connected appears in the            proximately 10 seconds during the system
                                                                                                       self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth-
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us-       multifunction display. The Tele Aid system       er with the SOS button and the Roadside
ing the t button on the multifunction steer-          will transmit data generating the vehicle        Assistance button •).
ing wheel or the END Button on the audio system       identification number, model, color and lo-
or COMAND* System.                                                                                     See system self-check ( page 248) if the indi-
                                                      cation (subject to availability of cellular      cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
                                                      and GPS signals).                                longer than approximately 10 seconds.
                                                      i While the call is connected, you can change
                                                      to the navigation menu by pressing NAVI button
                                                      on the audio system or COMAND* System.




                                                                                                                                                   251
Controls in detail
Useful features

If the indicator lamp in the Information               Call priority                                     Remote door unlock
button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center         If other service calls such as a Roadside         In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
established, then the Tele Aid system could not        Assistance call or Information call are           tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel-   active, an Emergency call is still possible.      and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
lular phone network is not available). The mes-        In this case, the Emergency call will take
sage Call failed appears in the multifunction                                                               Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
                                                       priority and override all other active calls.
display.                                                                                                    Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
                                                       i The indicator lamp in the respective button        or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Information calls can be terminated using
the t button on the multifunction steering             flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
                                                                                                            You will be asked to provide your pass-
wheel or the END Button on the audio system or         calls can only be terminated by a Response Cen-
                                                       ter or Customer Assistance Center representa-        word which you provided when you
COMAND* System.                                                                                             completed the subscriber agreement.
                                                       tive, whereas Roadside Assistance and
! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing         Information calls can also be terminated by          Then return to your vehicle and pull the
after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-      pressing button t on the multifunction steer-
minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
                                                                                                            trunk recessed handle for a minimum
                                                       ing wheel or using the END button on the audio
has detected a malfunction or the service is not       system or COMAND* System.                            of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit                                                        flashing.
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have          ! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or        The message Connecting call
the system checked or contact the Response             the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or               Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or             appears in the multifunction display.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possi-           1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz      As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
ble.                                                   Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
                                                                                                         cle via Internet using the ID and password
                                                       (1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Ser-
                                                       vice at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada.                 sent to you shortly after the completion of
                                                                                                         your acquaintance call.
                                                                                                         The Response Center will then unlock your
                                                                                                         vehicle with the remote door unlocking
                                                                                                         feature.


252
                                                                                                                          Controls in detail
                                                                                                                               Useful features


i The remote door unlock feature is available         Stolen Vehicle Recovery services                  Garage door opener*
if the relevant cellular phone network is avail-
                                                      In the event your vehicle was stolen:
able.                                                                                                   The integrated remote control is capable of
The SOS button will flash and the message                 Report the incident to the police.            operating up to three separately controlled
Connecting call will appear in the multifunc-             The police will issue a numbered              devices. It provides a convenient way to re-
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
                                                          incident report.                              place up to three hand-held remote con-
command.                                                                                                trols used to operate devices such as
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center           Pass this number on to the                    garage door openers, gate openers, or oth-
specialist may attempt to establish voice contact         Mercedes-Benz Response Center along           er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
with the vehicle occupants.                               with your password issued to you when         some other systems.
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for            you subscribed to the service.
                                                                                                        Before the integrated remote control can
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho-            The Response Center will then attempt
rization was received by the Response Center,                                                           be used, it must be programmed to the ga-
                                                          to covertly contact the vehicle’s             rage door opener, gate operator or other
you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail-
gate recessed handle again.                               Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is          device you wish to operate. See the follow-
                                                          located, the Response Center will             ing instructions for programming informa-
                                                          contact the local law enforcement and         tion.
                                                          you. The vehicle’s location will only be
                                                          provided to law enforcement.
                                                      i When the anti-theft alarm* stays on for
                                                      more than 30 seconds, a call is initiated auto-
                                                      matically to the Response Center. See
                                                      “Anti-theft alarm system*” ( page 89).




                                                                                                                                              253
Controls in detail
Useful features



                                                Warning!                              G         When programming a garage door opener,
                                                                                                park outside the garage.
                                                Before programming the integrated remote        Do not run the engine while programming
                                                control to a garage door opener or gate         the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
                                                operator, make sure people and objects are      exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
                                                out of the way of the device to prevent po-     exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
                                                tential harm or damage. When programming        (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious-
                                                a garage door opener, the door moves up or      ness and possible death.
                                                down. When programming a gate operator,
Interior rear view mirror with integrated re-   the gate opens or closes.                      Programming the integrated remote
mote control                                                                                   control
                                                Do not use the integrated remote control
1          Indicator lamp                       with any garage door opener that lacks         Step 1:
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button                 safety stop and reverse features as required
                                                by U.S. federal safety standards (this            Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
Needed for programming (not part of vehi-       includes any garage door opener model          Step 2:
cle equipment):                                 manufactured before April 1, 1982).
                                                                                                  If you have previously programmed a
5          Hand-held remote control of ga-      A garage door that cannot detect an object
                                                                                                  signal transmitter button and wish to
           rage door opener, gate operator      - signaling the door to stop and reverse -
                                                                                                  retain its programming, proceed to
           or other device                      does not meet current U.S. federal safety
                                                                                                  step 3.
                                                standards.
6          Hand-held remote control but-
                                                                                                  If you are programming the integrated
           ton
                                                                                                  remote control for the first time, press
                                                                                                  and hold the two outer signal transmit-
                                                                                                  ter buttons 2 and 4 and release
                                                                                                  them only when indicator lamp 1 be-

254
                                                                                                                     Controls in detail
                                                                                                                          Useful features


   gins to flash after approximately              mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not                 If indicator lamp 1 stays on
   20 seconds (do not hold the button for         release the buttons until step 5 is com-          constantly, programming is complete
   longer than 30 seconds). This proce-           pleted.                                           and your device should activate when
   dure erases any previous settings for          Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
                                                                                                    the respective signal transmitter
   all three channels and initializes the                                                           button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
                                                  and then rapidly.
   memory.                                                                                          leased.
   If you later wish to program a second      i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
                                              first time the signal transmitter button is pro-   i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
   and/or third hand-held transmitter to      grammed. If this button has already been pro-      2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
   the remaining two signal transmitter       grammed, the indicator lamp will only start        continue with programming steps 8 through 12
   buttons, do not repeat this step and be-   flashing after 20 seconds.                         as your garage door opener may be equipped
   gin directly with step 3.                                                                     with the “rolling code” feature.
                                              Step 5:
Step 3:                                                                                          Step 7:
                                                  After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
   Hold the end of hand-held remote                                                                 To program the remaining two signal
                                                  slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
   control 5 of the device you wish to                                                              transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
                                                  the hand-held remote control button
   train approximately 2 to 5 in                                                                    above starting with step 3.
                                                  and the signal transmitter button.
   (5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans-
                                              Step 6:                                            Rolling code programming
   mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro-
   grammed, while keeping indicator               Press and hold the just-trained signal         To train a garage door opener (or other
   lamp 1 in view.                                transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and             rolling code devices) with the rolling code
                                                  observe indicator lamp 1.                      feature, follow these instructions after
Step 4:
                                                                                                 completing the “Programming” portion
   Using both hands, simultaneously                                                              (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
   press hand-held remote control                                                                person may make the following training
   button 6 and the desired signal trans-                                                        procedures quicker and easier.)


                                                                                                                                          255
Controls in detail
Useful features


Step 8:                                        Step 11:                                         Gate operator/Canadian programming
   Locate “training” button on the garage         Press, hold for 2 seconds and release         Canadian radio-frequency laws require
   door opener motor head unit.                   same signal transmitter button a sec-         transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
                                                  ond time to complete the training             after several seconds of transmission
   Exact location and color of the button
                                                  process.                                      which may not be long enough for the
   may vary by garage door opener brand.
                                                                                                integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
   Depending on manufacturer, the              i Some garage door openers (or other rolling     signal during programming. Similar to this
   “training” button may also be referred      code equipped devices) may require you to
                                               press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same   Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
   to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there
                                               signal transmitter button a third time to com-   are designed to “time-out” in the same
   is difficulty locating the transmitting
                                               plete the training process.                      manner.
   button, refer to the garage door opener
   Operator’s Manual.                          Step 12:                                         If you live in Canada or if you are having
                                                                                                difficulties programming a gate operator
Step 9:                                           Confirm the garage door operation by
                                                                                                (regardless of where you live) by using the
   Press the “training” button on the ga-         pressing the programmed signal trans-
                                                                                                programming procedures, replace step 4
   rage door opener motor head unit.              mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
                                                                                                with the following:
   The “training light” is activated.          Step 13:
                                                                                                Step 4:
You have 30 seconds to initiate the               To program the remaining two signal
                                                                                                   Press and hold the signal transmitter
following step.                                   transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
                                                                                                   button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
                                                  above starting with step 3.
Step 10:                                                                                           this button until it has been successful-
                                                                                                   ly trained.
   Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
   hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-                                                         While still holding down the signal
   grammed signal transmitter button                                                               transmitter button (2, 3 or 4),
   (2, 3 or 4).                                                                                    “cycle” your hand-held remote control
                                                                                                   button 6 as follows: Press and hold

256
                                                                                                                        Controls in detail
                                                                                                                             Useful features


    button 6 for 2 seconds, then release             Reprogramming a single signal trans-          Operation of integrated remote control
    it for 2 seconds, and again press and            mitter button
                                                                                                       Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
    hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se-           To program a device using a signal trans-
    quence on the hand-held remote con-                                                                Select and press the appropriate
                                                     mitter button previously trained, follow
    trol until the frequency signal has been                                                           integrated signal transmitter button
                                                     these steps:
    learned. Upon successful training, indi-                                                           (2, 3 or 4) to activate the remote
    cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then             Switch on the ignition ( page 32).             controlled device.
    rapidly after several seconds.                      Press and hold the desired signal              The integrated remote control trans-
    Proceed with programming step 5 and                 transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).                mitter continues to send the signal as
    step 6 to complete.                                 Do not release the button.                     long as the button is pressed – up to
                                                                                                       20 seconds.
i Upon completion of programming the inte-              Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-
grated remote control, make sure you retain the         ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
                                                                                                   Erasing the integrated remote control
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-         signal transmitter button, proceed with
rage door opener, gate operator or other device.                                                   memory
                                                        programming starting with step 3.
You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu-                                                     Switch on the ignition ( page 32).
ture programming of an integrated remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held                                                       Simultaneously press and hold outer
remote control to operate the respective device                                                        signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4,
in other situations.                                                                                   for approximately 20 seconds, until
                                                                                                       indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do
                                                                                                       not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
                                                                                                       The codes of all three channels are
                                                                                                       erased.
                                                                                                   i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
                                                                                                   three channels.


                                                                                                                                              257
Controls in detail
Useful features


Programming tips                                  If another hand-held remote control is         i USA only:
                                                  available for the same device, try the         This device complies with Part 15 of the
If you are having difficulty programming
                                                  programming steps again using that             FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
the integrated remote control, here are                                                          two conditions:
                                                  other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
                                                  sure new batteries are in the hand-held        (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
   Check the frequency of hand-held re-           remote control before beginning the                ence, and
   mote control 5 (typically located on           procedure.                                     (2) this device must accept any interference re-
   the reverse side of the remote). The in-                                                          ceived, including interference that may
                                                  Straighten the antenna wire from the
   tegrated remote control is compatible                                                             cause undesired operation.
                                                  garage door opener assembly. This
   with radio-frequency devices operating                                                        Any unauthorized modification to this device
                                                  may help improve transmitting and/or
   between 280-390 MHz.                                                                          could void the user’s authority to operate the
                                                  receiving signals.                             equipment.
   Put a new battery in hand-held remote
   control 5. This will increase the likeli-   i Certain types of garage door openers are in- i Canada only:
                                               compatible with the integrated remote control. If
   hood of the hand-held remote control                                                          This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
                                               you should experience further difficulties with   Canada. Operation is subject to the following
   sending a faster and more accurate sig-     programming the integrated remote control,
   nal to the integrated remote control.                                                         two conditions:
                                               contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
                                               call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance            (1) This device may not cause interference, and
   While performing step 3, hold
                                               Center (in the USA only) at                       (2) this device must accept any interference re-
   hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
                                               1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in           ceived, including interference that may
   ent lengths and angles from the signal      Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.                            cause undesired operation of the device.
   transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
   are programming. Attempt varying an-                                                          Any unauthorized modification to this device
                                                                                                 could void the user’s authority to operate the
   gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
                                                                                                 equipment.
   (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
   varying distances.



258
                       Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care




                             259
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)


In the “Operation” section you will find   The more cautiously you treat your vehicle    After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main-   during the break-in period, the more satis-   gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle.       fied you will be with its performance later   speeds to the permissible maximum.
                                           on.                                           All of the above instructions, as may apply
                                              Drive your vehicle during the first        to your vehicle type, also apply when
                                              1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but        driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km)
                                              moderate vehicle and engine speeds.        after the engine or the rear differential has
                                                                                         been replaced.
                                              During this period, avoid heavy loads
                                              (full throttle driving) and excessive      i Always obey applicable speed limits.
                                              engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of
                                              maximum rpm in each gear).
                                              Shift gears in a timely manner.
                                              Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
                                              Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
                                              down by shifting to a lower gear using
                                              the gear selector lever.
                                              Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
                                              driving at moderate speeds (for hill
                                              driving).
                                              Select C as the preferred shift program
                                              ( page 157) for the first 1000 miles
                                              (1500 km).



260
                                                                                                                              Operation
                                                                                                                Driving instructions
   Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel                   Drinking and driving                             Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent,
depends on driving habits and operating       Warning!                               G         Warning!                                G
conditions.
                                              Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs         Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
                                              and driving are very dangerous combina-          structing the pedals’ range of movement.
   Keep tires at the recommended tire         tions. Even a small amount of alcohol or         Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
   inflation pressures.                       drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions      cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
   Remove unnecessary loads.                  and judgment.                                    the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
                                              The possibility of a serious or even fatal       have sufficient clearance.
   Remove roof rack when not in use.
                                              accident are greatly increased when you          During sudden driving or braking maneu-
   Allow engine to warm up under low          drink or take drugs and drive.                   vers, the objects could get caught between
   load use.                                                                                   or beneath the pedals. You could then no
                                              Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
   Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-     anyone to drive who has been drinking or         longer brake or accelerate. This could lead
   eration.                                   taking drugs.                                    to accidents and injury.

   Have all maintenance work performed
   at the intervals specified in the
   Maintenance Booklet and as required
   by the maintenance service display.
   Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
   Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go
traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.

                                                                                                                                        261
Operation
Driving instructions


Power assistance                                  Brakes                                           ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
                                                                                                   Because the ESP® operates automatically, the
                                                                                                   engine must be turned off (SmartKey in starter
 Warning!                                G         Warning!                               G        switch position 0 or 1) when
                                                                                                      the parking brake is being tested on a brake
 With the engine not running, there is no          After driving in heavy rain for some time          test dynamometer
 power assistance for the brake and steering       without applying the brakes or through wa-         the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
 systems. In this case, it is important to keep    ter deep enough to wet brake components,           raised
 in mind that a considerably higher degree of      the first braking action may be somewhat        Active braking action through the ESP® may oth-
 effort is necessary to brake and steer the        reduced and increased pedal pressure may        erwise seriously damage the brake system.
 vehicle.                                          be necessary to obtain expected braking ef-
                                                                                                   For information on vehicles with 4MATIC, see
                                                   fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles    “Four wheel electronic traction system (4MATIC)
                                                   in front.                                       with the ESP® ” ( page 88).
                                                   Resting your foot on the brake pedal will       To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
                                                   cause excessive and premature wear of the       driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
                                                   brake pads.                                     salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
                                                   It can also result in the brakes overheating,   vehicle with considerable force prior to
                                                   thereby significantly reducing their effec-     parking. The heat generated serves to dry
                                                   tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the    the brakes.
                                                   vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-    If your brake system is normally only
                                                   dent.                                           subject to moderate loads, you should
                                                                                                   occasionally test the effectiveness of the
                                                                                                   brakes by applying above-normal braking
                                                                                                   pressure at higher speeds. This will also
                                                                                                   enhance the grip of the brake pads.


262
                                                                                                                                  Operation
                                                                                                                     Driving instructions


                                               All checks and service work on the brake            Driving off
 Warning!                            G         system should be carried out by qualified
                                               technicians only. Contact an authorized             Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
 Make sure not to endanger any other road      Mercedes-Benz Center.                               driving off. Perform this procedure only
 users when carrying out these braking ma-                                                         when the road is clear of other traffic.
 neuvers.                                      Only install brake pads and brake fluid
                                               recommended by Mercedes-Benz.                       Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
                                                                                                   place full load on the engine until the
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist                                                       operating temperature has been reached.
System (BAS) ( page 84).                        Warning!                                G
                                                                                                   ! When starting off on a slippery surface, do
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may      If other than recommended brake pads are           not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
be the reason for low brake fluid level in      installed, or other than recommended brake         period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
the reservoir.                                  fluid is used, the braking properties of the       cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
                                                                                                   not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may      vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
                                                                                                   Warranty.
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the     safe braking is substantially impaired. This
instrument cluster comes on and an              could result in an accident.                       ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
acoustic warning sounds although the                                                               pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
parking brake is released ( page 324).                                                             performance and causes premature brake and
                                               ! When driving down long and steep grades,          drivetrain wear.
Observe additional messages in the multi-      relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
function display that may appear               lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
( page 344).                                   This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
                                               reduces brake pad wear.
Have the brake system inspected
immediately. Contact an authorized             After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
Mercedes-Benz Center.                          on for some time, rather than immediately
                                               park, so that the air stream will cool down
                                               the brakes faster.

                                                                                                                                            263
Operation
Driving instructions


Parking                                                                                   Tires
                                                Automatic transmission*: Move the
                                                gear selector lever to position P.

 Warning!                                G      Slowly release brake pedal.                Warning!                               G
                                                When parked on an incline, always turn
 Do not park this vehicle in areas where        the front wheels towards the road curb.    If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
 combustible materials such as grass, hay or    Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch    ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
 leaves can come into contact with the hot      to position 0 and remove.                  ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
 exhaust system, as these materials could be    Take the SmartKey with you and lock        you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
 ignited and cause a vehicle fire.              the vehicle when leaving.                  ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
 To reduce the risk of personal injury, or                                                 tion to an area which is a safe distance from
 damage to the vehicle or the vehicle                                                      the road.
 drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement,                                              Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
 always do the following before turning off                                                for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
 the engine and leaving the vehicle:                                                       appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
     Keep right foot on brake pedal.                                                       the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
                                                                                           dealer for repairs.
     Manual transmission: Move the gear-
     shift lever to neutral position (no gear
     selected).                                                                           Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
     Firmly depress parking brake pedal.                                                  law. These indicators are located in six
                                                                                          places on the tread circumference and
     Manual transmission: Move the gear-
                                                                                          become visible at a tread depth of
     shift lever into first or reverse gear.
                                                                                          approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which
                                                                                          point the tire is considered worn and
                                                                                          should be replaced.


264
                                                                                                                                       Operation
                                                                                                                          Driving instructions


The treadwear indicator appears as a solid                                                              Tire traction
band across the tread.                             Warning!                                    G
                                                                                                        The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
                                                   Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects   icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
 Warning!                                G         the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
                                                                                                        You should pay particular attention to the
                                                   may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
 Although the applicable federal motor                                                                  condition of the road whenever the outside
                                                   driving with a flat tire or driving at high
 vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be                                                              temperatures are close to the freezing
                                                   speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
 worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)                                                               point.
                                                   heat build-up and possibly a fire.
 become visible at approximately 1/16 in
 (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
                                                  For more information, see “Tires and                   Warning!                               G
 allow your tires to wear down to that level.
 As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),         wheels” ( page 281).
                                                                                                         If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
 the adhesion properties on a wet road are                                                               will be substantially reduced. Under such
 sharply reduced.                                 Hydroplaning
                                                                                                         weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
 Depending upon the weather and/or road           Depending on the depth of the water layer              with extreme caution.
 surface (conditions), the tire traction varies   on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
 widely.                                          at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
                                                  vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Specified tire inflation pressures must be        road and apply brakes cautiously in the
maintained. This applies particularly if the      rain.
tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high
speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper-
atures).




                                                                                                                                                  265
Operation
Driving instructions


Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires             Tire speed rating                               The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
( page 308) with a minimum tread depth                                                            may have a tire speed rating above the
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four        Regardless of the tire speed rating, local      maximum speed permitted by the
wheels for the winter season to ensure            speed limits should be obeyed. Use              electronic speed limiter.
normal balanced handling characteristics.         prudent driving speeds appropriate to
                                                                                                  Make sure your tires have the required tire
On packed snow, they can reduce your              prevailing conditions.
                                                                                                  speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
stopping distance compared to summer                                                              the "Technical data" section ( page 403),
tires. Stopping distance, however, is still        Warning!                               G       for example when purchasing new tires.
considerably greater than when the road is
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise ap-                                                        For Information on how to identify the tire
                                                   Even when permitted by law, never operate
propriate caution.                                                                                speed rating on a tire’s sidewall, see “Tire
                                                   a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
                                                                                                  size designation, load and speed rating”
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may        mum speed rating of the tires.
                                                                                                  ( page 295).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is    Exceeding the maximum speed for which
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-      tires are rated can lead to sudden tire        If you are uncertain about the correct read-
ranty.                                                                                            ing of the information given on a tire’s side-
                                                   failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
                                                   possibly resulting in an accident and/or       wall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                   personal injury and possible death, for you    Center will be glad to assist you.
                                                   and for others.                                i For information on speed rating for winter
                                                                                                  tires, see “Winter tires” ( page 308).
                                                  An electronic speed limiter prevents your       For additional general information on tire speed
                                                  vehicle from exceeding a speed                  markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating”
                                                  of 130 mph (210 km/h).                          ( page 297).




266
                                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                                 Driving instructions


Winter driving instructions                      Road salts and chemicals can adversely
                                                 affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal     Warning!                                G
The most important rule for slippery or icy      force may become necessary to produce
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid          the normal braking effect.                     If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering                                                       sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
                                                 Depressing the brake pedal periodically        and from around the vehicle with the engine
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
                                                 when traveling at length on salt-strewn        running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monox-
system under such conditions.
                                                 roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking     ide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior re-
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,       efficiency back to normal.                     sulting in unconsciousness and death.
move gear selector lever to position N or in
                                                 If the vehicle is parked after being driven    To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
case of manual transmission declutch.
                                                 on salt-treated roads, the braking             open a window slightly on the side of the
Try to keep the vehicle under control by
                                                 efficiency should be tested as soon as         vehicle not facing the wind.
corrective steering action.
                                                 possible after driving is resumed.
i For information on driving with snow chains,
see “Snow chains” ( page 309).
                                                  Warning!                            G         Warning!                                G
 Warning!                               G         Make sure not to endanger any other road      The outside temperature indicator is not
                                                  users when carrying out these braking         designed to serve as an ice-warning device
 On slippery road surfaces, never downshift       maneuvers.                                    and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
 in order to obtain braking action. This could                                                  Indicated temperatures just above the
 result in drive wheel slip and reduced                                                         freezing point do not guarantee that the
 vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not                                                   road surface is free of ice.
 prevent this type of control loss.
                                                                                               For more information, see “Winter driving”
                                                                                               ( page 308).


                                                                                                                                         267
Operation
Driving instructions


Standing water                                        Passenger compartment                          Control and operation of radio
                                                                                                     transmitters
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
of unknown depth. Before driving through water,        Warning!                               G      COMAND*, radio and telephone*
determine its depth. Never accelerate before
driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-       Always fasten items being carried as
ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
                                                       securely as possible.                             Warning!                                 G
                                                       In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
If you must drive through standing water, drive                                                          Please do not forget that your primary
slowly to prevent water from entering the pas-         den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
                                                       around inside the vehicle, and cause injury       responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
senger compartment or the engine compart-
                                                       to vehicle occupants unless the items are         Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit
ment. Water in these areas could cause damage
to electrical components or wiring of the engine       securely fastened in the vehicle.                 Management and Data System), radio or
or transmission, or could result in water being in-                                                      telephone1 if road, weather and traffic
gested by the engine through the air intake caus-      The trunk is the preferred place to carry         conditions permit.
ing severe internal engine damage. Any such            objects.
                                                                                                         Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.                                                                                        (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
                                                      Driving abroad                                     covering a distance of 44 feet
                                                                                                         (approximately 14 m) every second.
                                                      Abroad, there is an extensive
                                                                                                     1
                                                      Mercedes-Benz service network at your              Observe all legal requirements.
                                                      disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
                                                      which are not listed in the index of your
                                                      Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
                                                      should request pertinent information from
                                                      an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.



268
                                                                                                                                    Operation
                                                                                                                        Driving instructions


Telephones* and two-way radios                     Catalytic converter
                                                                                                       Warning!                              G
                                                   Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
 Warning!                                 G        monolithic-type catalytic converters, an            As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or
                                                   important element in conjunction with the           operate this vehicle in areas where combus-
 Never operate radio transmitters equipped
                                                   oxygen sensors to achieve substantial               tible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
 with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
                                                   control of the pollutants in the exhaust            can come into contact with the hot exhaust
 out being connected to an external antenna)
                                                   emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper              system, as these materials could be ignited
 from inside the vehicle while the engine is
                                                   operating condition by following our                and cause a vehicle fire.
 running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
                                                   recommended maintenance instructions
 tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
                                                   as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
 possibly resulting in an accident and
 personal injury.                                  ! To prevent damage to the catalytic
                                                   converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline
                                                   in this vehicle.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable
telephone or a citizens band unit should           Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
                                                   should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces-
only be used inside the vehicle if they are
                                                   sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
connected to an antenna that is installed          verter, causing it to overheat and potentially
on the outside of the vehicle.                     start a fire.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.




                                                                                                                                              269
Operation
Driving instructions


Emission control                                                                               The engine should not be operated with
                                               Warning!                               G        the coolant temperature over 248°F
Certain systems of the engine serve to                                                         (120°C). Doing so may cause serious
keep the toxic components of the exhaust       Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to       engine damage which is not covered by the
gases within permissible limits required by    your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon    Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
law.                                           monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
                                               unconsciousness and possible death.
These systems, of course, will function                                                         Warning!                              G
properly only when maintained strictly         Do not run the engine in confined areas
according to factory specifications. Any       (such as a garage) which are not properly           Driving when your engine is badly
adjustments on the engine should,              ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas           overheated can cause some fluids,
therefore, be carried out only by qualified    fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,       which may have leaked into the engine
Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-        have the cause determined and corrected             compartment, to catch fire. You could
cians. Engine adjustments should not be        immediately. If you must drive under these          be seriously burned.
altered in any way. Moreover, the specified    conditions, drive only with at least one            Steam from an overheated engine can
service jobs must be carried out regularly     window fully open at all times.                     cause serious burns and can occur just
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing                                                               by opening the hood. Stay away from
requirements. For details refer to the                                                             the engine if you see or hear steam com-
                                              Coolant temperature
Maintenance Booklet.                                                                               ing from it.
                                              During severe operating conditions and            Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
                                              stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant             and do not stand near the vehicle until the
                                              temperature may rise close to                     engine has cooled down.
                                              approximately 248°F (120°C).




270
                                                                                                                                  Operation
                                                                                                                         At the gas station
  At the gas station
Refueling                                                                                         The fuel filler flap is located on the
                                                 Warning!                                G        right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
                                                                                                  rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
 Warning!                               G        C 230/C 230 Sport:                               the SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks
                                                 Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label    the fuel filler flap.
 Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.     reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on
 It burns violently and can cause serious per-   fuel filler flap):                               i In case that the central locking system does
                                                 Ethanol fuel (E85) and its vapors are highly     not release the fuel filler flap, or the opening
 sonal injury.
                                                                                                  mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside Assis-
                                                 flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Etha-
 Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate-                                                       tance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 nol fuel can cause serious injuries if ignited
 rials near gasoline!
                                                 or if you come into contact with it or inhale
 Turn off the engine before refueling            fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol
 Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in-     fumes and skin contact with ethanol. Extin-
 haling fumes and skin or clothing contact,      guish all open flames before refueling. Never
 extinguish all smoking materials.               smoke or create sparks close to ethanol.
 Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
 lation of fuel vapors can damage to your
 health.


                                                                                                  1 To open the fuel filler flap
                                                                                                  2 To insert the fuel filler cap
                                                                                                  3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure in-
                                                                                                    formation




                                                                                                                                             271
Operation
At the gas station


i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a        Turn the engine off by turning the
minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average        SmartKey to position 0.                        Warning!                                G
of 96 RON/86 MON). Information on gasoline
quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.    Remove the SmartKey from the starter           Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
                                                   switch.                                        pressure in the system which could cause a
C 230/C 230 Sport:
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label   Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at        gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on the       the point indicated by arrow 1.                spray back out when removing the fuel
fuel filler flap.                                                                                 pump nozzle, which could cause personal
                                                   The fuel filler flap springs open.
For more information on gasoline or E85, see                                                      injury.
“Premium unleaded gasoline” ( page 413) or         Turn fuel cap counterclockwise and
the Factory Approved Service Products pam-         hold on to it until possible pressure is
phlet.                                                                                               Replace fuel cap by turning it clockwise
                                                   released.
                                                                                                     until it audibly engages.
                                                   Take off cap and set it in direction of
                                                   arrow 2 in the recess on the fuel filler      i Make sure to close the fuel filler flap before
                                                                                                 locking your vehicle as the flap locking pin
                                                   flap.                                         prevents closing after you have locked the
                                                   To prevent fuel vapors from escaping          vehicle.
                                                   into open air, fully insert filler nozzle         Close fuel filler flap.
                                                   unit.
                                                                                                 i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
                                                   Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle   open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve
                                                   unit cuts out – do not top up or              warning lamp to flash and the ú malfunction
                                                   overfill.                                     indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunc-
                                                                                                 tion indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.
                                                                                                 For more information, see “Practical hints”
                                                                                                 ( page 325) and ( page 326).



272
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                 At the gas station


Check regularly and before a long trip   Coolant                                             Windshield washer and headlamp
                                         For normal replenishing, use water (pota-           cleaning system*
                                         ble water quality). For more information,           For more information on filling up the
                                         see “Coolant level” ( page 278) and see             washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer
                                         “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”                 system and headlamp cleaning system*”
                                         ( page 409).                                        ( page 280).

                                         Brake fluid                                         Engine oil level
                                         ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake     For more information on engine oil level,
                                         fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or   see “Engine oil” ( page 276).
                                         below, have the brake system checked for brake
1 Coolant                                pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an      Vehicle lighting
2 Brake fluid (fuse box cover removed)   authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
3 Windshield washer and headlamp         Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the   Check function and cleanliness. For more
  cleaning system*                       problem. For more information, see “Practical       information on replacing light bulbs, see
                                         hints” ( page 324).                                 “Replacing bulbs” ( page 367).
i Opening the hood, see (   page 274).   Removing fuse box cover ( page 392).                Exterior lamp switch ( page 109).

                                                                                             Tire inflation pressure
                                                                                             More information on tire inflation pressure
                                                                                             ( page 290).




                                                                                                                                  273
Operation
Engine compartment


Hood
                                               Warning!                                G        Warning!                                    G
 Warning!                              G       You could be injured when the hood is open       The engine is equipped with a transistorized
                                               - even when the engine is turned off.            ignition system. Because of the high voltage
 Do not pull the release lever while the       Parts of the engine can become very hot. To      it is dangerous to touch any components
 vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood      prevent burns, only touch owner serviceable      (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-
 could be forced open by passing air flow.     components described in the Operator’s           tic socket) of the ignition system
 This could cause the hood to come loose       Manual and comply with all relevant safety           with the engine running
 and injure you and/or others.                 precautions.                                         while starting the engine
                                                                                                    if ignition is “on” and the engine is
Opening                                                                                             turned manually
                                               Warning!                                G
 Warning!                              G       To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
                                               moving parts when the hood is open and the
 If you see flames or smoke coming from the    engine is running.
 engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
 perature gauge indicates that the engine is   The radiator fan may continue to run for
 overheated, do not open the hood. Move        approximately 30 seconds or even restart
 away from vehicle and do not open the hood    after the engine has been turned off. Stay
 until the engine has cooled. If necessary,    clear of fan blades.
 call the fire department.




274
                                                                                                                             Operation
                                                                                                              Engine compartment


The hood lock release lever is located to                                                     Closing
the left of the steering wheel under the
dashboard.
                                                                                               Warning!                              G
                                                                                               When closing the hood, use extreme caution
                                                                                               not to catch hands or fingers.
                                                                                               Be careful that you do not close the hood on
                                                                                               anyone.
                                                                                               Make sure that the hood is securely en-
                                                  2 Handle for opening the hood                gaged before driving off. Do not continue
                                                                                               driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
                                                     Pull handle 2 to its stop out of
                                                                                               ter an accident, for example. The hood could
                                                     radiator grille.
1 Hood lock release lever                                                                      otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
                                                     Pull up on the hood (do not pull up on    motion and injure you and/or others.
   Pull lever 1 downwards.                           the handle) and then release it.
   The hood is unlocked and handle 2                 The hood will be automatically held         Let the hood drop from a height of
   will extend out of the radiator grille.           open at shoulder height by gas-filled       approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or        struts.                                     The hood will lock audibly.
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.                                                         Check to make sure the hood is fully
                                                                                                 closed.
                                                                                                 If you can raise the hood at a point
                                                                                                 above the headlamps, then it is not
                                                                                                 properly closed. Open it again and let it
                                                                                                 drop with somewhat greater force.

                                                                                                                                      275
Operation
Engine compartment


Engine oil                                           with the engine at operating tempera-         Pull out oil dipstick 1.
                                                     ture, the vehicle must have been sta-
                                                                                                   Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
The amount of oil your engine needs will             tionary for at least 5 minutes with the
depend on a number of factors, including             engine turned off                             Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
driving style. Higher oil consumption can                                                          dipstick guide tube.
                                                     with the engine not at operating tem-
occur when                                                                                         Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
                                                     perature yet, the vehicle must have
   the vehicle is new                                been stationary for at least 30 minutes       approximately 3 seconds to obtain ac-
                                                     with the engine turned off                    curate reading.
   the vehicle is driven frequently at
   higher engine speeds                                                                            The oil level is correct when it is be-
                                                                                                   tween the lower (min) mark 3 and
Engine oil consumption checks should only
                                                                                                   upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1.
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
i Do not use any special lubricant additives,                                                  i The filling quantity between the upper and
                                                                                               lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
as these may damage the drive assemblies. Us-
                                                                                               2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
ing special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered                                                         If necessary, add engine oil.
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More
information on this subject is available at any                                                    For adding engine oil, see “Adding en-
Mercedes-Benz Center.                                                                              gine oil” ( page 277).
                                                  1 Oil dipstick
                                                  2 Upper (max) mark                           For more information on engine oil, see
Checking engine oil level                                                                      “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
                                                  3 Lower (min) mark
When checking the oil level                                                                    ( page 409).
                                                  To check the engine oil level with the oil
   the vehicle must be parked on level            dipstick, do the following:
   ground
                                                     Open the hood ( page 274).


276
                                                                                                                                    Operation
                                                                                                                      Engine compartment


For more information on messages in the                                                               ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
multifunction display concerning engine                                                               It could cause damage to the engine and emis-
oil, see the “Practical hints” section                                                                sion control system not covered by the
( page 348).                                                                                          Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
                                                                                                         Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
Adding engine oil
                                                                                                      For more information on engine oil, see the
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters                                                       “Technical data” section ( page 409) and
required for vehicles with Maintenance System                                                         ( page 412).
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a
listing of approved engine oils and oil filters,
                                                       1 Filler cap                                   Transmission fluid level
refer to the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or
                                                          Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.      The transmission fluid level does not need
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                          Add engine oil as required. Be careful      to be checked. If you notice transmission
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
other than those expressly required for the               not to overfill with oil.                   fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS                                                             have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
                                                       Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.   check the transmission.
(Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter
at change intervals longer than those called for       Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or           entering the ground or water.
FSS (Canada Vehicles) will result in engine or
emission control system damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.




                                                                                                                                             277
Operation
Engine compartment


Coolant level                                                                                       Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approx-
                                                     Using a rag, slowly open the cap
                                                     approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess       imately one half turn counterclockwise
The engine coolant is a mixture of water             pressure. If opened immediately, scald-        to release any excess pressure.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check               ing hot fluid and steam will be blown out      Continue turning the cap counterclock-
the coolant level, the vehicle must be               under pressure.                                wise and remove it.
parked on level ground and the engine
                                                     Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
must be cool.                                                                                       The coolant level is correct if the level
                                                     parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene
                                                     glycol which may burn if it comes into            for cold coolant: reaches the black
 Warning!                               G            contact with hot engine parts.                    top part of the reservoir
                                                                                                       for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
 In order to avoid any potentially serious       The coolant expansion tank is located on
                                                                                                       (1.5 cm) higher
 burns:                                          the passenger side of the engine compart-
                                                 ment.                                              Add coolant as required.
     Use extreme caution when opening the
     hood if there are any signs of steam or                                                        Replace and tighten cap.
     coolant leaking from the cooling system,
                                                                                                 For more information on coolant, see
     or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
     cates that the coolant is overheated.                                                       “Coolants” ( page 416).
     Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
     reservoir if coolant temperature is
     above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
     cool down before removing cap. The
     coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
     is under pressure.
                                                 1 Coolant expansion tank
                                                 2 Cap


278
                                                                                                                            Operation
                                                                                                              Engine compartment


Battery
                                               Warning!                              G                    Wear eye protection.
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the
engine compartment on the right hand           Observe all safety instructions and precau-                Rinse any acid spills immediate-
side ( page 383).                              tions when handling automotive batteries.                  ly with clear water. Contact a
                                                                                                          physician if necessary.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated                     Risk of explosion.
service life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet                                                                Keep children away.
for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for                        Fire, open flames and smoking
short-distance trips, you will need to have               are prohibited when handling                    Follow the instructions in this
the battery charge checked more                           batteries. Avoid creating sparks.               Operator’s Manual.
frequently.
                                                          Battery acid is caustic. Do not     Batteries contain materials that can harm
When replacing the battery, always use
                                                          allow it to come into contact       the environment if disposed of improperly.
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
                                                          with skin, eyes or clothing.        Recycling of batteries is the preferred
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle                                                  method of disposal. Many states require
                                                          Wear suitable protective cloth-
for an extended period of time, consult an                                                    sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
                                                          ing, especially gloves, apron and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about                                                         for recycling.
                                                          faceguard.
steps you need to observe.




                                                                                                                                      279
Operation
Engine compartment


Windshield washer system and                 Fluid for the windshield washer system and         Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
headlamp cleaning system*                    the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied          Washer Concentrate and water (or
                                             from the windshield washer reservoir. It           commercially available premixed
The windshield washer reservoir is located   has a capacity of:                                 windshield washer solvent/antifreeze,
in the engine compartment.                                                                      depending on ambient temperatures).
                                                3.2 US qt (3.0 l) in vehicles without
                                                headlamp cleaning system                    ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
                                                                                            where temperatures may fall below the freezing
                                                6.4 US qt (6.0 l) in vehicles with
                                                                                            point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
                                                headlamp cleaning system                    the washer system/reservoir.
                                             During all seasons, add MB Windshield
                                             Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
                                                                                            ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
                                                                                            plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam-
                                             water. Premix the windshield washer fluid      age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
                                             in a suitable container.
                                                                                            For more information, see “Windshield
                                                                                            washer and headlamp cleaning system*”
1 Washer fluid reservoir                      Warning!                               G      ( page 418).

                                              Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
                                              ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
                                              on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
                                              and burn. You could be seriously burned.




280
                                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                                       Tires and wheels
  Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center                                                            Important guidelines
for information on tested and                    Warning!                                 G
recommended rims and tires for summer                                                                Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer        Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the         same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and               tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
                                                                                                     Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase.                                        sustained damage, replace them.
                                                                                                     rim.
                                                 When replacing rims, only use genuine
                                                                                                     Break in new tires for approximately
 Warning!                               G        Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
                                                                                                     60 miles (100 km) at moderate
                                                 particular rim type. Failure to do so can
                                                 result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
                                                                                                     speeds.
 Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
 tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the     accident.                                           Regularly check the tires and rims for
 original part. See an authorized                Retreaded tires are not tested or recom-            damage. Dented or bent rims can
 Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-       mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous             cause tire inflation pressure loss and
 tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are   damage cannot always be recognized on re-           damage to the tire beads.
 mounted:                                        treads. The operating safety of the vehicle         If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
     The wheel brakes or suspension              cannot be assured when such tires are used.         inflation pressure and correct as
     components can be damaged.                                                                      required.
     The operating clearance of the wheels                                                           Do not allow your tires to wear down
     and the tires may no longer be correct.                                                         too far. Adhesion properties on wet
                                                                                                     roads are sharply reduced at tread
                                                                                                     depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
                                                                                                     When replacing individual tires, you
                                                                                                     should mount new tires on the front
                                                                                                     wheels first (on vehicles with
                                                                                                     same-sized wheels all around).

                                                                                                                                        281
Operation
Tires and wheels


Tire care and maintenance                         Tire inspection                                 Life of tire
                                                  Every time you check your tire inflation        The service life of a tire is dependent upon
 Warning!                                 G       pressure, you should also inspect your
                                                  tires for wear and damage for the
                                                                                                  varying factors including but not limited to:
                                                                                                     Driving style
                                                  following:
 Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam-
                                                                                                     Tire inflation pressure
 aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure        excessive treadwear ( page 283)
 loss. As a result, you could lose control of                                                        Distance driven
                                                     cord or fabric showing through the
 your vehicle.
                                                     tire’s rubber
 Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
                                                     bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks, or splits in
                                                                                                   Warning!                               G
 tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
                                                     the tread or side of the tire                 Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
 sustained damage, replace them.
                                                  Replace the tire if you find any of the above    6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure      conditions.
at least once a month. For more informa-          Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
tion on checking tire inflation pressure see      periodically for condition and tire inflation
“Recommended tire inflation pressure”             pressure. Spare tires will age and become
( page 289).                                      worn over time even if never used, and
                                                  thus should be inspected and replaced
                                                  when necessary.




282
                                                                                                                                   Operation
                                                                                                                          Tires and wheels


Tread depth                                                                                       Storing tires
                                                 to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too         approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion           ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are        properties on a wet road are sharply             with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro-
sharply reduced at tread depths under            reduced.                                         tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso-
1/ in (3 mm).                                                                                     line.
  8                                              Depending upon the weather and/or road
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by       surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
                                                                                                  Cleaning tires
law. These indicators are located in six         widely.
places on the tread circumference and                                                             ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
become visible at a tread depth of approx-                                                        tires. The intense jet of water can result in dam-
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point                                                          age to the tire.
the tire is considered worn and should be                                                         Always replace a damaged tire.
replaced.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
   Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
   Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)

 Warning!                              G        1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
 Although the applicable federal motor safety   The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
 laws consider a tire to be worn when the       band across the tread.
 treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
 approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
 recommend that you do not allow your tires


                                                                                                                                             283
Operation
Tires and wheels


Direction of rotation                                  Loading the vehicle                                carried by a single axle (front or rear).
                                                                                                          Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
Unidirectional tires offer added advan-                A label on your vehicle shows how much             either the front axle or rear axle.
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor-             weight it may properly carry.
mance. To benefit, however, you must
                                                          The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction
                                                          placard can be found on the driver’s
specified.
                                                          door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the                    portant information about the number
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of              of people that can be in the vehicle and
the tire.                                                 the total weight that can be carried in
                                                          the vehicle. It also contains information
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the                 on the proper size and recommended
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg-      tire inflation pressures for the original
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.           equipment tires on your vehicle.             1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Always observe and follow applicable temporary            The certification label found on the         Following is a discussion on how to work
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated                                                       with the information contained on the plac-
on the spare wheel.
                                                          driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the
                                                          gross weight capacity of your vehicle,       ard with regards to loading your vehicle.
                                                          called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
                                                          (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
                                                          of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
                                                          cargo. The certification label also tells
                                                          you about the front and rear axle
                                                          weight capacity, called the Gross Axle
                                                          Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is
                                                          the total allowable weight that can be


284
                                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                                             Tires and wheels


Tire and Loading Information                        Placard                                          Seating capacity
                                                                                                     The seating capacity gives you important
 Warning!                                 G                                                          information on the number of occupants
                                                                                                     that can be in the vehicle. Observe front
 Do not overload the tires by exceeding the                                                          and rear seating capacity. The placard
 specified load limit as indicated on the plac-                                                      showing the seating capacity is located on
 ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading                                                      the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 284).
 the tires can overheat them, possibly caus-
 ing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also                                                       i Data shown on placard example are for
                                                                                                     illustration purposes only. Seating data are
 result in handling or steering problems, or                                                         specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
 brake failure.                                                                                      shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard
                                                    1 Load limit information on the Tire and         on vehicle for actual data specific to your
                                                      Loading Information placard                    vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire and
Loading Information placard.                        The placard showing the load limit informa-
                                                    tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
i Data shown on placard example are for             Locate the statement “The combined
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are
                                                    weight of occupants and cargo should
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard   never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on vehicle for actual data specific to your         on this placard. The combined weight of all
vehicle.                                            occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer
                                                    tongue load (if applicable) should never
                                                    exceed the weight referenced in that
                                                    statement.
                                                                                                     1 Seating capacity information on the
                                                                                                       Tire and Loading Information placard.


                                                                                                                                                285
Operation
Tires and wheels


Steps for determining correct load limit      Step 3                                      Step 6 (if applicable)
The following steps have been developed          Subtract the combined weight of the         If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
as required of all manufacturers under           driver and passengers from XXX kilo-        load from your trailer will be trans-
Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,      grams or XXX lbs.                           ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic                                                   manual to determine how this reduces
                                              Step 4
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.                                                       the available cargo and luggage load
                                                 The resulting figure equals the avail-      capacity of your vehicle ( page 288).
Step 1
                                                 able amount of cargo and luggage load
                                                                                          The following table shows examples on
   Locate the statement “The combined            capacity. For example, if the “XXX”
                                                                                          how to calculate total and cargo load
   weight of occupants and cargo should          amount equals 1400 lbs and there will
                                                                                          capacities with varying seating configura-
   never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on           be five 150 lbs passengers in your
                                                                                          tions and number and size of occupants.
   your vehicle’s placard.                       vehicle, the amount of available cargo
                                                                                          The following examples use a load limit
                                                 and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
Step 2                                                                                    of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
                                                 (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
   Determine the combined weight of the                                                   purposes only. Make sure you are using
                                              Step 5                                      the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
   driver and passengers that will be
   riding in your vehicle.                       Determine the combined weight of         on the vehicle’s placard ( page 285).
                                                 luggage and cargo being loaded on the
                                                 vehicle. That weight may not safely
                                                 exceed the available cargo and luggage
                                                 load capacity calculated in step 4.




286
                                                                                                                Operation
                                                                                                         Tires and wheels


Example Combined          Number of Seating         Occupants weight      Combined      Available cargo/luggage and trailer
        weight limit      occupants configura-                            weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
        of occu-          (driver and tion                                occupants     placard minus combined weight of
        pants and         passengers)                                                   all occupants)
        cargo from
        placard
1          1500 lbs       5              front: 2   Occupant 1: 150 lbs   750 lbs       1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
                                                    Occupant 2: 180 lbs
                                         rear: 3    Occupant 3: 160 lbs
                                                    Occupant 4: 140 lbs
                                                    Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2          1500 lbs       3              front: 1   Occupant 1: 200 lbs   540 lbs       1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
                                         rear: 2    Occupant 2: 190 lbs
                                                    Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3          1500 lbs       1              front:1    Occupant 1: 150 lbs   150 lbs       1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” ( page 288).




                                                                                                                        287
Operation
Tires and wheels


Certification label                            Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The        Trailer tongue load
                                               total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the                                                       The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
                                               all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo                                                       tant weight to measure because it affects
                                               ( page 288) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)                                                   the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
( page 288) as to not exceed the permis-       GVWR.                                          trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that      Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to-       added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehi-     tal allowable weight that can be carried by    and any cargo you are carrying in the
cle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross         a single axle (front or rear).                 vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the                                                      percent of the trailer weight and every-
                                               To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
front or rear axle. You can obtain the                                                        thing loaded in it.
                                               ceed the maximum permissible weight
GVWR and GAWR from the certification la-
                                               limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear       Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
bel. The certification label can be found on
                                               axle), have the loaded vehicle (including      primarily to carry passengers and their
the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical
                                               driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-   cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recom-
data” ( page 398).
                                               plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a   mend trailer towing with your vehicle.
                                               suitable commercial scale.




288
                                                                                                                                     Operation
                                                                                                                             Tires and wheels


Recommended tire inflation pressure               The tire inflation pressure should be                 Placard
                                                  checked regularly and should only be ad-
                                                  justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
 Warning!                                G        sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
                                                  for at least three hours or driven less than
 Follow recommended tire inflation                one mile (1.6 km).
 pressures.
                                                  Follow recommended cold tire inflation
 Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires   pressures listed on placard.
 wear excessively and/or unevenly,
 adversely affect handling and fuel economy,      Keeping the tires properly inflated
 and are more likely to fail from being over-     provides the best handling, tread life and
 heated.                                          riding comfort.                                       1 Tire and Loading Information placard
 Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires     In addition to the tire placard on the                  with recommended cold tire inflation
 can adversely affect handling and ride           driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel           pressures
 comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping        filler flap for any additional information            The placard lists the recommended cold
 distance, and result in sudden deflation         pertaining to special driving situations. For         tire inflation pressures for maximum load-
 (blowout) because they are more likely to        more information, see “Important notes on             ed vehicle weight. The tire inflation pres-
 become punctured or damaged by road              tire inflation pressure” ( page 290).                 sures listed apply to the tires installed as
 debris, potholes etc.                            i Data shown on placard example are for               original equipment.
                                                  illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire and          to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
Loading Information placard located on            the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle
                                                  for actual data specific to your vehicle.
the driver’s door B-pillar ( page 284).




                                                                                                                                              289
Operation
Tires and wheels


Important notes on tire inflation               Be sure to readjust the tire inflation                 Checking tire inflation pressure
pressure                                        pressure for normal driving speeds. You
                                                should wait until the tires are cold before            Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
                                                                                                       at least once a month.
 Warning!                                G      adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
                                                i Driving comfort may be reduced when the              Check and adjust the tire inflation
 If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly      tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for   pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
 drops:                                         speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified           can be considered cold if the vehicle has
                                                on the placard located on the inside of the fuel       been parked for at least three hours or
     Check the tires for punctures from         filler flap.
     foreign objects.                                                                                  driven less than one mile (1.6 km).
     Check to see whether air is leaking from   Some vehicles may have supplemental tire               If you check the tire inflation pressure
     the valves or from around the rim.         inflation pressure information for vehicle             when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
                                                loads less than the maximum loaded                     been driven for several miles or sitting less
                                                vehicle condition. If such information is              than three hours), the reading will be
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure    provided, it can be found on the placard
are also increased while driving, depending                                                            approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
                                                located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.         the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
on the driving speed and the tire load.
                                                Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi-            air out to match the specified cold tire
If you will be driving your vehicle at high     mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of            inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,         air temperature change. Keep this in mind              be underinflated.
where it is legal and conditions allow,         when checking tire inflation pressure
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel   where the temperature is different from
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire      the outside temperature.
inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.



290
                                                                                                                                     Operation
                                                                                                                             Tires and wheels


                                                 Checking tire inflation pressure                      Run Flat Indicator*
Warning!                                G        manually
                                                                                                       U.S. vehicles: The Run Flat Indicator is only
Follow recommended tire inflation pres-          Follow the steps below to achieve correct             available in conjunction with the
sures.                                           tire inflation pressure:                              MOExtended* system ( page 294).

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires        Remove the cap from the valve on one              While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be-         tire.                                             Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation
cause they are more likely to become punc-                                                             pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota-
                                                     Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,                                                             tional speed. This allows the system to de-
                                                     valve.
etc.                                                                                                   tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.
                                                     Read tire inflation pressure on tire              If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires       gauge and check against the recom-                to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling             mended tire inflation pressure on the             see a corresponding warning message in
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail        placard on the driver’s door B-pillar             the multifunction display.
from being overheated.                               ( page 289). If necessary, add air to
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the           achieve the recommended tire inflation
specified load limit as indicated on the plac-       pressure.
ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly caus-
                                                 i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
                                                 flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
ing a blowout.                                   valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
                                                 tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
                                                     Install the valve cap.
                                                     Repeat this procedure for each tire.




                                                                                                                                               291
Operation
Tires and wheels


The Run Flat Indicator* may function in a
restricted manner or with a delay if:          Warning!                                 G         Warning!                                 G
   snow chains are mounted to the              When the multifunction display shows the           The Run Flat Indicator* does not provide a
   vehicle                                     message Tire pressure Check tires,                 warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
   winter road conditions prevail in           one or more of your tires is significantly un-     pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres-
   presence of ice and snow                    der-inflated. You should stop and check            sure according to the placard on the driver’s
                                               your tires as soon as possible, and inflate        door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
   you are driving on a loose surface (e.g.
                                               them to the proper tire inflation pressure as      The Run Flat Indicator* does not replace
   sand or gravel)
                                               indicated on the vehicle’s tire information        regular checks of the tire inflation pressures
   you are driving in a very sporty manner     placard. Driving on a significantly under-in-      since a gradual pressure loss in more than
   (involving rapid acceleration or high       flated tire causes the tire to overheat and        one tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat
   speeds in curves)                           can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also     Indicator*.
                                               reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
                                               and may affect the vehicle’s handling and          The Run Flat Indicator* is not able to issue a
                                               stopping ability. Each tire, including the         warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
                                               spare, should be checked monthly when              tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
                                               cold and set to the recommended tire infla-        caused by a foreign object). In this case
                                               tion pressure as specified in the vehicle          bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
                                               placard and owner’s manual.                        ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
                                                                                                  maneuvers.

                                              i The recommended tire inflation pressures
                                              for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard
                                              located on the driver’s door B-pillar
                                              ( page 289). The tire inflation pressures are
                                              not listed in the owner’s manual.


292
                                                                                                                         Operation
                                                                                                                Tires and wheels


Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator*              Switch on the ignition ( page 32).       If you wish to confirm activation:
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be       The standard display menu appears in          Press button æ.
reactivated in the following situations:          the multifunction display ( page 126).
                                                                                                The following message will appear in
   If you have changed the tire inflation         Press button k or j repeatedly                the multifunction display:
   pressure                                       until the following message appears in        Run Flat
                                                  the multifunction display:                    Indicator
   If you have replaced the wheels or tires
                                                                                                restarted
   If you have installed new wheels or
   tires                                                                                   After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
                                                                                           Flat Indicator checks the set pressure
   Using the tire placard on the driver’s                                                  values for all four tires.
   door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
                                                                                           If you wish to cancel activation:
   of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
   inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-                                                 Press button ç.
   rect.
                                                                                           or
                                                                                                Wait until the message
 Warning!                                G        Press the reset button in the                 Restart
                                                  instrument cluster ( page 311).               Run Flat
 The Run Flat Indicator* can only warn you in
                                                  The following message will appear in          Indicator?
 a reliable manner if you have set the correct
                                                  the multifunction display:                    Yes
 tire inflation pressures for each tire.
                                                  Restart                                       Chancel
 If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was                                                    disappears.
                                                  Run Flat
 set, the system will monitor the pressure
                                                  Indicator?
 according to the incorrect value.
                                                  Yes
                                                  Chancel

                                                                                                                                293
Operation
Tires and wheels


Potential problems associated with                Overinflated tires                              MOExtended system*
underinflated and overinflated tires
                                                  Overinflated tires can:
                                                                                                  The MOExtended system allows you to
Underinflated tires                                  adversely affect handling                    continue driving your vehicle even if there
                                                     characteristics                              is a total loss of pressure in one or more
Underinflated tires can:
                                                     cause uneven tire wear                       tires.
   cause excessive and uneven tire wear
                                                     be more prone to damage from road            You may only use the MOExtended system
   adversely affect fuel economy                     hazards                                      in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*
   lead to tire failure from being                                                                ( page 291).
                                                     adversely affect ride comfort
   overheated                                                                                     For information on driving in case of pres-
                                                     increase stopping distance                   sure loss in one or more tires (emergency
   adversely affect handling
   characteristics                                                                                mode), see the “Practical hints” section
                                                   Warning!                               G       ( page 382).

 Warning!                                G         Follow recommended tire inflation
                                                   pressures.
 Follow recommended tire inflation pres-
 sures.                                            Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
                                                   can adversely affect handling and ride
 Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
                                                   comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
 wear excessively and/or unevenly,
                                                   distance, and result in sudden deflation
 adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
                                                   (blowout) because they are more likely to
 and are more likely to fail from being
                                                   become punctured or damaged by road
 overheated.
                                                   debris, potholes etc.




294
                                                                                                                                 Operation
                                                                                                                        Tires and wheels


Tire labeling                               1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards                 Tire size designation, load and speed
                                              ( page 302)                                       rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and   2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings       ( page 299)
can be found on a tire.                     3 Maximum tire load ( page 301)
Following are some explanations for the     4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires:             ( page 301)
                                            5 Manufacturer
                                            6 Tire ply material ( page 304)
                                            7 Tire size designation, load and speed
                                              rating ( page 295)
                                            8 Load identification ( page 299)
                                            9 Tire name                                         1 Tire width
                                                                                                2 Aspect ratio in %
                                            i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       3 Radial tire code
                                            on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
                                            from data shown in above illustration.              4 Rim diameter
                                            For more information, see “Rims and Tires”
                                                                                                5 Tire load rating
                                            ( page 403).                                        6 Tire speed rating
                                                                                                i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
                                                                                                on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
                                                                                                from data shown in above illustration.




                                                                                                                                           295
Operation
Tires and wheels


General:                                        Tire width                                     Rim diameter
Depending on the design standards used,         The tire width 1 ( page 295) indicates         The rim diameter 4 ( page 295) is the
the tire size molded into the sidewall may      the nominal tire width in mm.                  diameter of the bead seat, not the
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire                                                  diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
size designation.                               Aspect ratio                                   indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation        The aspect ratio 2 ( page 295) is the
                                                                                               Tire load rating
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire      dimensional relationship between tire
based on European design standards.             section height and section width and is        The tire load rating 5 ( page 295) is a
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:      expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio      numerical code associated with the
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design         is arrived at by dividing section height by    maximum load a tire can support.
standards.                                      section width.
                                                                                               For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:                                                    sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
                                                Tire code
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design                                                          (615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
standards.                                      The tire code 3 ( page 295) indicates          See also “Maximum tire load”
                                                the tire construction type. The “R” stands     ( page 301) where the maximum load as-
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:      for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag-   sociated with the load index is indicated in
Temporary spare tires which are high            onal or bias ply construction; letter “B”      kilograms and lbs.
pressure compact spares designed for            means belted-bias ply construction.
temporary emergency use only.
                                                At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
                                                with a speed capability above 149 mph
                                                (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
                                                designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
                                                For additional information, see “Tire speed
                                                rating” ( page 297).


296
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                                    Tires and wheels


                                                  i Tire load rating 5 (     page 295) and Tire   Summer tires
 Warning!                                G        speed rating 6 ( page 295) are also referred
                                                  to as “service description”.                    Index     Speed rating
 The tire load rating must always be at least                                                     Q         up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
 half of the GAWR ( page 305) of your vehi-       Tire speed rating                               R         up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
 cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result
                                                  The tire speed rating 6 ( page 295)             S         up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
 which may cause an accident and/or seri-
                                                  indicates the approved maximum speed
 ous personal injury to you or others.                                                            T         up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
                                                  for the tire.
 Always replace rims and tires with the same                                                      H         up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
 designation, manufacturer and type as
 shown on the original part.                       Warning!                               G       V         up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
                                                                                                  W         up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
                                                   Even when permitted by law, never operate
                                                                                                  Y         up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
                                                   a vehicle at speeds greater than the
 Warning!                                G         maximum speed rating of the tires.             (Y)       above 186 mph (300 km/h)
 Do not overload the tires by exceeding the        Exceeding the maximum speed for which          ZR        above 149 mph (240 km/h)
 specified load limit as indicated on the plac-    tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
 ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.        failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
 Overloading the tires can overheat them,          possibly resulting in an accident and/or
 possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the       personal injury and possible death, for you
 tires can also result in handling or steering     and for others.
 problems, or brake failure.
                                                  i Tire load rating 5 (     page 295) and Tire
For additional information on tire load           speed rating 6 ( page 295) are also referred
rating, see “Load identification”                 to as “service description”.
( page 299).

                                                                                                                                  297
Operation
Tires and wheels


  At the tire manufacturer’s option, any      If a service description 5 and 6           All-season and winter tires
  tire with a speed capability above          ( page 295) is given, the speed capa-
                                                                                         Index         Speed rating
  149 mph (240 km/h) can include a            bility is limited by the speed symbol in
  “ZR” in the size designation (for exam-     the service description.                   Q     M+S1    up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
  ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the         Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.                  T M+S     1
                                                                                                       up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
  maximum speed capability of the tire,       In this example, “97Y” is the service                1
  the service description for the tire must   description. The letter “Y” designates     H M+S         up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
  be referred to. The service description     the speed rating and the speed capabil-    V     M+S1    up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
  is comprised of the tire load rating 5      ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph      1   or M+S.for winter tires
  ( page 295) and the tire speed              (300 km/h).
  rating 6 ( page 295).
                                              Any tire with a speed capability above     i Not all M+S rated tires provide special win-
  If your tire includes “ZR” in the size      186 mph (300 km/h) must include a          ter performance. Make sure the tires you use
  designation and no service                  “ZR” in the size designation AND the       show M+S and the mountain/snow-
  description 5 and 6 ( page 295) is          service description must be placed in      flake.marking on the tire sidewall. These
                                                                                         tires meet specific snow traction performance
  given, the tire manufacturer must be        parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
                                                                                         requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers As-
  consulted for the maximum speed             (99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-    sociation (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
  capability.                                 thesis designates the maximum speed        Canada (RAC) and have been designed specifi-
                                              capability of the tire as being above      cally for use in snow conditions.
                                              186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire
                                              manufacturer for the actual maximum
                                              permissible speed of the tire.




298
                                                                                                                                  Operation
                                                                                                                          Tires and wheels


Load identification                                 In addition to tire load rating, special load   DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
                                                    information may be molded into the tire
                                                    sidewall following the letter designating       U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
                                                    the tire speed rating 6 ( page 295).            manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
                                                                                                    TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
                                                    No specification given: absence of any text
                                                                                                    produced.
                                                    (like in above example) indicates a
                                                    standard load (SL) tire.                        The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
                                                                                                    tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
                                                    XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
                                                                                                    purchasers in recall situations or other
                                                    (or reinforced) tire.
                                                                                                    safety matters concerning tires and gives
                                                    Light Load: designates a light load tire.       purchasers the means to easily identify
1 Load identification                               C, D, E: designates load range associated       such tires.
                                                    with the maximum load a tire can carry at       The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       a specified pressure.
on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary                                                   identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
from data shown in above illustration.                                                              code”, and “Date of manufacture”.




                                                                                                                                           299
Operation
Tires and wheels


                                                    DOT (Department of Transportation)           Tire type code
                                                    A tire branding symbol 1 ( page 300)         The code 4 ( page 300) may, at the
                                                    which denotes the tire meets require-        option of the manufacturer, be used as a
                                                    ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor-    descriptive code for identifying significant
                                                    tation.                                      characteristics of the tire.

                                                    Manufacturer’s identification mark           Date of manufacture
                                                    The manufacturer’s identification mark 2     The date of manufacture 5 ( page 300)
                                                    ( page 300) denotes the tire                 identifies the week and year of manufac-
1 DOT                                               manufacturer.                                ture.
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark                New tires have a mark with two symbols.      The first two figures identify the week,
3 Tire size                                                                                      starting with “01” to represent the first full
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire         Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
                                                                                                 week of the calendar year. The second two
  manufacturer)                                     bols. For more information on retreaded
                                                                                                 figures represent the year.
5 Date of manufacture                               tires, see ( page 281).
                                                                                                 For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       Tire size                                    week of 2002.
on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration.              The code 3 ( page 300) indicates the
                                                    tire size.




300
                                                                                                                                       Operation
                                                                                                                              Tires and wheels


Maximum tire load                                                                                     Maximum tire inflation pressure
                                                     Warning!                                G
                                                     Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
                                                     specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
                                                     ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
                                                     Overloading the tires can overheat them,
                                                     possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
                                                     tires can also result in handling or steering
                                                     problems, or brake failure.


                                                    For more information on tire load rating
1 Maximum tire load rating                                                                            1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
                                                    ( page 296).
                                                                                                        pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       For information on calculating total and
on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
                                                    cargo load capacities ( page 286).                i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
from data shown in above illustration.                                                                on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
                                                                                                      from data shown in above illustration.
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.                                                             This is the maximum permissible tire
                                                                                                      inflation pressure for the tire.




                                                                                                                                                 301
Operation
Tires and wheels


Always follow the recommended tire                Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards              Quality grades can be found, where appli-
inflation pressure ( page 289) for proper         (U.S. vehicles)                                     cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
tire inflation.                                                                                       shoulder and maximum section width. For
                                                  Tire manufacturers are required to grade            example:
                                                  tires based on three performance
 Warning!                                G        factors: treadwear, traction, and                   Treadwear Traction Temperature
                                                  temperature resistance.                             200           AA         A
 Never exceed the max. tire inflation
 pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
 pressures.                                                                                           All passenger car tires must conform to
 Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires                                                       federal safety requirements in addition to
 wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse-                                                           these grades.
 ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
 more likely to fail from being overheated.                                                           Treadwear
 Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires                                                         The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-
 can adversely affect handling and ride com-                                                          ing based on the wear rate of the tire when
 fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-                                                          tested under controlled conditions on a
 tance, and result in sudden deflation            1 Treadwear                                         specified government test course. For ex-
 (blowout) because they are more likely to        2 Traction                                          ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one
 become punctured or damaged by road de-          3 Temperature resistance                            and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the
 bris, potholes etc.                                                                                  government course as a tire graded 100.
                                                  i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       The relative performance of tires depends
                                                  on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary
                                                                                                      upon the actual conditions of their use,
                                                  from data shown in above illustration.
                                                                                                      however, and may depart significantly




302
                                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                                      Tires and wheels


from the norm due to variations in driving     Temperature
habits, service practices and differences in   The temperature grades are A (the high-
                                                                                                Warning!                                 G
road characteristics and climate.              est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-   The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
                                               tance to the generation of heat and its          lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
Traction                                       ability to dissipate heat when tested under      not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin-
The traction grades, from highest to low-      controlled conditions on a specified indoor      flation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep-    laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-       rately or in combination, can cause
resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet       perature can cause the material of the tire      excessive heat build-up and possible tire
pavement as measured under controlled          to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-      failure.
conditions on specified government test        cessive temperature can lead to sudden
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire       tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
marked C may have poor traction perfor-        level of performance which all passenger
mance.                                         car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-
                                               tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
 Warning!                                G     Grades B and A represent higher levels of
                                               performance on the laboratory test wheel
 The traction grade assigned to this tire is   than the minimum required by law.
 based on straight-ahead braking traction
 tests, and does not include acceleration,
 cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
 characteristics.




                                                                                                                                          303
Operation
Tires and wheels


Tire ply material                                   Tire and loading terminology                   Bar
                                                                                                   Another metric unit for air pressure. There
                                                    Accessory weight                               are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi)
                                                                                                   to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa)
                                                    The combined weight (in excess of those
                                                                                                   to 1 bar.
                                                    standard items which may be replaced) of
                                                    automatic transmission, power steering,
                                                                                                   Bead
                                                    power brakes, power windows, power
                                                    seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that   The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
                                                    these items are available as                   by steel cords that hold the tire onto the
                                                    factory-installed equipment (whether           rim.
                                                    installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall                                                                                Cold tire inflation pressure
2 Plies under tread                                 Air pressure                                   Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data       The amount of air inside the tire pressing     has been sitting for at least three hours or
on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary   outward on each square inch of the tire.       driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).
from data shown in above illustration.
                                                    Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
This marking tells you about the type of            square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or      Curb weight
cord and number of plies in the sidewall            bars.                                          The weight of a motor vehicle with stan-
and under the tread.                                                                               dard equipment including the maximum
                                                    Aspect ratio                                   capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
                                                    Dimensional relationship between tire          equipped, air conditioning and additional
                                                    section height and section width               optional equipment, but without passen-
                                                    expressed in percentage.                       gers and cargo.



304
                                                                                                                           Operation
                                                                                                                   Tires and wheels


DOT (Department of Transportation)            GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)              Maximum tire inflation pressure
A tire branding symbol which denotes the      This is the maximum permissible vehicle         This number is the greatest amount of air
tire meets requirements of the                weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of   pressure that should ever be put in the tire
U.S. Department of Transportation.            the vehicle including all options, passen-      under normal driving conditions.
                                              gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)               trailer tongue load). It is indicated on        Normal occupant weight
                                              certification label located on the driver’s
The GAWR is the maximum permissible                                                           The number of occupants the vehicle is
                                              door B-pillar.
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on                                                      designed to seat, multiplied by
each axle must never exceed the GAWR for                                                      68 kilograms (150 lbs).
                                              Kilopascal (kPa)
the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s   The metric unit for air pressure. There are     Occupant distribution
door B-pillar.                                6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air   The distribution of occupants in a vehicle
                                              pressure is bars. There are                     at their designated seating positions.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)                    100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
The GVW comprises the weight of the                                                           Production options weight
                                              Maximum load rating
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,                                                   The combined weight of those installed
installed accessories, passengers and         The maximum load in kilograms and               regular production options weighing over
cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue      pounds that can be carried by the tire.         5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
load. The GVW must never exceed the                                                           standard items which they replace, not
GVWR indicated on the certification label     Maximum loaded vehicle weight                   previously considered in curb weight or
located on the driver’s door B-pillar.        The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,       accessory weight, including heavy duty
                                              total load weight, and production options       brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
                                              weight.                                         battery, and special trim.



                                                                                                                                    305
Operation
Tires and wheels


PSI (Pounds per square inch)                    TIN (Tire Identification Number)               Tire speed rating
A standard unit of measure for air pressure     Unique identifier which facilitates efforts    Part of tire designation; indicates the
-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).                       by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers     speed range for which a tire is approved.
                                                in recall situations or other safety matters
Recommended tire inflation pressure             concerning tires and gives purchases the       Traction
                                                means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
Recommended tire inflation pressure                                                            Force exerted by the vehicle on the road
                                                is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
listed on placard located on driver’s door                                                     via the tires. The amount of grip provided.
                                                tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
B-pillar for normal driving conditions.
                                                and “Date of manufacture”.
Provides best handling, tread life and                                                         Tread
riding comfort.                                                                                The portion of a tire that comes into
                                                Tire load rating
                                                                                               contact with the road.
Rim                                             Numerical code associated with the
                                                maximum load a tire can support.               Treadwear indicators
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are                                                         Narrow bands, sometimes called
seated.                                         Tire ply composition and material used
                                                                                               “wear bars” that show across the tread of
                                                This indicates the number of plies or the      a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread
Sidewall                                        number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
                                                                                               remains.
                                                the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac-
The portion of a tire between the tread and
                                                turers also must indicate the ply materials
the bead.
                                                in the tire and sidewall, which include
                                                steel, nylon, polyester, and others.




306
                                                                                                                                Operation
                                                                                                                        Tires and wheels


Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards            Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles      Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
A tire information system that provides           with tires of the same dimension all            wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,     around. If your vehicle is equipped with        wear on front tires and tread center wear
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are            tires of the same dimension all around,         on rear tires).
determined by tire manufacturers using            tires can be rotated, observing a a
                                                                                                  Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
government testing procedures. The                front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
                                                                                                  wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
ratings are molded into the sidewall of the       maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
                                                                                                  of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
tire.                                             direction of the tire ( page 284).
                                                                                                  Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
                                                  In some cases, such as when your vehicle        pressure.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire                  is equipped with mixed-size tires (different
Load on an individual tire that is
                                                  tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
                                                  is not possible.
                                                                                                   Warning!                              G
determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle               If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu-    Have the tightening torque checked after
weight and dividing it by two.                    ration, tires can be rotated according to        changing a wheel. Wheels could become
                                                  the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-          loose if not tightened with a torque of
Rotating tires                                    tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty      80 lb-ft (110 Nm).
                                                  pamphlet located in your vehicle literature      Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
                                                  portfolio. If none is available, tires should    bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
 Warning!                                G        be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles
                                                  (5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces-
 Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires                                                   For information on wheel change, see the
                                                  sary, according to the degree of tire wear.
 are of the same dimension.                                                                       “Practical hints” section ( page 356) and
                                                  The same rotation (spinning) direction
                                                                                                  ( page 377).
 If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size      must be maintained ( page 284).
 tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
 rear), tire rotation is not possible.


                                                                                                                                          307
Operation
Winter driving


Before the onset of winter, have your        Winter tires
vehicle winterized at an authorized                                                          Warning!                              G
Mercedes-Benz Center. This service           Always use winter tires at temperatures
includes:                                    below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry            Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
                                                                                             1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
                                             road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated        6
   Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze                                                     longer suitable for winter operation.
                                             tires provide special winter performance.
   concentration.
                                             Make sure the tires you use show M+S and
   Addition of cleaning concentrate to the   the mountain/snowflake.marking on              Always observe the speed rating of the
   water of the windshield and headlamp      the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific   winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
   cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate       snow traction performance requirements         maximum speed for which your tires are
   “MB SummerFit” to a premixed wind-        of the Rubber Manufacturers Association        rated is below the speed rating of your
   shield washer solvent/antifreeze          (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Can-       vehicle, you must place a notice to this
   which is formulated for below freezing    ada (RAC) and have been designed specif-       effect where it will be seen by the driver.
   temperatures ( page 418).                 ically for use in snow conditions. Use of      Such notices are available from your tire
   Battery test. Battery capacity drops      winter tires is the only way to achieve the    dealer or from any authorized
   with decreasing ambient temperature.      maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®,        Mercedes-Benz Center.
   A well charged battery helps to make      and 4MATIC in winter operation.
   sure that the engine can be started,      For safe handling, make sure that all
   even at low ambient temperatures.         mounted winter tires are of the same make
   Tire change.                              and have the same tread design.




308
                                                                                                                                     Operation
                                                                                                                                Winter driving


                                                 Snow chains                                         ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
 Warning!                               G                                                            wheels, they may scrape against the body or axle
                                                 ! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clear-      components. The tires or the vehicle could be
 If you use your spare tire when winter tires    ance for snow chains. To help avoid serious dam-    damaged as a result.
 are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that   age to your vehicle or tires, make sure that the
                                                                                                         Only use snow chains that are
 the difference in tire characteristics may      use of snow chains is permissible as specified in
                                                 the "Technical data" section of this Operator’s         approved by Mercedes-Benz. Any
 very well impair turning stability and that
                                                 Manual, see “Rims and Tires” ( page 403).               authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
 overall driving stability may be reduced.
                                                                                                         be glad to advise you on this subject.
 Adapt your driving style accordingly.           Snow chains should only be driven on
                                                 snow-covered roads at speeds not higher                 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
 Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
                                                 than 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains                    depending on location. Always check
 tire at the nearest authorized
                                                 as soon as possible when driving on roads               local and state laws before installing
 Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                 without snow.                                           snow chains.

Block heater (Canada only)                       Please observe the following guidelines                 Do not use snow chains on the spare
                                                 when using snow chains:                                 wheel ( page 406).
The engine is equipped with a block                  Using snow chains is not permissible            i When driving with snow chains, you may
heater.                                              with all wheel/tire combinations                wish to deactivate the ESP® ( page 86) before
The electrical cable may be installed at an          ( page 403).                                    setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve
                                                                                                     the vehicle‘s traction.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.                     Use snow chains in pairs and on rear
                                                     wheels only. Follow the manufacturer's
                                                     mounting instructions.




                                                                                                                                               309
Operation
Maintenance


We strongly recommend that you have         Maintenance service indicator
your vehicle serviced by an authorized      message
Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with
the Maintenance Booklet at the times        The maintenance service indicator will
called for by the maintenance service       notify you when your next maintenance
indicator display.                          service is due.
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in   Starting approximately 1 month before
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet     your next maintenance service is due, one
and maintenance service indicator at the    of the following messages will appear in
designated times/mileage will result in     the multifunction display while you are
vehicle damage not covered by the           driving or when you switch on the ignition   The type of maintenance service due is
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.             (example service A):                         indicated in the multifunction display:

                                            Service A in XXXXX miles (km)                9         Basic service (A)
                                            Service A in XXX Days                        ½         Extended service (B)
                                            Service A due now




310
                                                                                                                      Operation
                                                                                                                   Maintenance


i Vehicles equipped with Maintenance              Clearing the maintenance service
System (U.S. vehicles. Canada vehicles, depend-   indicator message
ing on vehicle production date):
                                                  The maintenance service indicator is
The Maintenance System in your vehicle tracks     automatically cleared
distance driven and the time elapsed since your
last maintenance service and calculates other        after approximately 10 seconds when
maintenance service work required.                   you switch on the ignition or when
                                                     reaching the maintenance service
i Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible Service       threshold while driving
System) only (Canada vehicles, depending on ve-
hicle production date):                              after approximately 30 seconds, once
   FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level,      the suggested maintenance service      1 Reset button
   vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven      term has passed                          Press reset button 1 on the
   and the time elapsed since your last service                                               instrument cluster.
   and calculates other maintenance service       You can also clear it yourself.
   work required.                                                                             The maintenance service indicator
   The interval between maintenance services                                                  message is cleared and the standard
   depends on your driving habits. A gentle                                                   display appears in the multifunction
   driving style, moderate engine speeds and                                                  display ( page 126).
   the avoidance of short-distance trips will
   lengthen the interval between services.




                                                                                                                              311
Operation
Maintenance


Maintenance service term exceeded            Calling up the maintenance service                 Resetting the maintenance service
If you have exceeded the suggested           indicator display                                  indicator
maintenance service term, you will see the
                                                 Switch on the ignition ( page 32).             In the event that the maintenance service
following message in the multifunction
                                                                                                on your vehicle is not carried out by an
display:                                         Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
                                                                                                authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can
                                                 tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
Service A exceeded by XXXX miles (km)                                                           have the maintenance service indicator
                                                 until the standard display appears in
Service A exceeded by XXX Days                                                                  reset. The automotive maintenance facility
                                                 the multifunction display ( page 121).
In addition, a signal sounds when the                                                           carrying out the maintenance service will
                                                 Press button k or j until the                  find the information for resetting the
message appears.
                                                 maintenance service indicator display          maintenance service indicator in the
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will         with the service symbol 9 or ½                 maintenance-relevant information for your
reset the maintenance service indicator          and the service deadline appears in the        vehicle. Such information is available from
following a completed maintenance                multifunction display.                         either your authorized Mercedes-Benz
service.                                                                                        Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
                                             i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
                                             disconnection will not be included in the count    i If the maintenance service indicator was in-
                                             shown by the maintenance service indicator. To     advertently reset, have an authorized
                                             arrive at the true maintenance service deadline,   Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
                                             you will need to subtract these days from the
                                             days shown in the maintenance service indicator    Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
                                             message or maintenance service indicator dis-      been performed. Resetting the system without
                                             play.                                              performing the proper service as called for by
                                                                                                the maintenance service indicator will result in
                                             Do not confuse the maintenance service indica-     engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
                                             tor with the engine oil level indicator N.         covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warran-
                                                                                                ty.




312
                                                                                                                        Operation
                                                                                                                     Vehicle care
  Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle             While in operation, even while parked, your   Frequent washing reduces and/or
                                             vehicle is subjected to varying external      eliminates the aggressiveness and
Regular and proper care will help to         influences which, if gone unchecked, can      potency of the above adverse influences.
maintain the value of your vehicle. The      attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
                                                                                           More frequent washings are necessary to
best way to protect your vehicle from        underbody and cause lasting damage.
                                                                                           deal with unfavorable conditions:
harmful environmental influences is to
                                             Such damage is caused not only by
wash it and use protective treatments reg-                                                    near the ocean
                                             extreme and varying climatic conditions,
ularly.                                                                                       in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
                                             but also by:
                                                                                              emissions)
 Warning!                               G       Air pollution
                                                                                              during winter operation
                                                Road salt
 Many cleaning products can be hazardous.                                                  You should check your vehicle from time to
                                                Tar
 Some are poisonous, others are flammable.                                                 time for stone chipping or other damage.
 Always follow the instructions on the          Gravel and stone chipping                  Any damage should be repaired as soon as
 particular container. Always open your                                                    possible to prevent corrosion.
                                             To avoid paint damage, you should
 vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning    immediately remove:                           In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
 the inside.                                                                               of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a
                                                Grease and oil
 Never use fluids or solvents that are not                                                 thorough check is a washing of the
 designed for cleaning your vehicle.            Fuel                                       underbody followed by a thorough
 Always lock away cleaning products and         Coolant                                    inspection. Damaged areas need to be
 keep them out of reach of children.
                                                                                           re-undercoated.
                                                Brake fluid
                                                Bird droppings
                                                Insects
                                                Tree resins, etc.

                                                                                                                               313
Operation
Vehicle care


Your vehicle has been treated at the             The following topics deal with the cleaning         Paintwork, painted body components
factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the      and care of your vehicle and give important
body cavities which will last for the lifetime   “how-to” information as well as references          ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
                                                                                                     similar materials to painted body components
of the vehicle. Post-production treatment        to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care                  may damage the paintwork.
is neither necessary nor recommended by          products.
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility                                                             Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
of incompatibility between materials used        Power washer                                        should be applied when water drops on the
in the production process and others                                                                 paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
applied later.                                   ! Follow the instructions provided by the           normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
                                                 power washer manufacturer on maintaining a          depending on the climate and washing
We have selected car-care products and           distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
                                                                                                     detergent used.
compiled recommendations which are               the power washer.
specially matched to our vehicles and            Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires.       Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
which always reflect the latest technology.      The intense jet of water can result in damage to    should be applied if the paint surface
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved            the tire.                                           shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of
car-care products at an authorized               Always replace a damaged tire.                      gloss).
Mercedes-Benz Center.                            Always keep the jet of water moving across the      Do not apply any of these products or wax
                                                 surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts,   if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
                                                 electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber       hood is still hot.
damage due to negligent or incorrect care        parts.
cannot always be removed or repaired with                                                               Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
the car-care products recommended here.          Tar stains                                             Stick for quick and provisional repairs
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an                                                              of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.                 Quickly remove tar stains before they dry              stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
                                                 and become more difficult to remove. A tar
                                                 remover is recommended.



314
                                                                                                                              Operation
                                                                                                                            Vehicle care


Engine cleaning                               Hand-wash                                         Automatic car wash
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,     Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle         You can have your car washed in an
make sure to protect electrical               in direct sunlight.                               automatic car wash from the start.
components and connectors from contact                                                          Automatic car washes without brushes are
                                                 Only use a mild car wash detergent,
with water and cleaning agents.                                                                 preferable.
                                                 such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Corrosion protection, such as MB                 Shampoo.                                          To protect the filter system, switch the
Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied to                                                            climate control or automatic climate
                                                 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
the engine compartment after every                                                                 control to air recirculation mode, see
                                                 diffused jet of water.
engine cleaning. Before applying, all                                                              “Air recirculation” ( page 165) for
control linkage bushings and joints should       Direct only a very weak spray towards             climate control or ( page 175) for
be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all           the ventilation intake.                           automatic climate control.
pulleys should be protected from any wax.        Use plenty of water and rinse the              ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
                                                 sponge and chamois frequently.                 touchless car wash which uses caustic spray.
Vehicle washing                                                                                 Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
                                                 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces                                                     paint or ornamental moldings.
                                                 dry with a chamois.
of road salt as soon as possible.                                                               If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it
                                                 Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
When washing the vehicle underbody, do                                                          before running it through the automatic
                                                 the finish.
not forget to clean the inner sides of the                                                      car wash.
wheels.                                       ! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
                                              Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
                                              non-scratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
                                              Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
                                              cloth or sponge.
                                              Otherwise you nay scratch or damage the paint.


                                                                                                                                        315
Operation
Vehicle care


! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch        Ornamental moldings                               Headlamps, tail lamps, side markers,
is set to 0 ( page 51). Otherwise, e.g. the rain
                                                    For regular cleaning and care of                  turn signal lenses
sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle      ornamental moldings, use a damp cloth.               Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
damage.                                                                                                  Mercedes-Benz approved Car
                                                    ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental            Shampoo, with plenty of water.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior   moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle      have chrome appearance, they could be made of     ! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
through an automatic car wash to prevent            anodized aluminum that will be damaged when       suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window
damage to the mirrors.                              cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a       cleaning solutions which are not suitable may
                                                    damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.    damage the plastic lamp lenses of the
i After running the vehicle through an              For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you   headlamps. Therefore, do not use abrasives,
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
                                                    are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome          solvents or cleaners that contain solvents.
windshield ( page 317). This will prevent
smears and reduce wiping noise which can be         cleaner. If in doubt whether an ornamental        Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
caused by residual wax on the windshield.           molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized   non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses.
                                                    Mercedes-Benz Center.                             Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry
When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
                                                                                                      cloth or sponge.
mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may
vibrate.                                                                                              Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
                                                                                                      surface.




316
                                                                                                                                       Operation
                                                                                                                                    Vehicle care


Cleaning the windows and the wiper                   Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win-         Light alloy wheels
blades                                               dow cleaning solution on all outside            If possible, clean wheels once a week.
                                                     and inside glass surfaces.
! Never open the hood when the wiper arms                                                                Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
are folded forward.                                  An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
                                                                                                         Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
                                                     mended.
   Make sure the hood is fully closed.                                                                   spray of water for cleaning the light
   Switch off the ignition ( page 32).           ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto              alloy wheels.
                                                 the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
                                                 the starter switch.                                 ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
 Warning!                              G         Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
                                                                                                     may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.

                                                 back. If released, the force of the impact from     ! The vehicle should not be parked for an
 For safety reasons, switch off wipers and       the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.   extended period of time immediately after it has
 remove SmartKey from starter switch                                                                 been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
 before cleaning the windshield and/or the       ! To clean the window interior, do not use a        have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
                                                 dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners          Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased
 wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor        containing solvents. Do not touch the inside of     corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
 could suddenly turn on and cause injury.        the front, rear or side windows with hard objects   Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
                                                 such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may        the wheel paint if the car is not driven after
   Fold the wiper arms forward until they        damage the windows.                                 cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
   snap into place.                                                                                  should always be warmed-up before it is parked
                                                                                                     after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They                                                       for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
could tear.                                                                                          When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
   Clean the wiper blade inserts with a                                                              Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
                                                                                                     products, take care not to spray them on the
   clean cloth and detergent solution.
                                                                                                     brake disks.




                                                                                                                                                 317
Operation
Vehicle care


Plastic and rubber parts                        ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on       Hard plastic trim items
                                                these parts.
   Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or                                                             Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
   mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a     Never apply strong force and only use a soft,        Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
   washing solution.                            non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.      with light pressure.
                                                Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
   Wipe with a cloth moistened in a             cloth or sponge.                                  ! Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
   lukewarm solution.                           Otherwise you may scratch or damage the           non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
                                                surface.                                          Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
   The surface may temporarily change                                                             cloth or sponge.
   color. If this is the case, wait for it to
                                                                                                  Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
   dry.
                                                                                                  surface.

 Warning!                               G
 Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
 containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
 the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol-
 vents will make the surface porous and vehi-
 cle occupants could suffer serious injuries
 from plastic parts coming loose in the event
 of air bag deployment.




318
                                                                                                               Operation
                                                                                                             Vehicle care


Steering wheel and gear selector lever   Headliner and shelf below rear window   Seat belts
   Wipe with a damp cloth and dry           Use a soft bristle brush or a           Only use clear, lukewarm water and
   thoroughly or clean with                 dry-shampoo cleaner in case of          soap.
   Mercedes-Benz approved Leather           excessive dirt.
   Care.                                                                         ! The seat belts must not be treated with
                                                                                 chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat
                                                                                 belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in
Carpets                                                                          direct sunlight.
   Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
   and Fabric Care for cleaning the                                               Warning!                              G
   carpets.
                                                                                  Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
                                                                                  severely weaken them. In a crash they may
                                                                                  not be able to provide adequate protection.




                                                                                                                         319
Operation
Vehicle care


Upholstery                                      Leather upholstery                              Wood trims
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing        Please note that leather upholstery is a           Dampen cloth using water and use
clothing that have the tendency to give off     natural product and is therefore subject to        damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause        a natural aging process. Leather                   vehicle.
the upholstery to become permanently            upholstery may also react to certain
discolored. By lining the seats with a          ambient influences such as high humidity        ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
                                                                                                wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
proper intermediate cover,                      or high temperature by showing wrinkles         may be abrasive.
contact-discoloration will be prevented.        for example.
                                                   Wipe leather upholstery with a damp
 Warning!                              G           cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
                                                   Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
 Only use seat or head restraint covers which      Care.
 have been tested and approved by
 Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.          ! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
                                                the upholstery.
 Using other seat or head restraint covers
 may interfere with or prevent the activation   Exercise particular care when cleaning
 of the active head restraints. Contact an      perforated leather as its underside should
 authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for            not become wet.
 availability.
                                                MB Tex upholstery
                                                   Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
                                                   Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and
                                                   apply with light pressure for cleaning
                                                   the upholstery.


320
                    Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses




                               321
Practical hints
What to do if …


Lamps in instrument cluster               General information:                             bulb self-check when switching on the
                                          If any of the following lamps in the instru-     ignition, have the respective bulb checked
                                          ment cluster fails to come on during the         and replaced if necessary.

Problem                                   Possible cause/consequence                     Suggested solution
-         The yellow ABS indicator lamp   The ABS has detected a malfunction and            Continue driving with added caution.
          comes on while the engine is    has switched off. The BAS and the ESP®            Wheels may lock during hard braking,
          running.                        are also switched off (see messages in the        reducing steering capability.
                                          multifunction display).
                                                                                            Read and observe messages in the
                                          The brake system is still functioning nor-        multifunction display ( page 333).
                                          mally but without the systems specified
                                                                                            Have the system checked at an autho-
                                          above.
                                                                                            rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
                                          If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning,        possible.
                                          other systems such as the navigation
                                                                                         Failure to follow these instructions
                                          system* or the automatic transmission
                                                                                         increases the risk of an accident.
                                          may also be malfunctioning.
                                          The charging voltage has fallen below             Switch off electrical consumers that are
                                          10 volts. The ABS has switched off.               currently not needed, e.g. seat heating*.
                                          The battery might not be charged suffi-           If necessary, have the generator and bat-
                                          ciently.                                          tery checked.
                                                                                         When the voltage is above this value again,
                                                                                         the ABS is operational again.




322
                                                                                                                 Practical hints
                                                                                                                  What to do if …


Problem                                   Possible cause/consequence                       Suggested solution
-         The yellow ABS indicator lamp   The ABS is temporarily not available. The           Drive a short distance with added
          comes on while the engine is    ESP® and the BAS are also unavailable.              caution at a vehicle speed of above
          running.                                                                            12 mph (20 km/h).
                                          The system’s self-diagnosis may not be
                                                                                              When the ABS indicator lamp goes
                                          completed yet.
                                                                                              out, the ABS, the ESP®, and the BAS
                                          The brake system is still functioning normally      are available again.
                                          but without the systems specified above.
                                                                                           If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
                                                                                              Continue driving with added caution.
                                                                                              Have the system checked at an autho-
                                                                                              rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
                                                                                              as possible.
                                                                                           Failure to follow these instructions in-
                                                                                           creases the risk of an accident.




                                                                                                                                 323
Practical hints
What to do if …


Problem                                          Possible cause/consequence                           Suggested solution
;           (USA only)                           You are driving with the parking brake set.             Release the parking brake ( page 48).
3           (Canada only)
            The red brake warning lamp
            comes on while driving and you
            hear a warning sound.
;           (USA only)                           There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser-         Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehi-
                                                 voir.                                                   cle and notify an authorized
3           (Canada only)
                                                                                                         Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add
            The red brake warning lamp                                                                   brake fluid! This will not solve the prob-
            comes on while driving.                                                                      lem.

                                                  ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
 Warning!                                G        fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
                                                  below, have the brake system checked for brake
 Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi-      pad thickness and leaks.
 nated can result in an accident. Have your
 brake system checked immediately if the
 brake warning lamp stays on. Don’t add
 brake fluid before checking the brake
 system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir
 can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
 engine parts and the brake fluid catching
 fire. You could be seriously burned.


324
                                                                                                                        Practical hints
                                                                                                                         What to do if …


Problem                                          Possible cause/consequence                  Suggested solution
ú           (USA only)                           There is a malfunction in:                     Have the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
                                                                                                sible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
±           (Canada only)                           The fuel management system
                                                                                                Center.
            The yellow engine malfunction           The ignition system                         An on-board diagnostic connector is used
            indicator lamp comes on while                                                       by the service station to link the vehicle to
                                                    The emission control system
            driving.                                                                            the shop diagnostics system. It allows the
                                                    Systems which affect emissions              accurate identification of system malfunc-
                                                 Such malfunctions may result in excessive      tions through the readout of diagnostic
                                                 emissions values and may switch the en-        trouble codes. It is located in the front left
                                                 gine to its limp-home (emergency               area of the footwell next to the parking
                                                 operation) mode.                               brake pedal.

i Some states may by law require you to visit
a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check lo-
cal requirements.




                                                                                                                                        325
Practical hints
What to do if …


Problem                                   Possible cause/consequence                  Suggested solution
ú         (USA only)                      Your fuel tank is empty.                       After refuelling start, turn off and
                                                                                         restart the engine three or four times
±         (Canada only)
                                                                                         in succession.
          The yellow engine malfunction
                                                                                      The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
          indicator lamp comes on while
                                                                                      not need to have your vehicle checked.
          driving.
                                          A loss of pressure has been detected in the      Check the fuel cap ( page 271).
                                          fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed
                                                                                      If it is not closed properly:
                                          properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
                                                                                           Close the fuel cap.
                                                                                      If it is closed properly:
                                                                                         Have the fuel system checked by an
                                                                                         authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.




326
                                                                                                                Practical hints
                                                                                                                 What to do if …


Problem                            Possible cause/consequence                 Suggested solution
v         The yellowESP®   warn- The   ESP® has been switched off with the       Switch the ESP® back on ( page 87).
          ing lamp comes on while ESP® switch or has been switched off due       Exceptions: ( page 85).
          the engine is running.  to a malfunction.
                                                                                 If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed
                                   Risk of accident!                             and driving to the prevailing road, weather and
                                   When the ESP® is switched off it will not     traffic conditions.
                                   stabilize the vehicle if the system recog- If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
                                   nizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that
                                                                                   Continue driving with added caution.
                                   a wheel is spinning.
                                                                                   Observer additional messages that may appear in
                                   The cruise control is deactivated and can-
                                                                                   the multifunction display ( page 335).
                                   not be switched on.
                                                                                   Have the system checked at an authorized
                                                                                   Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v         The yellow ESP® warn-    The ESP® or traction control has come         When driving off, apply as little throttle as possi-
          ing lamp flashes while   into operation because of detected trac-      ble.
          driving.                 tion loss in at least one tire.
                                                                                 While driving, ease up on the accelerator.
                                   The cruise control is deactivated
                                                                                 Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
                                                                                 road, weather and traffic conditions.
                                                                                 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
                                                                                 Exceptions: ( page 85).
                                                                              Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk
                                                                              of an accident.


                                                                                                                                327
Practical hints
What to do if …


Problem                                    Possible cause/consequence                     Suggested solution
          The yellow fuel tank reserve     The fuel level has gone below the reserve         Refuel at the next gas station
          warning lamp in the fuel gauge   mark.                                             ( page 271).
          ( page 24) comes on while
          driving.
<         The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your       Fasten your seat belts.
          on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before
                                                                                             Regardless of whether the seat belts
          after starting the engine.       driving off.
                                                                                             are fastened or not, the seat belt tell-
                                                                                             tale always comes on and remains lit
                                                                                             for 6 seconds after starting the
                                                                                             engine.
<         You hear a warning chime for a   You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.      Fasten your seat belt.
          maximum of 6 seconds after                                                         The warning chime stops sounding.
          starting the engine.
<         The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have for-         Fasten your seat belts.
          on while the vehicle is standing gotten to fasten your seat belts.                 The seat belt telltale goes out.
          still and the engine is running or
          during driving.
                                           There are items placed on the front passen-       Remove the items from the front pas-
                                           ger seat and therefore the system senses the      senger seat and put them in a safe
                                           front passenger seat as being occupied.           place.
                                                                                             The seat belt telltale goes out.



328
                                                                                                                             Practical hints
                                                                                                                              What to do if …


Problem                                                  Possible cause/consequence                     Suggested solution
<             During driving the red seat belt           The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph          Fasten your seat belts.
              telltale flashes and you addition-         (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas-
                                                                                                           The seat belt telltale goes out and the
              ally hear an intermittent warning          senger have forgotten to fasten your seat
                                                                                                           warning chime stops sounding.
              chime with increasing intensity.           belts.
                                                         There are items placed on the front passen-       Remove the items from the front pas-
                                                         ger seat and therefore the system senses the      senger seat and put them in a safe
                                                         front passenger seat as being occupied.           place.
                                                                                                           The seat belt telltale goes out and the
                                                                                                           warning chime stops sounding.

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driv-
er’s and the front passenger’s seat belt are fas-
tened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.




                                                                                                                                             329
Practical hints
What to do if …


Problem                                           Possible cause/consequence              Suggested solution
1           The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint         Drive with added caution to the near-
            on while driving.                systems. The air bags or emergency              est authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                             tensioning devices (ETDs) could deploy
                                             unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an acci-
                                             dent.


 Warning!                                  G
 In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
 indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
 not be operational. For your safety, we
 strongly recommend that you visit an
 authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
 immediately to have the system checked;
 otherwise the SRS may not be deployed
 when needed in an accident, which could
 result in serious or fatal injury, or it might
 deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
 which could also result in an accident
 and/or injury to you or to others.




330
                                                                                                         Practical hints
                                                                                                          What to do if …


Lamp in center console

Problem                                              Possible cause/conse-   Suggested solution
                                                     quence
56 The front passenger front air bag The system is malfunctioning.              Have the system checked as soon as possible
                off indicator lamp illuminates and                              by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                remains illuminated with the
                                                                                Also note any messages in the multifunction
                weight of a typical adult or some-
                                                                                display and follow corrective steps
                one larger than a small individual
                                                                                ( page 333).
                on the front passenger seat.


 Warning!                              G
 If the 56 indicator lamp illuminates
 and remains illuminated with the weight of a
 typical adult or someone larger than a small
 individual on the front passenger seat, do
 not have any passenger use the front
 passenger seat until the system has been
 repaired.




                                                                                                                        331
Practical hints
What to do if …


Problem                                           Possible cause/conse-   Suggested solution
                                                  quence
56 The front passenger front The system is malfunctioning.                   Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and
                air bag off indicator lamp                                   child seat and check installation of the child seat.
                does not illuminate
                                                                             Make sure that no objects applying supplemental
                and/or does not remain
                                                                             weight onto the seat are present.
                illuminated with the
                weight of a typical                                          If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
                12-month-old child in a                                      remains out, have the system checked as soon as pos-
                standard child restraint or                                  sible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not
                less on the front passen-                                    transport a child on the front passenger seat until the
                ger seat.                                                    system has been repaired.
                                                                             Also note any messages in the multifunction display
                                                                             and follow corrective steps ( page 337).


 Warning!                                G
 If the 56 indicator lamp does not
 illuminate or remains out with the weight of
 a typical 12-month-old child in a standard
 child restraint or less on the front passenger
 seat, do not transport a child on the front
 passenger seat until the system has been
 repaired.


332
                                                                                                                  Practical hints
                                                                                                                   What to do if …


Vehicle status messages in the                Certain messages of high priority cannot
multifunction display                         be cleared from the multifunction display     Warning!                              G
                                              using the reset button ( page 118) or
Warning and malfunction messages              button j, k, ÿ, or è on the                   All categories of messages contain
appear in the multifunction display located   steering wheel.                               important information which should be
in the instrument cluster.                                                                  taken note of and, where a malfunction is
                                              Other messages of high priority and           indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
Certain warning and malfunction messag-       messages of less immediate priority can       an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
es are accompanied by an audible signal.      be cleared from the multifunction display
                                              using the reset button ( page 118) or         Failure to repair condition noted may cause
Address these messages accordingly and                                                      damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
follow the additional instructions given in   button j, k, ÿ, or è on the
                                              steering wheel. They are then stored in the   Limited Warranty, or result in property
this Operator’s Manual.                                                                     damage or personal injury.
                                              vehicle status message memory
Selecting the vehicle status message          ( page 130). Remember that clearing a
memory menu in the control system             message will only make the message
( page 130) displays both cleared and         disappear. Clearing a message will not
uncleared messages.                           correct the condition that caused the
High-priority messages appear in the          message to appear.
multifunction display in red color.




                                                                                                                                   333
Practical hints
What to do if …


                                                      On the pages that follow, you will find a
 Warning!                                  G          compilation of the most important warning
                                                      and malfunction messages that may
 No messages will be displayed if either the          appear in the multifunction display.
 instrument cluster or the multifunction
 display is inoperative.                              For your convenience the messages are
                                                      divided into two sections:
 As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
 mation about your driving conditions, such              Text messages ( page 335)
 as speed or outside temperature,                        Symbol messages ( page 343)
 warning/indicator lamps,
 malfunction/warning messages or the
 failure of any systems. Driving
 characteristics may be impaired.
 If you must continue to drive, please do so
 with added caution. Visit an authorized
 Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.


i Switching on the ignition causes all
instrument cluster lamps (except low beam
headlamp indicator lamp, high beam headlamp
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator lamps
unless activated) as well as the multifunction dis-
play to come on. Make sure the lamps and multi-
function display are in working order before
starting your journey.



334
                                                                                                   Practical hints
                                                                                                    What to do if …


Text messages

Display message                 Possible cause/consequence                  Possible solution
ABS               ABS, ESP      The ABS and ESP® are not available due to      Continue driving with added caution.
                  inoperative   a malfunction.                                 Wheels will lock during hard braking,
                  See                                                          reducing steering capability.
                                The BAS is also deactivated.
                  Operator’s
                                                                               Have the system checked at an autho-
                  Manual        The brake system is still functioning
                                                                               rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
                                normally but without but without the
                                                                               as possible.
                                systems specified above.
                                                                            Failure to follow these instructions in-
                                                                            creases the risk of an accident.
Cruise cont. inoperative        Cruise control is malfunctioning.           Have the cruise control checked by an au-
and SPEED-                                                                  thorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
TRONIC
ESP          inoperative        The ESP® has switched off due to a             Continue driving with added caution.
                  See           malfunction.
                                                                               Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                  Operator’s
                                The ABS and the BAS might not be opera-        Center as soon as possible.
                  Manual
                                tional.
                                                                            Failure to follow these instructions
                                The brake system is still functioning       increases the risk of an accident.
                                normally but without the systems speci-
                                fied above.




                                                                                                                   335
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display message          Possible cause/consequence                        Possible solution
ESP        unavailable   The ESP is temporarily not available.                Drive a short distance with added
           See                                                                caution at a vehicle speed of above
                         The system’s self-diagnosis may not be
           Operator’s                                                         12 mph (20 km/h).
                         completed yet.
           Manual                                                             When the message disappears, the
                         The ABS and the BAS might not be                     ESP® is available again.
                         operational.
                                                                           If the message does not disappear:
                         The brake system is still functioning normally
                         but without the systems specified above.             Continue driving with added caution.
                                                                              Have the system checked at an autho-
                                                                              rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
                                                                              possible.
                                                                           Failure to follow these instructions increas-
                                                                           es the risk of an accident.
                         The charging voltage has fallen below 10 volts.      Continue driving with added caution.
                         The ESP® has switched off.
                                                                              When the voltage is above this value
                         The BAS may be switched off, too. The battery
                                                                              again, the ESP® is operational again.
                         may not be charged. The battery or the gener-
                         ator may be malfunctioning.                          Have the system checked at an autho-
                                                                              rized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
                         The ABS might not be operational.
                                                                              possible.
                         The brake system is still functioning normally
                         but without the systems specified above.



336
                                                                                                             Practical hints
                                                                                                              What to do if …


Display message   Possible cause/consequence          Possible solution
Front-pass.       Front passenger front air bag is     Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
airbag            activated while driving even though passenger seat for the following:
enabled           a child, small individual, or object
                                                          Switch off the ignition ( page 32).
See               below the system’s weight
Operator’s        threshold is on the front passenger     Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and proper-
Manual            seat, or the front passenger seat is    ly secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if neces-
                  empty. Objects on the seat or           sary.
                  forces acting on the seat may           Make sure that no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
                  make the system sense supple-           are present. The system may recognize such supplemental weight and
                  mental weight.                          sense that an occupant on the front passenger seat is of a greater
                                                          weight than actually present.
                                                          Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
                                                          on the ignition ( page 32).
                                                          (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                                             337
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display message     Possible cause/   Possible solution
                    consequence
                                      Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console ( page 27) and the mul-
                                      tifunction display in the instrument cluster ( page 24) for the following:
                                      With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
                                          the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain
                                          illuminated, indicating that the OCS ( page 64) has deactivated the air bag.
                                          the message Front-pass. airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the mes-
                                          sage Front-pass. airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not appear
                                          in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last 60 sec-
                                          onds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure nei-
                                          ther message appears in the multifunction display.
                                      If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depend-
                                      ing on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS ( page 64), the
                                      56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
                                      If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
                                      checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


 Warning!                      G      out even after performing the above correc-
                                      tive steps, do not have any children 12 years
                                                                                      use the front passenger seat until the sys-
                                                                                      tem has been repaired.
 If the 56 indicator lamp remains     old and under and other small individuals




338
                                                                                                            Practical hints
                                                                                                             What to do if …


Display message   Possible cause/consequence            Possible solution
Front-pass.       Front passenger front air bag is deac- Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the
airbag            tivated while driving even though an front passenger seat for the following:
disabled          adult or someone larger than a small
                                                            Switch off the ignition ( page 32).
See               individual is occupying the front pas-
Operator’s        senger seat. Forces acting on the         Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
Manual            seat may make the system sense a          Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and
                  decrease in weight.                       switch on the ignition ( page 32).
                                                        (Continued on next page)




                                                                                                                           339
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display message     Possible cause/    Possible solution
                    consequence
                                       Monitor the 56 indicator lamp on the center console ( page 27) and the mul-
                                       tifunction display in the instrument cluster ( page 24) for the following:
                                       With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
                                           the 56 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and remain
                                           illuminated, indicating that the OCS ( page 64) has deactivated the air bag.
                                           the message Front-pass. airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the mes-
                                           sage Front-pass. airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not appear
                                           in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last 60 sec-
                                           onds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
                                           neither message appears in the multifunction display.
                                       If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again. Depend-
                                       ing on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS ( page 64), the
                                       56 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
                                       If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
                                       checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


 Warning!                      G      illuminated with an adult occupant on the
                                      front passenger seat even after performing
                                                                                     passenger use the front passenger seat until
                                                                                     the system has been repaired.
 If the 56 indicator lamp remains     the above corrective steps, do not have any




340
                                                                                                                                 Practical hints
                                                                                                                                   What to do if …


Display message                                      Possible cause/consequence                 Possible solution
                 Run Flat Indicator                  The Run Flat Indicator* is malfunc-            Have the Run Flat Indicator* checked by an
                 inoperative                         tioning or has been switched off due           authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                     to an error.
                 Check tires                         There was a warning message about              Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure
                 Then restart                        a loss in tire inflation pressure and          is set for each tire.
                 Run Flat Indicator                  the Run Flat Indicator* has not been
                                                                                                    Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator*.
                                                     reactivated yet.
                 Tire pressure                       The Run Flat Indicator* indicates              Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
                 Check tires                         that the pressure is too low in one or         abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe
                                                     more tires.                                    the traffic situation around you.
                                                                                                    Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as
                                                                                                    required ( page 290).
                                                                                                    If necessary, change the wheel ( page 377).
                                                                                                    Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator* after adjusting
                                                                                                    the tire inflation pressure values ( page 293).


Warning!                                    G            You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
                                                         ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects       sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.




                                                                                                                                                 341
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display message                                   Possible cause/consequence      Possible solution
SRS             Restraint                         The system is malfunctioning.      Drive with added caution to the nearest
                system                                                               authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                malfunction
                Visit
                workshop


 Warning!                                G
 In the event a malfunction of the SRS is
 indicated as outlined above, the SRS may
 not be operational.
 For your safety, we strongly recommend
 that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
 Center immediately to have the system
 checked; otherwise the SRS may not be
 deployed when needed in an accident,
 which could result in serious or fatal injury,
 or it might deploy unexpectedly and
 unnecessarily which could also result in
 injury.




342
                                                                                                        Practical hints
                                                                                                         What to do if …


Symbol messages

Display symbol    Display message        Possible cause/consequence              Possible solution
#                                        The battery is no longer charging.          Stop immediately and check the
                                         Possible causes:                            poly-V-belt in a safe location or as
                                                                                     soon as it is safe to do so.
                                            broken poly-V-belt
                                                                                 If it is broken:
                                            alternator malfunctioning
                                                                                     Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
                                                                                     the engine will overheat due to an
                                                                                     inoperative water pump which may
                                                                                     result in damage to the engine. Notify
                                                                                     an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                                 If it is intact:
                                                                                     Drive immediately to the nearest
                                                                                     authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                  Low voltage            The battery has insufficient voltage.       Start the engine ( page 46).
                  Charge battery
                  Low voltage            The battery has insufficient voltage.       Turn off unnecessary electrical
                  Switch off Consumers                                               consumers.




                                                                                                                        343
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol           Display message            Possible cause/consequence                       Possible solution
; (USA only)             Release                    You are driving with the parking brake              Release the parking brake
                         parking brake              set.                                                ( page 48).
! (Canada only)
2                        Brake                      The brake pads have reached their wear              Have the brake pads replaced as soon
                         wear                       limit.                                              as possible.
; (USA only)             Check brake                There is insufficient brake fluid in the            Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and
                         fluid level                reservoir.                                          notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
3 (Canada only)
                                                                                                        Center. Do not add brake fluid! This
                                                                                                        will not solve the problem.

                                                 ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake     ! Brake pad thickness must be visually in-
 Warning!                               G        fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or   spected by a qualified technician at the intervals
                                                 below, have the brake system checked for brake      specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
 Driving with the message Check brake            pad thickness and leaks.
 fluid level displayed can result in an ac-
 cident. Have your brake system checked im-
 mediately. Do not add brake fluid before
 checking the brake system. Overfilling the
 brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
 brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
 brake fluid catching fire. You could be seri-
 ously burned.




344
                                                                                                         Practical hints
                                                                                                          What to do if …


Display symbol        Display message               Possible cause/consequence      Possible solution
B                     Top up                        The coolant level is too low.      Add coolant ( page 278).
                      coolant
                                                                                       If you have to add coolant frequently,
                      See
                                                                                       have the cooling system checked by
                      Operator’s
                                                                                       an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                      Manual


 Warning!                                G
 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
 Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
 may burn if it comes into contact with hot
 engine parts. You could be seriously burned.


! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level
warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Lim-
ited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
in the cooling system. The engine will overheat
causing major engine damage.




                                                                                                                        345
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol    Display message   Possible cause/consequence         Possible solution
•                 Coolant           The coolant is too hot.                Stop the vehicle in a safe location or
                  Stop, turn                                               as soon as it is safe to do so.
                                    Among other possible causes, the
                  engine off
                                    poly-V-belt could be broken.           Apply the parking brake ( page 54).
                                                                           Turn off the engine.
                                                                           Check the poly-V-belt.
                                                                       If it is broken:
                                                                           Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
                                                                           the engine will overheat due to an in-
                                                                           operative water pump which may re-
                                                                           sult in damage to the engine. Contact
                                                                           an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                                       If it is intact:
                                                                           Wait for the message to disappear be-
                                                                           fore restarting the engine.
                                                                           Doing otherwise could result in seri-
                                                                           ous engine damage that is not covered
                                                                           by the Mercedes-Benz Limited War-
                                                                           ranty.
                                                                           (Continued on next page)



346
                                                                                                                       Practical hints
                                                                                                                         What to do if …


Display symbol     Display message            Possible cause/consequence                 Possible solution
                                                                                              Observe the coolant temperature gauge in
                                                                                              the instrument cluster ( page 24).
                                                                                              If the temperature rises again:
                                                                                                 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                                 Center immediately.
•                                             The cooling fan for the coolant is mal- Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the in-
                                              functioning.                            strument cluster ( page 24).
                                                                                              Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.

                                                                                                 ! The engine should not be operated with the
Warning!                             G          Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
                                                and do not stand near the vehicle until the
                                                                                                 coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C). Do-
                                                                                                 ing so may cause serious engine damage which
Driving when your engine is overheated can      engine has cooled down.                          is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
cause some fluids which may have leaked                                                          Warranty.
into the engine compartment to catch fire.    During severe operating conditions and
You could be seriously burned.                stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
                                              perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.




                                                                                                                                       347
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol     Display message             Possible cause/consequence                      Possible solution
±                                              Certain electronic systems are unable to           Have the electronic systems checked
                                               relay information to the control system.           by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                               The following systems may have failed:             Center.
                                                   Coolant temperature display
                                                   Tachometer
                                                   Cruise control display
:                  Check oil level             The engine oil has dropped to a critical           Check the engine oil level
                   at next gas station         level.                                             ( page 276) and add oil as required
                                                                                                  ( page 277).
                                                                                                  If you must add engine oil frequently,
                                                                                                  have the engine checked for possible
                                                                                                  leaks.

When the message Check oil level at          Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil   ! The engine oil level warnings should not be
next gas station appears while the en-       leaks are noted, drive to the nearest             ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis-
gine is running and at operating tempera-    service station where the engine oil should       played could result in serious engine damage
ture, the engine oil level has dropped to    be topped to the required level with an           that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
approximately the minimum level.             approved oil specified in the Factory             ed Warranty.
                                             Approved Service Products pamphlet.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.



348
                                                                                                    Practical hints
                                                                                                        What to do if …


Display symbol   Display message   Possible cause/consequence               Possible solution
4                Gas cap           A loss of pressure has been detected in        Check the fuel cap ( page 271).
                 is open           the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
                                                                             If it is not closed properly:
                                   closed properly or the fuel system may be
                                   leaky.                                         Close the fuel cap.
                                                                            If it is closed properly:
                                                                                Have the fuel system checked by an
                                                                                authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
I                Remove key        You have forgotten to remove the             Remove the SmartKey from the starter
                                   SmartKey.                                    switch.
                 Get a new         No additional code available for             Change the SmartKey.
                 key               SmartKey.
.                3rd brake         The high mounted brake lamp is               Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                 lamp              malfunctioning.                              Center as soon as possible.
                 AUTO-Light        The light sensor is malfunctioning.          In the control system, set lamp opera-
                 inoperative       The headlamps switch on automatically.       tion to manual mode ( page 139).
                                                                                Switch on the headlamps using the
                                                                                exterior lamp switch.
                                                                                Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                                Center as soon as possible.




                                                                                                                    349
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol    Display message   Possible cause/consequence                    Possible solution
.                 Brake lamp        The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.           Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  left                                                               ( page 373).
                  Brake lamp        The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.          Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  right                                                              ( page 373).
                  Front             The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.       Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                  foglamp                                                            Center as soon as possible.
                  left
                  Front             The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.      Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                  foglamp                                                            Center as soon as possible.
                  right
                  Front left        The left front side marker lamp is               Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                  side marker       malfunctioning.                                  Center as soon as possible.
                  lamp
                  Front right       The right front side marker lamp is              Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                  side marker       malfunctioning.                                  Center as soon as possible.
                  lamp
                  High beam         The left high beam lamp is                       Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  left              malfunctioning.                                  ( page 371).
                  High beam         The right high beam lamp is                      Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  right             malfunctioning.                                  ( page 371).




350
                                                                                                 Practical hints
                                                                                                 What to do if …


Display symbol   Display message   Possible cause/consequence              Possible solution
.                License plate     The left license plate lamp is             Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 lamp, left        malfunctioning.                            ( page 374).
                 License plate     The right license plate lamp is            Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 lamp, right       malfunctioning.                            ( page 374).
                 Low beam          The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning. Halogen headlamp:
                 left
                                                                              Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                                                                              ( page 370).
                                                                           Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
                                                                              Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                              Center as soon as possible.
                 Low beam          The right low beam lamp is              Halogen headlamp:
                 right             malfunctioning.
                                                                              Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                                                                              ( page 370).
                                                                           Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
                                                                              Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                                                                              Center as soon as possible.
                 Parking lamp      The left front parking lamp is             Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 front left        malfunctioning.                            ( page 371).
                 Parking lamp      The right front parking lamp is            Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 front right       malfunctioning.                            ( page 371).


                                                                                                              351
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol    Display message   Possible cause/consequence                 Possible solution
.                 Rear              The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.          Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  fog lamp          A substitute bulb is being used.              ( page 373).
                  Auxiliary bulb
                  on
                  Reverse           The left backup lamp is malfunctioning.       Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  lamp                                                            ( page 373).
                  left
                  Reverse           The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.      Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  lamp                                                            ( page 373).
                  right
                  Switch off        You have removed the SmartKey from the        Switch off the headlamps.
                  lights            starter switch, opened the driver’s door
                                    and left the headlamps on.
                  Tail lamp         The left tail lamp is malfunctioning.         Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  left              A substitute bulb is being used.              ( page 373).
                  Auxiliary bulb
                  on
                  Tail lamp         The right tail lamp is malfunctioning.        Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                  right             A substitute bulb is being used.              ( page 373).
                  Auxiliary bulb
                  on




352
                                                                                                      Practical hints
                                                                                                       What to do if …


Display symbol   Display message   Possible cause/consequence                    Possible solution
.                Turn signal       The left front turn signal lamp is               Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 front left        malfunctioning.                                  ( page 371).
                 Turn signal       The right front turn signal lamp is              Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 front right       malfunctioning.                                  ( page 371).
                 Turn signal       The turn signal in the left exterior rear        Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                 left side         view mirror is malfunctioning. This mes-         Center as soon as possible.
                 mirror            sage will only appear if a critical number
                                   of LEDs have stopped working.
                 Turn signal       The turn signal in the right exterior rear       Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
                 right side        view mirror is malfunctioning. This mes-         Center as soon as possible.
                 mirror            sage will only appear if a critical number
                                   of LEDs have stopped working.
                 Turn signal       The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-       Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 rear left         tioning. A substitute bulb is being used         ( page 373).
                 Auxiliary bulb
                 on
                 Turn signal       The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunc-      Replace the bulb as soon as possible
                 rear right        tioning. A substitute bulb is being used.        ( page 373).
                 Auxiliary bulb
                 on




                                                                                                                    353
Practical hints
What to do if …


Display symbol         Display message               Possible cause/consequence                Possible solution
_                      Steering oil                  The steering gear oil level is too low.      Have the system checked by an
                       Visit workshop                There is a danger of steering gear           authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
                                                     damage.


 Warning!                                   G
 If the level of steering gear oil in reservoir is
 too low, the steering power assistance could
 fail. Much greater effort will then be needed
 to turn the steering wheel.
 Do not add steering oil without checking the
 steering system.
 Do not drive the vehicle. Have the system
 checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
 Center as soon as possible.




354
                                                                                                       Practical hints
                                                                                                        What to do if …


Display symbol   Display message         Possible cause/consequence                Possible solution
L                Tele Aid malfunction.   One or more main functions of the Tele       Have the Tele Aid system* checked by
                 Drive to workshop       Aid system* are malfunctioning.              an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
t                Function unavailable    This display appears if button t
                                         or s on the multifunction steering
                                         wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not
                                         equipped with a telephone*.
W                Top up                  The fluid level has dropped to               Add washer fluid ( page 280).
                 washer fluid            about 1/3 of total reservoir capacity.




                                                                                                                      355
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?


First aid kit                                   Vehicle tool kit                                 Removing the vehicle tool kit
                                                                                                    Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
The first aid kit is located in the trunk on    The vehicle tool kit is located in the storage
                                                                                                    trunk floor handle in upper edge of
the left side secured by a hook and loop        compartment underneath the trunk floor.
                                                                                                    trunk.
fastener.
                                                The following is included:
                                                   Towing eye bolt
                                                   Wheel wrench
                                                   Alignment bolt
                                                   Vehicle jack
                                                   Spare fuses
                                                   Collapsible wheel chock
                                                   A pair of gloves                              1 Retaining screw
1 First aid kit
                                                                                                 2 Storage well casing
2 Hook and loop fastener
                                                                                                    Loosen retaining screw 1 by turning it
   Unfasten hook and loop fastener 2.
                                                                                                    counterclockwise.
   Remove first aid kit 1.
                                                                                                    Remove storage well casing 2.
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and replace
missing/expired items.




356
                                                                                                                       Practical hints
                                                                                                                Where will I find ...?


                                           Storing the vehicle tool kit                      Vehicle jack
                                               Place vehicle tool kit 6 in vehicle tool
                                               kit storage well casing 5.                     Warning!                                  G
                                               Place storage well casing 2 over the
                                                                                              The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
                                               vehicle tool kit storage well casing 5
                                                                                              up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
                                               and turn retaining screw 1 clockwise
                                                                                              built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
                                               as far it will go to secure the Minispare
                                                                                              avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
                                               wheel.
                                                                                              the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
                                           i Arrow 3 on vehicle tool kit storage well         get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
3 Arrow                                    casing 5 must point in the direction of travel.    by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
4 Minispare wheel with spare wheel bolts   Otherwise you cannot place the storage well        the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
  in container on wheel rim                casing 2 on top and secure the Minispare           firmly set parking brake and block wheels
5 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing     wheel with retaining screw 1.
                                                                                              before raising vehicle with jack.
6 Vehicle tool kit                         ! To prevent damage, always disengage trunk        Do not disengage parking brake while the
   Remove vehicle tool kit 6.              floor handle from upper edge of trunk and lower    vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
                                           trunk floor before closing the trunk.
                                                                                              always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
                                                                                              especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
                                                                                              on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is
                                                                                              fully seated in the jack take-up bracket.
                                                                                              Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
                                                                                              capacity jackstands before working under
                                                                                              the vehicle.




                                                                                                                                         357
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?


The vehicle jack is located in the storage                                              Setting up the collapsible wheel chock
compartment underneath the trunk floor.                                                 The collapsible wheel chock serves to
                                                                                        additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
                                                                                        changing the wheel.




                                             Operational position
                                                Turn crank handle clockwise.
Storage position
                                             Before storing the vehicle jack in its
   Turn crank handle in direction of arrow   compartment:
   as far as it will go.
                                                It should be fully collapsed.
   Push crank handle up.
                                                The handle must be folded in (storage
                                                position).

                                                                                        1 Tilt the plate upward
                                                                                        2 Fold the lower plate outward
                                                                                        3 Insert the plate




358
                                                                                                              Practical hints
                                                                                                         Where will I find ...?


   Tilt both plates upward 1.                  Minispare wheel
   Fold the lower plate outward 2.
                                               The Minispare wheel is located in the
   Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the   storage compartment underneath the
   way into the openings of the base           trunk floor.
   plate 3.
For information on where to place wheel        Removing the Minispare wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-          Lift up trunk floor cover and engage
ing the vehicle” ( page 378).                     trunk floor handle in upper edge of
                                                  trunk.
                                                                                         1 Vehicle tool kit
                                                  Loosen the retaining screw             2 Arrow
                                                  ( page 356) in the middle of storage   3 Minispare wheel with spare wheel bolts
                                                  well casing.                             in container on wheel rim
                                                  Remove the storage well casing         4 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing
                                                  ( page 356).                              Remove vehicle tool kit storage well
                                                                                            casing 4.
                                                                                            Remove Minispare wheel 3.




                                                                                                                             359
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?


Storing the Minispare wheel                                                                          Spare wheel bolts
   Place Minispare wheel 3 in wheel
                                                    Warning!                                G
   well.                                            The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
   Place vehicle tool kit storage well              different from those of the road wheels. As
   casing 4 over the Minispare wheel.               a result, the vehicle handling characteristics
                                                    change when driving with a Minispare wheel
   Make sure arrow 2 on vehicle tool kit
                                                    mounted.
   storage well casing 4 points in the
   direction of travel.                             The Minispare wheel should only be used
                                                    temporarily, and should be replaced with a
   Place storage well casing ( page 356)
                                                    regular road wheel as quickly as possible.
   over vehicle tool kit storage well
   casing 4 and turn